2015 Subaru Forester PDF

2015
Forester
Owner’s Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*C Copyright 2013 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

1
Warranties How to use this Owner’s Chapter 4: Climate control

Manual This chapter informs you how to operate
& Warranties for U.S.A. the climate control.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual Chapter 5: Audio
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully This chapter informs you how to operate
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the read this manual. To protect yourself and your audio system.
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle, Chapter 6: Interior equipment
warranties: follow the instructions in this manual. This chapter informs you how to operate
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Failure to observe these instructions may interior equipment.
. Emission Control Systems Warranty result in serious injury and damage to your Chapter 7: Starting and operating
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle. This chapter informs you how to start and
This manual is composed of fourteen operate your SUBARU.
All warranty information, including details
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief Chapter 8: Driving tips
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. table of contents, so you can usually tell at This chapter informs you how to drive your
Please read these warranties carefully. a glance if that chapter contains the SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
information you want. plains some safety tips on driving.
& Warranties for Canada Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
airbags This chapter informs you what to do if you
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
have a problem while driving, such as a
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by This chapter informs you how to use the
flat tire or engine overheating.
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
come with the following warranties: tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 10: Appearance care
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
. Emission Control Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you when you need
All warranty information, including details to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
This chapter informs you about the opera-
of coverage and exclusions, is in the scheduled maintenance and informs you
tion of instrument panel indicators and
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please how to use the instruments and other
how to keep your SUBARU running
read these warranties carefully. properly.
switches.
– CONTINUED –

2
Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION & Abbreviation list

This chapter informs you about dimen- You may find several abbreviations in this
sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your tions are shown in the following list.
Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the
This chapter informs you about Uniform caution is ignored. Abbreviation Meaning
tire quality grading standards and Report- A/C Air conditioner
ing safety defects. NOTE A/ELR Automatic/Emergency locking
Chapter 14: Index retractor
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in tions how to make better use of your ABS Anti-lock brake system
this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle.
something you want to read. AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
& Safety warnings & Safety symbol AWD All-wheel drive
You will find a number of WARNINGs, Continuously variable trans-
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. CVT mission
These safety warnings alert you to poten- DRL Daytime running light
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others. EBD Electronic brake force distri-
bution
Please read these safety warnings as well
ELR Emergency locking retractor
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand- GAW Gross axle weight
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle GAWR Gross axle weight rating
safely.
GPS Global positioning system
WARNING GVW Gross vehicle weight
You will find a circle with a slash through it GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do HID High intensity discharge
result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this INT Intermittent
happen”, depending upon the context.

3
Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when

Lower anchors and tethers for
driving
LATCH children There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag
LED Light emitting diode
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
MIL Malfunction indicator light “Warning and indicator lights” F20. WARNING
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
MMT ganese tricarbonyl Mark Name . All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
MT Manual transmission
WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other-
OBD On-board diagnostics wise, the possibility of serious
RON Research octane number injury becomes greater in the
CAUTION event of a sudden stop or acci-
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
dent.
Supplemental restraint sys-
SRS tem . To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
TIN Tire identification number driver and all passengers in the
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys- vehicle should always wear seat-
tem belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
– CONTINUED –

4
. The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force. considerable speed and force
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING and can injure or even kill chil-
position when the SRS airbag dren, especially if they are 12
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or years of age and under and are
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is not restrained or improperly re-
needs enough space for deploy- moving. The passenger cannot strained. Because children are
ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a lighter and weaker than adults,
sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will their risk of being injured from
seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen- deployment is greater.
wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi- . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
maintaining full vehicle control cle. FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
move the seat as far back as fants and small children should SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
system which is appropriate for THE SRS AIRBAG.
For instructions and precautions, carefully the child’s age, height and
read the following sections. . Always turn the child safety locks
weight. If a child is too big for a to the “LOCK” position when
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- child restraint system, the child children sit in the rear seat.
belts” F1-13. should sit in the REAR seat and Serious injury could result if a
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts. child accidentally opens the door
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics, and falls out. Refer to “Child
System airbag)” F1-37. children are safer when properly safety locks” F2-27.
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat- . Always lock the passenger’s win-
ing positions. Never allow a child dows using the lock switch when
to stand up or kneel on the seat. children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
. Put children aged 12 and under in could result in injury to a child
the REAR seat properly re- operating the power window. Re-
strained at all times in a child fer to “Windows” F2-27.
restraint device or in a seatbelt.

5
. Never leave unattended children, . For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves
adults or animals in the vehicle. “Child restraint systems” F1-25. or other obstructions to ensure
They could accidentally injure . For the SRS airbag system, refer to that the ventilation system al-
themselves or others through “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint ways works properly.
inadvertent operation of the ve- System airbag)” F1-37. . If at any time you suspect that
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, exhaust fumes are entering the
temperature in a closed vehicle & Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem
could quickly become high en- monoxide) checked and corrected as soon
ough to cause severe or possibly as possible. If you must drive
fatal injuries to them. WARNING under these conditions, drive
. When leaving the vehicle, close only with all windows fully open.
all windows and lock all doors. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while
. In models with power rear gate, Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas
when it operates, the rear gate carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
moves with remarkable force. It and odorless gas which is dan-
is possible to be injured if any- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
one is caught in or hit by the rear . Always properly maintain the en- & Drinking and driving
gate so be sure to obey the gine exhaust system to prevent
following cautions. engine exhaust gas from enter- WARNING
– Check that there are no chil- ing the vehicle.
dren around the rear gate . Never run the engine in a closed Drinking and then driving is very
before operating the power space, such as a garage, except dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
rear gate. for the brief time needed to drive stream delays your reaction time
the vehicle in or out of it. and impairs your perception, judg-
– Do not allow children to oper- ment and attentiveness. If you drive
ate the power rear gate. . Avoid remaining in a parked
after drinking – even if you drink just
vehicle for a lengthy time while
a little – it will increase the risk of
For instructions and precautions, carefully the engine is running. If that is
being involved in a serious or fatal
read the following sections. unavoidable, then use the venti-
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- lation fan to force fresh air into
your passengers and others. In
belts” F1-13. the vehicle.
addition, if you are injured in the
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the
– CONTINUED –

6
severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive When possible, you should share the
Please don’t drink and drive. after taking any medications that can driving with others.
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
Drunken driving is one of the most ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If & Modification of your vehicle
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- you have a medical condition that requires
hol affects all people differently, you may you to take drugs, please consult with CAUTION
have consumed too much alcohol to drive your doctor.
safely even if the level of alcohol in your Your vehicle should not be modified
Never drive if you are under the influence other than with genuine SUBARU
blood is below the legal limit. The safest of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
thing you can do is never drink and drive. parts and accessories. Other types
own health and well-being, we urge you of modifications could affect its
However if you have no choice but to not to take illegal drugs in the first place
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- performance, safety or durability,
and to seek treatment if you are addicted and may even violate governmental
tely before getting behind the wheel. to those drugs. regulations. In addition, damage or
& Drugs and driving performance problems resulting
& Driving when tired or sleepy from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
WARNING WARNING
There are some drugs (over the When you are tired or sleepy, your
counter and prescription) that can reaction time will be delayed and
& Car phone/cell phone and
delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- driving
your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you
tentiveness. If you drive after taking drive when tired or sleepy, your, CAUTION
them, it may increase your, your your passengers’ and other per-
passengers’ and other persons’ risk Do not use a car phone/cell phone
sons’ chances of being involved in
of being involved in a serious or while driving; it may distract your
a serious accident may increase.
fatal accident. attention from driving and can lead
Please do not continue to drive but to an accident. If you use a car
If you are taking any drugs, check with instead find a safe place to rest if you phone/cell phone, pull off the road
your doctor or pharmacist or read the are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you and park in a safe place before
literature that accompanies the medication should make periodic rest stops to refresh using your phone. In some States/
to determine if the drug you are taking can yourself before continuing on your journey. Provinces, only hands-free phones

7
may legally be used while driving. seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier & On-road and off-road driving
which can be secured to the rear seat by This vehicle is classified as a utility
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly
& Driving vehicles equipped handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers higher rollover rate than other types of
with navigation system in the front passenger’s seat. For further vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground
information, consult your veterinarian, clearance and higher center of gravity,
WARNING local animal protection society or pet making it more likely to roll over than
shop. ordinary passenger cars. It also handles
Do not allow the monitor to distract and maneuvers differently from other
your attention from driving. Also, do & Tire pressures passenger cars. For this reason, please
not operate the controls of the Check and, if necessary, adjust the read carefully the following section and
navigation system while driving. pressure of each tire (including the spare) follow the instructions and precautions in
The loss of attention to driving at least once a month and before any long order to prevent serious injury or death
could lead to an accident. If you journey. due to loss of control, rollover and other
wish to operate the controls of the accidents. Refer to “On-road and off-road
navigation system, first take the Check the tire pressure when the tires are driving” F8-6.
vehicle off the road and stop it in a cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
safe place. tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-25.
& Driving with pets
WARNING
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from Driving at high speeds with exces-
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, sively low tire pressures can cause
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown the tires to deform severely and to
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
your passengers. Besides, the pets can crease in temperature could cause
be hurt under these situations. It is also for tread separation, and destruction of
their own safety that pets should be the tires. The resulting loss of
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- vehicle control could lead to an
strain a pet with a special traveling accident.
harness which can be secured to the rear

8
General information & Noise from under the vehicle pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
NOTE
& California proposition 65
You may hear a noise from under the These data can help provide a better
warning vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours understanding of the circumstances in
after the engine is turned off. However, which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
WARNING this does not indicate a malfunction. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
Engine exhaust, some of its consti- This noise is caused by the operation only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
tuents, and certain vehicle compo- of the fuel evaporation leakage check- no data are recorded by the EDR under
nents contain or emit chemicals ing system and is normal. The noise normal driving conditions and no personal
known to the State of California to will stop after approximately 15 min- data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
cause cancer and birth defects or utes. location) are recorded. However, other
other reproductive harm. In addi- parties, such as law enforcement, could
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and & Event data recorder combine the EDR data with the type of
certain components of product wear personally identifying data routinely ac-
This vehicle is equipped with an event quired during a crash investigation.
contain or emit chemicals known to data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
the State of California to cause an EDR is to record, in certain crash or To read data recorded by an EDR, special
cancer and birth defects or other near crash-like situations, such as an air equipment is required, and access to the
reproductive harm. bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
data that will assist in understanding how to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR such as law enforcement, that have the
& California Perchlorate Advi- is designed to record data related to special equipment, can read the informa-
sory vehicle dynamics and safety systems for tion if they have access to the vehicle or
Certain vehicle components such as air- a short period of time, typically 30 seconds the EDR.
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
keyless entry transmitter batteries may designed to record such data as:
contain perchlorate material. Special . How various systems in your vehicle
handling may apply for service or vehicle were operating;
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ . Whether or not the driver and passen-
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake

Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14

10
1) Engine hood (page 11-7)
Illustrated index 2) Headlight switch (page 3-89)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-40)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-95)
5) Moonroof (page 2-39)
6) Roof rails (page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-4)
8) Outside mirrors (page 3-104)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-27)
10) Flat tires (page 9-5)
11) Snow tires (page 8-11)
12) Fog light switch (page 3-93)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
14) Towing hook (page 9-13)

11
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-106)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-27)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)
5) Rear gate (page 2-31)
6) Towing hook (page 9-13)
– CONTINUED –

12
& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-33)
! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-13)
3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-8)

13
1) Power windows (page 2-27)
2) Door locks (page 2-4)
3) Glove box (page 6-6)
4) Front power supply socket (page 6-9)
5) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-21)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-23)
6) Parking brake lever (page 7-43)
7) Cup holder (page 6-7)
8) Center console (page 6-6)
– CONTINUED –

14
& Instrument panel 1) Outside mirror switch (page 3-104)

2) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(models with power rear gate)
(page 7-37)
3) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-92)
4) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(models without power rear gate)
(page 7-37)/Memory switch (models with
power rear gate) (page 2-36)
5) Combination meter (page 3-7)
6) Information display (page 3-31)/
Multi function display (page 3-36)
7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-7)
8) Audio (page 5-1)
9) Climate control (page 4-1)
10) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
(page 3-108)
11) Power rear gate switch (page 2-32)
12) Fuse box (page 11-38)
13) Hood lock release (page 11-7)

15
& Steering wheel 1) Audio control buttons (page 5-34)

2) Cruise control (page 7-48)
3) Shift paddle (page 7-25)
4) Hands-free switches (page 5-39)
5) Multi function display control switches
(page 3-36)
6) SRS airbag (page 1-37)
7) Horn (page 3-108)
8) SI-DRIVE switches (page 7-30)
– CONTINUED –

16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-93)
2) Mist (page 3-95)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-95)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-96)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-95)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-95)
7) Light control switch (page 3-88)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-93)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-89)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-90)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-91)

17
& Combination meter 1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-8)
! U.S.-spec. models (type A) 3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-29)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) Information display selection knob
(page 3-31)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-9)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

18
! U.S.-spec. models (type B) 1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-29)
(page 3-31)

19
! Except U.S.-spec. models 1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-29)
(page 3-31)
6) ECO gauge (if equipped) (page 3-10)
– CONTINUED –

20
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page AT OIL TEMP warning 3-17 High beam indicator 3-30
light (CVT models) light
Seatbelt warning light 3-11 Automatic headlight
ABS warning light 3-18 beam leveler warning 3-30
light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s 3-11
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-19 Front fog light indicator 3-30
light light (if equipped)
SRS airbag system 3-13
warning light Door open warning 3-20 Access key warning 3-23
light light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag ON indi- 3-13
cator AWD warning light 3-21
(CVT models) Security indicator light 3-28
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag OFF in- 3-13
dicator Power steering warn- 3-21 Headlight indicator
ing light light (if equipped) 3-30
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc- 3-14 Hill start assist warn-
tion indicator light ing light/Hill start assist 3-20 Cruise control indica- 3-30
OFF indicator light tor light
Coolant temperature
low indicator light/ 3-15 Vehicle Dynamics
Coolant temperature Cruise control set in- 3-30
Control warning light/ dicator light
high warning light Vehicle Dynamics 3-22
Control operation indi-
Charge warning light 3-16 cator light X-mode indicator light
(if equipped) 3-30
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator 3-23 Hill descent control in-
Oil pressure warning 3-16 light
light dicator light (if 3-30
equipped)
Turn signal indicator 3-30
Engine low oil level lights
3-16 Low fuel warning light 3-20
warning light

21
Mark Name Page

Low tire pressure
warning light 3-17
(U.S.-spec. models)
Windshield washer 3-16

fluid warning light
Sport (S) mode indi- 3-29

cator light (if equipped)
Intelligent (I) mode in-

dicator light (if 3-29
equipped)
Sport Sharp (S#)
mode indicator light (if 3-29
equipped)

22
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions
can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Multi function display” F3-36.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only models with shock Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming (models without “keyless access with Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
push-button start system”)
Dome light and map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF
Keyless access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Door unlock selection function (driver’s door unlock) Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only
Door unlock selection function (rear gate unlock) Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system for models Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15
with the automatic climate control system windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation minutes
Dome light Operation of dome light/map light OFF delay timer OFF/10S/20S/30S 30S
Map light
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

23
Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation Operation/Non-operation Non-operation*1
*1: Except for U.S. model, the default setting will be “Operation”.

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
System servicing ............................................... 1-24

1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-4 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-25
Power seat (driver’s seat — if equipped) .............. 1-5 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-26
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-7 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-28
Rear seats............................................................ 1-8 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Armrest (if equipped)........................................... 1-8 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-28
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-9 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-32
Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-10 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-33
Reclining the seatback (if equipped) ................... 1-12
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-36
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-13
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-13
System airbag)................................................ 1-37
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-14
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor system ............................................................ 1-38
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-14
Components ...................................................... 1-44
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-15
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-46
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-15
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-56
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-21
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-64
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-21 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-65
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-21 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-66
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt
pretensioners ................................................... 1-23
System monitors ................................................ 1-24

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
Front seats If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
WARNING the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
. Never adjust the seat while driv- increase, and both can result in
ing to avoid losing control of the serious internal injury or death.
vehicle which can result in per-
sonal injury. . The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are out of proper
sure the hands and feet of rear position when the SRS airbag
seat passengers and cargo are deploys could suffer very serious
clear of the adjusting mechan- injuries. Because the SRS airbag
ism. needs enough space for deploy-
. After adjusting the seat, push it ment, the driver should always WARNING
slightly to make sure it is se- sit upright and well back in the Put children aged 12 and under in
curely locked. If the seat is not seat as far from the steering the rear seat properly restrained at
securely locked, it may move or wheel as practical while still all times. The SRS airbag deploys
the seatbelt may not operate maintaining full vehicle control with considerable speed and force
properly. and the front passenger should and can injure or even kill children,
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as especially if they are 12 years of age
seats. They may interfere with possible and sit upright and well and under and are not restrained or
front seat locking and cause an back in the seat. improperly restrained. Because chil-
accident. dren are lighter and weaker than
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- adults, their risk of being injured
straint when the occupant sits from deployment is greater. For that
well back and upright in the seat. reason, we strongly recommend
To reduce the risk of sliding that ALL children (including those
under the seatbelt in a collision, in child seats and those that have
the front seatbacks should be outgrown child restraint devices) sit
always used in the upright posi- in the REAR seat properly re-
tion while the vehicle is running. strained at all times in a child

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-3
restraint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, WARNING WARNING
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi- To prevent the passenger from slid- Do not let rear passengers rest their
tions than in the front seating posi- ing under the seatbelt in the event of feet between the front seatback and
tions. For instructions and precau- a collision, always put the seatback seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
tions concerning child restraint sys- in the upright position while the defective operation of the following
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- vehicle is in motion. Also, do not systems and could result in serious
tems” F1-25. place objects such as cushions injury.
between the passenger and the . Occupant detection system
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the . SRS side airbag
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen . Seat heater (if equipped)
will increase, and both can result in . Power seat (if equipped)
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –

& Manual seat ! Reclining the seatback ! Seat height adjustment (driver’s
seat)
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to release the lever and make sure the is lowered.
the desired position. Then release the seatback is securely locked into place. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
lever and try to move the seat back and rises.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
forth to make sure that it is securely locked The height of the seat can be adjusted by
can spring back upward with force when
into place. moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the up and down.
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats 1-5
& Power seat (driver’s seat — if justment of the seat, you cannot adjust & Head restraint adjustment
the seat cushion angle or seat height.
equipped) 2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up WARNING
or push down the front end of the control
switch. . Never drive the vehicle with the
3) Seat height control switch head restraints removed because
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push they are designed to reduce the
down the rear end of the control switch. risk of serious neck injury in the
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control event that the vehicle is struck
switch from the rear. Also, never install
To adjust the angle of the seatback, the head restraints the opposite
move the control switch. way round. Doing so will prevent
5) Lumbar support control switch the head restraints from func-
To increase lower back support, push the tioning as intended. Therefore,
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of when you remove the head re-
the switch. straints, you must reinstall all
head restraints correctly to pro-
tect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat are equipped with head re-
1) Seat position forward/backward con- straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-
trol switch ble in the following ways.
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
– CONTINUED –

! Head restraint height adjustment are located on the top of the seatback until automatically return to the fully upright
the head restraint locks. Press and hold position. Then, adjust the head restraint
the release button to lower the head again to the preferred angle.
restraint.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
To raise: ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
Pull the head restraint up. head restraint to a position where the back
To lower: of your head is as close to the head
Push the head restraint down while restraint as possible.
pressing the release button on the top of
To tilt:
the seatback.
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
To remove:
preferred position. A click will be audible
While pressing the release button, pull out when the head restraint is locked.
the head restraint.
To return:
To install:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
Install the head restraint into the holes that as it can go. The head restraint will

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater 1-7
Seat heater (if equipped) desired, depending on the temperature.

Selecting the “HIGH” position will cause
The front seats are equipped with a seat the seat to heat up quicker.
heater. To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
The seat heater operates when the igni- opposite side of the current position.
tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” The indicator located on the switch illumi-
position. nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
CAUTION enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period 1) HIGH – Rapid heating
of time while the engine is not running 2) LOW – Normal heating
3) Off
can cause battery discharge.
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LOW”
or “HIGH” position on the switch, as

1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
Rear seats & Armrest (if equipped)
WARNING
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
Never stack luggage or other cargo of the armrest.
WARNING
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
injure passengers in the event of a To avoid serious injury, passengers
straint when the occupant sits well
sudden stop or accident. must never be allowed to sit on the
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials center armrest.
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-9
& Head restraint adjustment ! Rear windows side seating position ! Rear center seating position
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head CAUTION
restraints.
The head restraint is not intended to
WARNING be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraint to the extended posi-
head restraints removed because tion.
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you have removed the head re-
straints, you must reinstall all 1) Head restraint
head restraints to protect vehicle 2) Release button
occupants.
To remove:
. All occupants, including the dri-
While pressing the release button, pull out
ver, should not operate a vehicle
the head restraint.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their To install:
proper positions in order to mini- Install the head restraint into the holes that
mize the risk of neck injury in the are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold 1) When not used (retracted position)
event of a crash.
the release button to lower the head 2) When used (extended position)
restraint.
After installing the head restraint, make
sure it is securely locked.
– CONTINUED –

When the rear-center seating position is seatback slightly to confirm that

occupied, raise the head restraint to the it is securely fixed in place. If the
extended position. When the rear center seatback is not securely fixed in
seating position is not occupied, lower the place, the seatback may sud-
head restraint to improve rearward visibi- denly fold down in the event of
lity. sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
& Folding down the rear seat- which could cause serious injury
back or death.
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
1) Head restraint back, check that there are no
2) Release button passengers or objects on the
To raise: rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property da-
Pull the head restraint up.
mage if the seatback suddenly
To lower: folds down.
Push the head restraint down while
. Never allow passengers to ride
pressing the release button on the top of
on the folded rear seatback or in
the seatback.
the cargo area. Doing so may
To remove: result in serious injury or death.
While pressing the release button, pull out
. Secure all objects and especially
the head restraint.
long items properly to prevent
To install: them from being thrown around
Install the head restraint into the holes that inside the vehicle and causing
are located on the top of the seatback until serious injury during a sudden
the head restraint locks. Press and hold stop, a sudden steering maneu-
the release button to lower the head ver or a rapid acceleration.
restraint.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats 1-11
ing precautions. Failure to do so

may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the operation effi-
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. Be careful to prevent the seatbelt
from running off the belt guide.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the securing hook for
the seatback.
Release knob
CAUTION
. Do not hang luggage etc. on the
securing hook. The possibility
exists that the seatback may not
be able to be fixed firmly in place.
This could lead to unexpected
accidents.
. While driving, if something hits
the release latch, it is possible
that the seatback will fold down.
1) Securing hook Be careful that no luggage etc.
hits the latch. Release latch on both sides of the cargo
area (if equipped)
WARNING 1. Lower the head restraint of the rear 2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock
When the seatback is returned to its center seating position. release knob or release latch (if equipped)
original position, observe the follow- and then fold the seatback down.
– CONTINUED –

To return the seatback to its original WARNING

position, raise the seatback until it locks WARNING
into place and make sure that it is securely After returning the seatback to its To prevent the passenger from slid-
locked referring to the following descrip- original position, confirm that the ing under the seatbelt in the event of
tion. unlocking marker of the lock release a collision, always put the seatback
knob is no longer visible. Failure to in the upright position while the
do so could lead to serious injury or vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
death in the event of an accident. place objects such as cushions
When you return the seatback to its between the passenger and the
original position, shake the seat- seatback. If you do so, the risk of
back slightly to confirm that it is sliding under the lap belt and of the
securely fixed in place. lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
& Reclining the seatback (if serious internal injury or death.
equipped)
CAUTION
Lock release knob If your vehicle is equipped with a
1) Unlocked cargo area cover, observe the fol-
2) Locked lowing precautions.
A) Unlocking marker in red
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
When the seatback is locked, the lock between the head restraint and
release knob is automatically pulled into the cargo area cover when you
the seatback and the unlocking marker, recline the rear seat.
which is red colored and attached to the . Move the front cover of the cargo
bottom of the lock release knob, will no area cover backward so that the
longer be visible. cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-
go area cover” F6-13.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-13
Seatbelts the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag
& Seatbelt safety tips deploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
WARNING kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
. All persons in the vehicle should are not restrained or improperly
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE restrained. Because children are
the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults,
wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from
injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. For that
event of a sudden stop or acci- reason, we strongly recommend
dent. that ALL children (including
Pull the strap and adjust the seatback to . All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those
the desired position. to provide full restraint. Loose that have outgrown child re-
Then release the strap and make sure the fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR
seatback is securely locked into place. preventing or reducing injury. seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
. Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is
support only one person. Never appropriate for the child’s height
use a single belt for two or more and weight.
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re-
injury or death could result. straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times.
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
of a vehicle that has been in a FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
serious accident. The entire as- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
if damage is not obvious. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
. Put children aged 12 and under in THE SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –

1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
According to accident statistics, place the shoulder belt under the child’s & Automatic/Emergency Lock-
children are safer when properly arm or behind the child’s back. ing Retractor (A/ELR)
restrained in the rear seating ! Expectant mothers Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
positions than in the front seat- matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ing positions. For instructions ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
and precautions concerning the Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
child restraint system, refer to gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
“Child restraint systems” F1-25. ELR has an additional locking mode
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
! Infants or small children mode” intended to secure a child restraint
Use a child restraint system that is system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child out completely and is then retracted even
restraint systems” F1-25. slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
! Children
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
If a child is too big for a child restraint will be heard which indicate the retractor
system, the child should sit in the rear seat Expectant mothers also need to use the functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
and be restrained using the seatbelts. seatbelts. They should consult their doctor retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
According to accident statistics, children for specific recommendations. The lap belt
are safer when properly restrained in the When securing a child restraint system on
should be worn securely and as low as the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
rear seating positions than in the front possible over the hips, not over the waist.
seating positions. Never allow a child to the seatbelt must be changed over to the
stand up or kneel on the seat. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses tor (ELR) When the child restraint system is re-
the face or neck, move the child closer to moved, make sure that the seatbelt
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
the belt buckle to help provide a good retracts fully and the retractor returned to
Locking Retractor (ELR).
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The emergency locking retractor allows mode.
securely place the lap belt as low as
normal body movement but the retractor
possible on the hips and not on the child’s For instructions on how to convert the
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
cannot be properly positioned, a child the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
out of the retractor.
restraint system should be used. Never restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt”

F1-28. collision, the risk of sliding under the arm or behind the back. If an
the lap belt and of the lap belt accident occurs, this can increase
& Seatbelt warning light sliding up over the abdomen will the risk or severity of injury.
and chime increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and CAUTION
chime” F3-11. . Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
& Fastening the seatbelt and seatbacks or seat cushions. become very hot in a vehicle that
If you do so, the risk of sliding has been closed up in sunny weath-
under the lap belt and of the lap er; they could burn an occupant. Do
WARNING belt sliding up over the abdomen not touch such hot parts until they
. Never use a belt that is twisted or will increase, and both can result cool.
reversed. In an accident, this can in serious internal injury or
increase the risk or severity of death.
! Front seatbelts
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as 1. Adjust the seat position according to
possible on your hips. In a colli- the following procedure.
sion, this spreads the force of the Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
lap belt over stronger hip bones upright position. Move the seat as far from
instead of across the weaker the steering wheel as practical while still
abdomen. maintaining full vehicle control.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
straint when the occupant sits back to the upright position. Move the seat
well back and upright in the seat. as far back as possible.
To reduce the risk of sliding 2. Sit well back in the seat.
under the seatbelt in a collision, 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
the front seatbacks should be belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
always used in the upright posi- the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
tion while the vehicle is running. WARNING return the belt slightly and pull it out more
If the front seatbacks are not slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
used in the upright position in a Never place the shoulder belt under let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
– CONTINUED –

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again. on your hips, not on your waist. WARNING
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder When wearing the seatbelts, make
belt anchor height sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push the button on the buckle.
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor Before closing the door, make sure that
down. the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
the shoulder belt. it is locked in place.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center ! Unfastening the seatbelt

seatbelt)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. Push the button on the buckle.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist. Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.
– CONTINUED –

! Rear center seatbelt

WARNING WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- . Be sure to fasten both tongue
bing twisted can increase the risk or plates to the respective buckles.
severity of injury in an accident. If the seatbelt is used only as a
When fastening the belt after it is shoulder belt (with the connec-
pulled out from the retractor, espe- tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
cially when inserting the connec- the connector’s buckle on the
tor’s tongue plate into the mating right-hand side), it cannot prop-
buckle (on right-hand side), always erly restrain the wearer in posi-
check that the webbing is not tion in an accident, possibly
twisted. resulting in serious injury or
death.
. The head restraint is not intended
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate to be used at the lowest position.
2) Connector (tongue) Before sitting on the seat, raise
3) Connector (buckle)
the head restraint to the ex-
4) Center seatbelt buckle
tended position. Otherwise, in
an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
. Before fastening the seatbelt,
confirm that the seatbelt is rou-
ted through the belt guide. A
seatbelt not routed through the
belt guide can cause neck inju-
ries during sudden braking or in
a collision since it may slip up on
your neck.

2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt

guide.
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the 4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
recess of the ceiling above the cargo area. into the center seatbelt buckle marked
1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate 3. After confirming that the webbing is not “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
from the slot in the recess by pulling the twisted, insert the connector (tongue) clicks.
connector (tongue) plate, then pull out the attached at the webbing end into the
seatbelt slowly. buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.
– CONTINUED –

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible You should hold the webbing end and
on your hips, not on your waist. guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
! Unfastening the seatbelt the recess and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot.
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard

pointed object into the slot in the con-
nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and
push it in. The connector (tongue) plate
1. Push the release button of the center will then disconnect from the buckle.
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt. CAUTION
NOTE . Do not allow the retractor to roll
When the seatback is folded down for up the seatbelt too quickly.
greater cargo area, it is necessary to Otherwise, the metal tongue
disconnect the connector. plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners 1-21
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up Front seatbelt pretensioners . Side impact sensor
so that the tongue plates are . Rollover sensor
neatly stored. A hanging tongue The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
plate can swing and hit against If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The mined amount of force during frontal or
the trim during driving, causing seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
damage to the trim. side collisions or rollover accidents, the
activated in the event of an accident front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by
involving moderate to severe frontal and the retractor to take up the slack so that
& Seatbelt maintenance side collisions and rollover accidents. the belt more effectively restrains the
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap driver.
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye & Seatbelt with shoulder belt
pretensioner When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
the belts because this could seriously
an operating noise will be heard and a
affect their strength. NOTE small amount of smoke will be released.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments This section is applicable to the dri- These occurrences are normal and not
including the webbing and all hardware ver’s side seatbelt. harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, fire in the vehicle.
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
damage is found.
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
CAUTION be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly NOTE
battery acid. . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
. In cases of rollover accidents, as the
tions or changes that will prevent
curtain airbags deploy, the driver’s side
the seatbelt from operating prop-
seatbelt pretensioner and front passen-
erly. The pretensioner sensor also serves as ger’s side shoulder belt pretensioner
follows. are activated simultaneously.
. SRS frontal airbag sensor . In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate si-
– CONTINUED –

1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
multaneously. – Seatbelt pretensioner for front WARNING

– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver passenger (shoulder belt preten-
– Seatbelt pretensioner for front sioner only) (when both the satellite . To obtain maximum protection,
passenger (shoulder belt preten- safing sensor and the front passen- the occupants should sit in an
sioner only) ger’s side front door impact sensor upright position with their seat-
– SRS frontal airbag for driver sense an impact force) belts properly fastened. Refer to
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas- . Pretensioners are designed to func- “Seatbelts” F1-13.
senger* tion on a one-time-only basis. In the . Do not modify, remove or strike
– SRS side airbags (both sides) (if event that a pretensioner is activated, the front seatbelt retractor as-
an offset frontal collision occurs) both the driver’s and front passenger’s semblies or surrounding area.
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
– SRS curtain airbags (both sides) This could result in accidental
be replaced only by an authorized activation of the seatbelt preten-
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- sioners or could make the sys-
*: This does not operate if the occupant
belt retractor assemblies, use only tem inoperative, possibly result-
detection system deactivates airbag op- genuine SUBARU parts.
eration. For details, refer to “Front ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
. If either front seatbelt does not pretensioners have no user-ser-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-46.
retract or cannot be pulled out due to viceable parts. For required ser-
. In cases of side collisions, the a malfunction or activation of the
following components will operate si- vicing of front seatbelt retractors
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU equipped with seatbelt preten-
multaneously. dealer as soon as possible. sioners, consult your SUBARU
– SRS curtain airbag (impacted . If the front seatbelt retractor assem- dealer.
side) bly or surrounding area has been
– SRS side airbag (impacted side) . When discarding front seatbelt
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer retractor assemblies or scrap-
(when both the satellite safing sen- as soon as possible.
sor and any of the center pillar ping the entire vehicle due to
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge collision damage or for other
impact sensors/front door impact
you to explain to the buyer that it has reasons, consult your SUBARU
sensors sense an impact force)
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the dealer.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver buyer to the contents of this section.
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and the driver’s side front door
impact sensor sense an impact
force)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners 1-23
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt pant more effectively. – SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
and lap belt pretensioners senger*
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
– SRS side airbags (both sides) (if
NOTE an operating noise will be heard and a
an offset frontal collision occurs)
This section is applicable to the front small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not – SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
passenger’s side seatbelt. (if an offset frontal collision occurs)
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle. *: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag op-
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been eration. For details, refer to “Front
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-46.
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt . In cases of side collisions, the
cannot be pulled out and retracted and following components will operate si-
therefore must be replaced. multaneously.
NOTE – SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts. – SRS side airbag (impacted side)
. In cases of rollover accidents, the (when both the satellite safing sen-
lap belt pretensioner does not activate; sor and any of the center pillar
however, as the curtain airbags deploy, impact sensors/front door impact
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner) the driver’s side seatbelt pretensioner sensors sense an impact force)
2) Lap belt pretensioner and front passenger’s side shoulder – Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
belt pretensioner are activated simulta- (when both the satellite safing sen-
On the front passenger’s side, the sor and the driver’s side front door
shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen- neously.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the impact sensor sense an impact
ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is force)
located at the base of the center pillar. following components will operate si-
multaneously. – Seatbelt pretensioner for front
Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap passenger (shoulder belt preten-
belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in – Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
– Seatbelt pretensioners for front sioner only) (when both the satellite
the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level safing sensor and the front passen-
of frontal or side collision force or a passenger (shoulder belt preten-
sioner only) ger’s side front door impact sensor
rollover accident is detected. As a result, sense an impact force)
the seatbelt restrains the front seat occu- – SRS frontal airbag for driver
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
– CONTINUED –

1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the This could result in accidental & System servicing
event that a pretensioner is activated, activation of the seatbelt preten-
both the driver’s and front passenger’s sioners or could make the sys- WARNING
seatbelt retractor assemblies should tem inoperative, possibly result-
be replaced only by an authorized ing in serious injury. Seatbelt . When discarding a seatbelt re-
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- pretensioners have no user-ser- tractor assembly or scrapping
belt retractor assemblies, use only viceable parts. For required ser- the entire vehicle damaged by a
genuine SUBARU parts. vicing of front seatbelt retractors collision, consult your SUBARU
. If either front seatbelt does not equipped with seatbelt preten- dealer.
retract or cannot be pulled out due to sioners, consult your SUBARU . Tampering with or disconnecting
a malfunction or activation of the dealer. the system’s wiring could result
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU . When discarding front seatbelt in accidental activation of the
dealer as soon as possible. retractor assemblies or scrap- seatbelt pretensioner and/or
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to SRS airbag or could make the
bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other system inoperative, which may
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer reasons, consult your SUBARU result in serious injury. Do not
as soon as possible. dealer. use electrical test equipment on
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge any circuit related to the seatbelt
you to explain to the buyer that it has pretensioner and SRS airbag
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the & System monitors systems. For required servicing
buyer to the contents of this section. A diagnostic system continually monitors of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
WARNING while the vehicle is being driven. The er.
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
. To obtain maximum protection, module with the SRS airbag system.
the occupants should sit in an CAUTION
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
upright position with their seat- seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
belts properly fastened. Refer to The sensors and SRS airbag control
system warning light will illuminate. For modules are located in the following
“Seatbelts” F1-13. details, refer to “SRS airbag system locations.
. Do not modify, remove or strike monitors” F1-64.
the front seatbelt retractor as- . Front impact sensors: on both
semblies or surrounding area. sides of the radiator panel

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-25
. Front door impact sensors: on & Precautions against vehicle Child restraint systems
both front doors modification
. Satellite safing sensor: under the Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
rear center seat you want to install any accessory parts to
. SRS airbag control module (in- your vehicle.
cluding the impact sensors): un-
der the center of the instrument CAUTION
panel
Do not perform any of the following
If you need service or repair in those modifications. Such modifications
areas or near the front seatbelt can interfere with proper operation
retractors, have the work performed of the seatbelt pretensioners.
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
NOTE skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
If the front or side part of the vehicle is ine SUBARU accessory parts to Infants and small children should always
damaged in an accident to the extent the front end. be placed in an infant or child restraint
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not . Modification of the suspension system in the rear seat while riding in the
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer system or front end structure. vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
as soon as possible. . Installation of a tire of different
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
size and construction from the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
tires specified on the vehicle
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
placard attached to the driver’s
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
door pillar or specified for indivi-
restraint systems are designed to be
dual vehicle models in this Own-
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
er’s Manual.
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
– CONTINUED –

1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
properly secured in the vehicle. When child from injury in a collision, or in an accident and can be injured
installing the child restraint system, care- because the child will be caught seriously.
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. between the passenger and objects Additionally, children standing up or
inside the vehicle. kneeling on or in front of the front
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your seat are exposed another serious
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
seating positions. that child to another serious danger. ploys with considerable speed and
Since the SRS airbag deploys with force, the child could be injured or
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the even killed.
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is & Where to place a child re-
moving. straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
arms while the vehicle is moving. thrown forward during sudden stop
The passenger cannot protect the

A: Front passenger’s seat In this seating position, you should use cording to accident statistics, chil-
You should not install a child restraint only a child restraint system that has a dren are safer when properly re-
system (including a booster seat) due to bottom base that fits snugly against the strained in the rear seating posi-
the hazard to children posed by the contours of the seat cushion and can be tions than in the front seating posi-
passenger’s airbag. securely retained using the seatbelt. tions.
If it is unavoidable to install a child
B: Rear seat, window-side seating restraint system in the rear seat’s center
positions seating position, remove the center head
Recommended positions for all types of restraint and install the child restraint
child restraint systems. system by correctly passing the rear
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency center seatbelt through the belt guide.
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for WARNING
installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be Put children aged 12 and under in
able to be secured firmly due to projection the rear seat properly restrained at
of the seat cushion. all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
In this seating position, you should use
and can injure or even kill children,
only a child restraint system that has a
especially if they are 12 years of age
bottom base that fits snugly against the
and under and are not restrained or WARNING
contours of the seat cushion and can be
improperly restrained. Because chil-
securely retained using the seatbelt.
dren are lighter and weaker than SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
C: Rear seat, center seating position adults, their risk of being injured EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
Installing a child restraint system is not from deployment is greater. SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- For that reason, be sure to secure R E A R WA R D F A C I N G C H I L D
belt and an upper anchorage (tether ALL types of child restraint devices SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
anchorage, if equipped) are provided in (including forward facing child SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
this position. seats) in the REAR seats at all times. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
Some types of child restraints might not be You should choose a restraint de- THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
able to be secured firmly due to projection vice which is appropriate for the CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
of the seat cushion. child’s age, height and weight. Ac- THE SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –

& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys- child suffering personal injury in the
system tems with A/ELR seatbelt event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
! Installing a rearward facing child
. Child restraint systems and seat- restraint
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
(weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
1. Place the child restraint system in the
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
rear seating position.
cle Safety Standards for the United States
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
CAUTION or around the child restraint system
dards for Canada. It can be identified by
following the instructions provided by its
looking for the label on the child restraint
When you install a child restraint manufacturer.
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
system, follow the manufacturer’s 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
compliance in the document attached to
instructions supplied with it. After until you hear a click.
the system.
installing the child restraint system,
Also it is important for you to make sure check to ensure that it is held
that the child restraint system is compa- securely in position. If it is not held
tible with the vehicle in which it will be tight and secure, the danger of your
used.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system,
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the system forward and from side to side to press the release button on the seatbelt
retractor to change the retractor over from check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a buckle and allow the belt to retract
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) child restraint can be more firmly secured completely. The belt will return to the
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) by pushing it down into the seat cushion ELR mode.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind and then tightening the seatbelt.
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt WARNING
clicks will be heard which indicate the to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
retractor functions as ALR. properly functioning). NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –

NOTE CAUTION
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the Store the head restraint that has
ELR function of the retractor. That been removed in the cargo area.
function is restored by allowing the Avoid placing the head restraint in
seatbelt to retract fully. the passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in
! Installing forward facing child re- the passenger compartment in a
straint sudden stop or a sharp turn.
WARNING 3. For models with rear seat reclining

mechanism, adjust the seatback to the
Before installing a child restraint
upright position.
system, be sure to confirm that the
4. Place the child restraint system in the 5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
seatback is securely locked into
rear seating position. or around the child restraint system
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
following the instructions provided by its
serious injury or death could result.
WARNING manufacturer.
– When a child restraint system is
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm When you intend to install a child installed on the rear center seating
that it is securely locked into place. restraint system on the rear center position, pass the rear center seatbelt
– It is possible to check whether the seating position, if the child restraint through the belt guide properly. For
seatback is locked visually. If the system does not fit snugly against details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt”
seatback is locked into place, the red the contours of the rear center seat F1-18.
colored unlocking marker which is cushion, install the child restraint
attached to the bottom of the lock 6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
system on the window-side seating until you hear a click.
release knob is invisible. For details, position to be safe. For details, refer
refer to “Folding down the rear seat- to “Where to place a child restraint
back” F1-10. system” F1-26.
2. Remove the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed. For details, refer
to “Head restraint adjustment” F1-9.

7. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 9. Before having a child sit in the child 12. To remove the child restraint system,
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and press the release button on the seatbelt
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly buckle and allow the belt to retract
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint can completely. The belt will return to the
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) be more firmly secured by pushing it down ELR mode.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the seat cushion and then tightening
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, the seatbelt. NOTE
clicks will be heard which indicate the 10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt When the child restraint system is no
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR longer in use, remove it and restore the
properly functioning). ELR function of the retractor. That
11. Latch the top tether hook onto the function is restored by allowing the
tether anchorage that is located behind seatbelt to retract fully.
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-36.
– CONTINUED –

& Installing a booster seat creased. possible on the child’s hips.
WARNING 1. For models with rear seat reclining

. Child restraint systems and seat- upright position.
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in- 5. To remove the booster seat, press the
side of the vehicle in a sudden release button on the seatbelt buckle and
stop, turn or accident; they can allow the belt to retract.
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious 2. Place the booster seat in the rear
injuries or death to the child. WARNING
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster . Never use a belt that is twisted or
seat. reversed. In an accident, this can
CAUTION increase the risk or severity of
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
When you install a child restraint or around the booster seat and the child injury to the child.
system, follow the manufacturer’s following the instructions provided by its . Never place the shoulder belt
instructions supplied with it. After manufacturer. under the child’s arm or behind
installing the child restraint system, 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle the child’s back. If an accident
check to ensure that it is held until you hear a click. Take care not to occurs, this can increase the risk
securely in position. If it is not held twist the seatbelt. or severity of injury to the child.
tight and secure, the danger of your Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
child suffering personal injury in the across the center of child’s shoulder and order to provide full restraint.
event of an accident may be in- that the lap belt is positioned as low as

Loose fitting belts are not as . Do not leave an unsecured child

effective in preventing or redu- restraint system in your vehicle.
cing injury. Unsecured child restraint sys-
. Place the lap belt as low as tems can be thrown around in-
possible on the child’s hips. A side of the vehicle in a sudden
high-positioned lap belt will in- stop, turn or accident; they can
crease the risk of sliding under strike and injure vehicle occu-
the lap belt and of the lap belt pants as well as result in serious
sliding up over the abdomen, and injuries or death to the child.
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
CAUTION
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of When you install a child restraint Some types of child restraint systems can
child’s shoulder. Placing the system, follow the manufacturer’s be installed on the rear seat of your
shoulder belt over the neck may instructions supplied with it. After vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
result in neck injury during sud- installing the child restraint system, child restraint systems are secured to the
den braking or in a collision. check to ensure that it is held designated anchorages provided on the
securely in position. If it is not held vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
& Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your chorages are sometimes referred to as the
child suffering personal injury in the
systems by use of lower and event of an accident may be in-
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
tether anchorages (LATCH) Tethers for CHildren).
creased.
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
in it.
– CONTINUED –

the rear seat window-side seating posi- place. Otherwise, in an accident,

tions. For each window-side seating posi- serious injury or death could result.
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind 1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
the cover of the seatback bottom. that it is securely locked into place.
– It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
colored unlocking marker which is
attached to the bottom of the lock
release knob is invisible. For details,
refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
back” F1-10.
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For de-
tails, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-
36.
To install a child restraint system using
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
following procedure.
2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of
WARNING the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
Before installing a child restraint indicate the positions of the lower an-
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for system, be sure to confirm that the chorages (bars).
installing a child restraint system only on seatback is securely locked into

Remove the covers and locate the lower 5. While following the instructions sup- 6. [If your child restraint system is of a
anchorages (bars). plied by the child restraint system manu- flexible attachment type (which uses
3. Remove the rear seat head restraint. facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the tether belts to connect the child restraint
For details, refer to “Head restraint adjust- lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on system properly to the lower anchorages)]
ment” F1-9. the bottom of the rear seatback. When the While pushing the child restraint into the
hooks are connected, make sure the seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
CAUTION adjacent seatbelts are not caught. tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
Store the head restraint that has
belt.
been removed in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in 7. Latch the top tether hook onto the
the passenger compartment to pre- tether anchorage that is located behind
vent it from being thrown around in the rear seat and tighten the top tether
the passenger compartment in a firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
sudden stop or a sharp turn. “Top tether anchorages” F1-36.
4. For models with rear seat reclining

upright position.
– CONTINUED –

& Top tether anchorages ! Anchorage location

Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
8. Before seating a child in the child vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
restraint system, try to move it back and tether whenever one is required or avail-
forth and right and left to verify that it is able.
held securely in position.
9. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
1) For left seat

2) For center seat
3) For right seat

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-37
Three upper anchorages are installed on *SRS airbag (Supplemental

the back side of the rear seatback.
Restraint System airbag)
! To hook the top tether
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
CAUTION straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
. Remove the head restraint when
vehicle’s seatbelts.
mounting a child restraint sys-
tem. Otherwise, it might be pos- Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
sible that the top tether cannot be mental restraint system in addition to a
fastened tightly. lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
. Store the head restraint that has position and each rear window-side seat-
been removed in the cargo area. ing positions. The supplemental restraint
Avoid placing the head restraint 3. Attach the top tether hook to the system (SRS) consists of seven airbags.
in the passenger compartment to appropriate upper anchorage. The configurations are as follows.
prevent it from being thrown 4. Tighten the top tether securely. . Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
around in the passenger com- airbags
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
partment in a sudden stop or a
you have any question regarding the . Driver’s and front passenger’s side
sharp turn. airbags
installation of a child restraint system.
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
1. Remove the head restraint of the rear senger, and window-side rear passen-
seating position where the child restraint gers)
system is to be installed. For details, refer . Knee airbag for driver
to “Head restraint adjustment” F1-9.
2. For models with rear seat reclining These SRS airbags are designed only
mechanism, adjust the seatback to the as a supplement to the primary protec-
upright position. tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-21.
– CONTINUED –

1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& General precautions regard- to help avoid injuries that can and the front passenger should
ing SRS airbag system result when an occupant is not move the seat as far back as
seated in a proper upright posi- possible and sit upright and well
WARNING tion. back in the seat.
. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. It does not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
bination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protec-
tion in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or WARNING WARNING
death in a crash even when the . The SRS airbags deploy with . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
vehicle has the SRS airbag. considerable speed and force. close to either front door. The
For instructions and precautions Occupants who are out of proper SRS side airbags are stored in
concerning the seatbelt system, position when the SRS airbag both front seat seatbacks next to
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-13. deploys could suffer very serious the door, and they provide pro-
. The SRS side airbag and SRS injuries. Because the SRS airbag tection by deploying rapidly (fas-
curtain airbag are designed only needs enough space for deploy- ter than the blink of an eye) in the
to be a supplement to the primary ment, the driver should always event of a side impact or frontal
protection provided by the seat- sit upright and well back in the collision. However, the force of
belt. They do not eliminate the seat as far from the steering SRS side airbag deployment may
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also wheel as practical while still cause injuries if your head or
important to wear your seatbelt maintaining full vehicle control other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag. in proper position such as one near the SRS airbag cover or
. Since your vehicle is equipped thrown forward during pre-acci- between you and the SRS airbag.
with SRS curtain airbags, do not dent braking. If the SRS airbag deploys, these
sit or lean unnecessarily close to Even when properly positioned, objects could interfere with its
the front or rear door on either there remains a possibility that proper operation and could be
side. Also, do not put your head, an occupant may suffer minor propelled inside the vehicle,
arms or hands out of the window. injury such as abrasions and causing injury.
The SRS curtain airbags on both bruises to the face or arms
sides of the cabin are stored in because of the SRS airbag de-
the roof side (between the front ployment force.
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
(faster than the blink of an eye) in
the event of a side impact, roll-
over or frontal collision. How-
ever, the force of its deployment
may cause injuries if your head is
too close to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with WARNING
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to . Do not put any objects over the
protect in high speed collisions, steering wheel pad and dash-
the force of an airbag can injure WARNING board. If the SRS frontal airbag
an occupant whose body is too . Do not rest your arm on either deploys, these objects could in-
close to SRS airbag. front door or its internal trim. You terfere with its proper operation
It is also important to wear your could be injured in the event of and could be propelled inside the
seatbelt to help avoid injuries SRS side airbag deployment. vehicle, causing injury.
that can result when the SRS . Do not place any objects over or . Do not put any objects under the
airbag contacts an occupant not
– CONTINUED –

driver’s side of the instrument windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
panel. If the knee airbag deploys, ror over the rear view mirror. If the pillar, the windshield, a side win-
those objects could interfere with SRS airbag deploys, those objects dow, an assist grip, or any other
its proper operation and could be could become projectiles that could cabin surface that would be near
propelled inside the vehicle, seriously injure vehicle occupants. a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
causing injury. A hands-free microphone or
. The key must not be attached to other accessory in such a loca-
heavy, sharp or hard acces- tion could be propelled through
sories, or another key. If the knee the cabin with great force by the
airbag deploys, those objects curtain airbag, or it could prevent
could interfere with its proper correct deployment of the curtain
operation and could be propelled airbag. In either case, the result
inside the vehicle and cause could be serious injuries.
injury.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s WARNING
occupants and cause injuries.
WARNING Do not hang coat hangers or other
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
Do not attach accessories to the phone or any other accessory to hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy- labels or stickers to the front seat Consequently, we strongly recom-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, surface on or near the SRS side mend that ALL children (including
they could cause serious injuries by airbag. They could prevent proper those in child seats and those that
coming off the coat hooks and being deployment of the SRS side airbag, have outgrown child restraint de-
thrown through the cabin or by reducing protection available to the vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
preventing deployment of the cur- front seat’s occupant. restrained at all times in a child
tain airbags. restraint device or in a seatbelt,
Before hanging clothing on the coat whichever is appropriate for the
hooks, make sure there are no sharp child’s age, height and weight.
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth- Secure ALL types of child restraint
ing directly on the coat hooks with- devices (including forward facing
out using hangers. child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
WARNING tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-25.
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
WARNING are not restrained or improperly
Do not put any kind of cover or restrained. Because children are
clothes or other objects over either lighter and weaker than adults, their
front seatback and do not attach risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
– CONTINUED –

WARNING WARNING WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- Never allow a child to stand up or Never hold a child on your lap or in
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT kneel on the front passenger’s seat. your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS The SRS airbag deploys with con- with considerable force and can
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD siderable force and can injure or injure or even kill the child.
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD even kill the child.
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

seat facing the side window blems after SRS airbag deploys,
– Wrap his/her arms around the get fresh air promptly.
front seat seatback . A deploying SRS airbag releases
– Put his/her head, arms or hot gas. Occupants could get
other parts of the body out of burned if they come into direct
the window contact with the hot gas.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or NOTE
SRS curtain airbag deployment . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
could injure the child seriously you to explain to the buyer that it is
because his/her head, arms or equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
other parts of the body are too the buyer to the applicable section in
close to the SRS side airbag and/ this Owner’s Manual.
or SRS curtain airbag. . When the vehicle sustains an impact
. Since your vehicle is also in an accident, etc., fuel supply will be
equipped with a front passen- stopped by the fuel pump shut off
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children system to reduce the risk of fire caused
aged 12 and under should be by leaking fuel. For details about
placed in the rear seat anyway restarting of the engine, refer to “If
and should be properly re- your vehicle is involved in an accident”
strained at all times. F9-21.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
WARNING some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
. Never allow a child to do the ing problems for people with a
following. history of asthma or other
– Kneel on any passenger’s breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
– CONTINUED –

& Components The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point
behind the rear quarter glass)
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
1) SRS frontal airbag

2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
4) SRS knee airbag

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensor and rollover sensor) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side) side)
4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side) hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
– CONTINUED –

& SUBARU advanced frontal system. the severity of impact.

airbag system For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer The occupant detection system sensor is
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU to “Components” F1-44. installed under the seat upholstery and
advanced frontal airbag system that com- monitors the physique and posture of the
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, front passenger. Using this information,
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag the following components deploy.
requirements in the amended Federal the occupant detection system determines
. SRS frontal airbag for driver whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger airbag should be deployed or not.
No. 208.
. SRS knee airbag for driver The occupant detection system may not
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de- . SRS side airbag*1 inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal . SRS curtain airbag*1 airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe case, although the front passenger’s SRS
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if enough to deploy the front airbag occurs. frontal airbag does not operate, the front
activated, the deployment force of the passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
These components supplement the seat- ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy- belts by reducing the impact to the
ment. sioner. For details about the seatbelt
occupant’s head, chest and knees. pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
Your vehicle has warning labels on the tensioners” F1-21.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
CAUTION
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
attached to the glove box lid beginning different ways depending on the severity Observe the following precautions.
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air of impact. Failure to do so may prevent the
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read Have the system inspected by your SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
the instructions on the warning labels and SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS system from functioning correctly
tag. airbag system warning light illuminates. or cause the system to fail.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU . Do not apply any strong impact
advanced frontal airbag system is a ! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag to the front passenger’s seat
supplemental restraint system and must such as by kicking.
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator . Do not let rear passengers rest
seated in an appropriate child restraint operates in different ways depending on their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion. seatback not being locked into the occupant detection system determines
. Do not spill liquid on the front place securely. If any of them are whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
passenger’s seat. If liquid is not locked securely, adjust them airbag should be deployed or not.
spilled, wipe it off immediately. again. For adjusting procedure,
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
refer to “Manual seat” F1-4
. Do not remove or disassemble (models equipped with manual
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
the front passenger’s seat. the system to determine deployment. If
seats only).
. Do not install any accessory the seat cushion is wet, the front passen-
(such as an audio amplifier) other ger should stop sitting on the front
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
than a genuine SUBARU acces- passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from
passenger’s occupant detection system
sory under the front passenger’s the seat immediately, let the seat dry
have failed, the SRS airbag system
seat. naturally and then check that the front
warning light will illuminate. Have the
passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
. Do not place anything (shoes, system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
indicators work properly.
umbrella, etc.) under the front er immediately if the SRS airbag system
passenger’s seat. warning light illuminates.
. Do not use the front passenger’s If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
seat with the head restraint re- may affect the proper function of the
moved. SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
. Do not leave any articles on the SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
front passenger’s seat or the passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
seatbelt tongue and buckle en- to your SUBARU dealer.
gaged when you leave your ve-
hicle. ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphols- Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
tery. ON and OFF indicators” F3-13.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Do not place a magnet near the ! Occupant detection system indicator
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt The occupant detection system sensor is / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
retractor. installed under the seat upholstery and indicator
. Do not use front seats with their monitors the physique and posture of the
backward-forward position and front passenger. Using this information, If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
– CONTINUED –

and OFF indicators do not work properly tem warning light illuminates or a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
even when the front passenger’s seat is operates erratically when using an recommended that any forward fa-
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front electronic device in the vehicle, at cing child seat or booster seat be
passenger’s seat and have the occupant first try to relocate that device to installed in the REAR seat, and that
detection system checked by your avoid it creating any interference. If even children who have outgrown a
SUBARU dealer. the device continues to cause inter- child restraint system be also
ference, the use of that device in the seated in the REAR seat. This is
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
vehicle should be discontinued. because children sitting in the front
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
passenger’s seat may be killed or
may adversely affect the ability of the
! Conditions in which front passen- severely injured should the front
system to determine deployment. This
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
activated ploy. REAR seats are the safest
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
place for children.
ing properly. Check that the indicators The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
work properly. will not be activated when any of the
When the OFF indicator turns off and the following conditions are met regarding the CAUTION
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen- front passenger’s seat:
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a . The seat is empty. When the front passenger’s seat is
collision. Remove luggage and electronic . The seat is equipped with an appro- occupied by an infant in an appro-
devices from the front passenger’s seat. priate child restraint system and an infant priate child restraint system, ob-
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that serve the following precautions.
CAUTION follows.) Failure to do so may interfere with
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- the proper operation of the occu-
Electrical devices, such as cell pant detection system, activating
phones, laptops, portable music tion system is malfunctioning.
the front passenger’s SRS frontal
players, or electronic games, espe- airbag even though that seat is
cially when connected to the acces- WARNING
occupied by the infant in the child
sory power outlet and placed on the NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- restraint system.
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT . Do not place any article (includ-
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE ing electronic devices) on the
senger’s seat, may affect the opera- FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
tion of the occupant detection sys- seat other than the infant in the
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be child restraint system.
tem. If the occupant detection sys- sure to install it in the REAR seat in

. Do not place more than one . Ensure that the backward-forward po- nated while the OFF indicator turns off
infant in the child restraint sys- sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted
tem. seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/
moving the seat back and forth. small adult in the rear seat and im-
! If the front passenger’s frontal mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated for an inspection. Even if the system
airbag ON indicator illuminates while the OFF indicator turns off after
and the OFF indicator turns off has passed the dealer inspection, it is
taking relevant corrective actions de- recommended that on subsequent trips
even when an infant or a small scribed above, relocate the child restraint
child is in a child restraint sys- the child/small adult always take the
system to the rear seat and immediately rear seat.
tem (including booster seat) contact your SUBARU dealer for an
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ inspection. Children who have outgrown a child
“OFF” position. restraint system should always wear the
2. Remove the child restraint system
NOTE seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
When a child who has outgrown a child is deactivated or activated.
from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint restraint system or a small adult is ! Conditions in which front passen-
manufacturer’s recommendations as well seated in the front passenger’s seat, ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
as the child restraint system installation the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
procedures in “Child restraint systems” system may or may not activate the will be activated for deployment upon
F1-25, correctly install the child restraint front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag impact when any of the following condi-
system. depending on the occupant’s seating tions are met regarding the front passen-
posture. Children should always wear a ger’s seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
position and make sure that the front . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
spective of whether the airbag is
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator deactivated or activated. If the front . When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is acti- are placed on the seat.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated vated (the ON indicator remains illumi-
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the nated while the OFF indicator turns off),
following actions. take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the . Ensure that no article is placed on
seat other than the child restraint system the seat other than the occupant.
and the child occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
– CONTINUED –

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag position and wait 6 seconds to allow the <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
OFF indicator illuminates and system to complete self-checking. Follow- of Columbia>
the ON indicator turns off even ing the system check, both indicators turn Subaru of America, Inc.
when the front passenger’s seat off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator Customer Dealer Services Department
is occupied by an adult should illuminate while the OFF indicator P.O. Box 6000
This can be caused by the adult incor- remains off.
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. If the OFF indicator still remains illumi- 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ nated while the ON indicator remains off,
“OFF” position. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat <Hawaii>
2. Ask the front passenger to set the and immediately contact your SUBARU Subaru Hawaii
seatback to the upright position, sit up dealer for an inspection. 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
straight in the center of the seat cushion, ! How to contact the vehicle manu- Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ facturer concerning modifications 808-839-2273
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to for persons with disabilities that
the rearmost position. <Guam>
may affect the advanced airbag
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
system (U.S. only)
position. bile
Changing or moving any parts of the front 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, Dededo, Guam 96921-6255
while the ON indicator remains off, take front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
671-633-2698
the following actions. panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ steering column, tire, suspension or floor <Puerto Rico>
“OFF” position. panel can affect the operation of the Trebol Motors
2. Make sure that the front passenger SUBARU advanced airbag system. If P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat you have any questions, you may contact 00910
cover, seat heater or massager, etc. the following SUBARU distributors.
787-793-2828
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

! Operation The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the characteristic of item
(s) or person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure
of the system.
If the front impact sensors and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module
detect a predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, the control
module sends signals to the airbag
module(s) (only driver’s module or both
driver’s and front passenger’s modules)
instructing the module(s) to inflate the
SRS frontal airbag(s). On driver’s side, the
SRS knee airbag also inflates with the
SRS frontal airbag.
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. itself.
The two inflators of each airbag are Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- ! Example of accident in which the
components around the steering driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
neously, depending on the severity of wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
hands right after deployment. Doing will most likely deploy
frontal airbag and depending on the so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed to deploy in the event of an
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s accident involving a moderate to severe
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is frontal collision. They are not designed to
not impaired. The time required from deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
detecting impact to the deflation of the because the necessary protection can be
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
than the blink of an eye. are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal because deployment of only the driver’s A head-on collision against a thick con-
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
pretensioners operate at the same time. situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis. vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and frontal impact similar in fashion and
some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the magnitude to the collision described
occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen- above.
deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That
a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
– CONTINUED –

! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
dents in which it is possible that both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
the driver’s/driver’s and front frontal airbags may be activated when the
passenger’s SRS frontal vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
airbag(s) will deploy undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
– CONTINUED –

! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are designed not to deploy be activated on the second impact.
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
& SRS side airbag and SRS
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS curtain airbag
frontal airbag(s) are not de- side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
signed to deploy in most cases speed frontal collision. Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
1) First impact
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
2) Second impact for front seat occupants.
In an accident where the vehicle is The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
impacted more than once, the driver’s the cabin is stored in the roof side
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal (between the front pillar and a point
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first behind the rear quarter glass). An “SRS
impact. AIRBAG” mark is located at the top of
each center pillar.
Example: In the case of a double collision, In a moderate to severe side impact
first with another vehicle, then against a collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
concrete wall in immediate succession, impacted side of the vehicle deploys
once either or both of the driver’s and front between the occupant and the side
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are window and supplements the seatbelt by
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head. side airbags and SRS curtain airbags wheel house impact sensors together
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both deploy independently of each other since sense an impact force above a predeter-
sides of the vehicle deploy between the each has its own impact sensor. mined level in a side collision, the control
occupant and the side window and sup- module causes only the SRS curtain
An impact sensor, which senses impact airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
plement the seatbelt by reducing the force, is located in each of the following
impact to the occupant’s head. locations. Even if a frontal collision occurs, both right
In a frontal collision, SRS side airbags and . In the left and right front doors and left SRS side airbags and SRS curtain
SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the . In the left and right center pillars airbags will deploy when the front sensor
vehicle deploy between the occupant and . In the left and right rear wheel houses and the control unit determine that the
the side window and supplement the impact results from an offset frontal colli-
. Under the rear center seat sion.
seatbelt by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head and chest. . On both sides of the radiator panel
(frontal impact sensor) The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain
! Operation airbags are designed to deploy when the
Rollover sensor and frontal impact sensor driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys or the
are located inside the airbag control driver’s and passenger’s SRS frontal air-
module which is located under the center bags deploy in a frontal collision, and also
of the instrument panel. when the system determines that the
If the impact sensor that is located under collision is an offset frontal collision. The
the rear center seat and one of the center SRS side airbags and SRS curtain air-
pillar impact sensors or front door impact bags are basically designed not to deploy
sensors both sense an impact force above in a frontal collision when the SRS frontal
a predetermined level in a side collision, airbags do not deploy or the system
the control module causes both the SRS determines that the collision is other than
side airbag and curtain airbag on the an offset frontal collision.
impacted side to inflate regardless of If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the
whether the rear wheel house impact vehicle, the control module inflates the
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain sensor on the same side senses an SRS curtain airbags on both sides. At this
airbag can function only when the ignition impact. time, the driver’s and front passenger’s
switch is in the “ON” position. seatbelt pretensioners also operate at the
If the impact sensor that is located under
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS the rear center seat and one of the rear same time.
– CONTINUED –

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag the visible damage done to the vehicle
immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the itself.
required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear
deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns
deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be
an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
for a while following deployment then
airbag are designed to deploy in the event
slowly deflates.
of an accident involving a moderate to
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain severe side impact collision. They are not
airbag deploy even when no one occupies designed to deploy in most lesser side
the seat on the side on which an impact is impact. Also, they are not designed to
applied. deploy in most rear impacts because SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
When the SRS side airbag and SRS deployment would not help the occupant
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud in those situations.
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occur- The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
rences are a normal result of the deploy- signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire extremely inclined state such as during a
in the vehicle. rollover. They are not designed to deploy
in most lesser inclined state.
CAUTION
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
Do not touch the SRS side airbag airbag are designed to function on a one-
system components around the time-only basis.
front seat seatback with bare hands SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
right after deployment. Doing so can deployment depend on the level of force
cause burns because the compo- experienced in the passenger compart-
nents can be very hot as a result of ment during a side impact collision. That
deployment. level differs from one type of collision to
After deployment, do not touch any another, and it may have no bearing on

! Example of the type of accident

in which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy.
1) A severe side impact near the front seat

or the rear seat.
2) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most 1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear
likely deploy. seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy. 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
– CONTINUED –

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
unlikely to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

! Examples of the types of acci- 2) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
dents in which the SRS side In the event of accidents like those on the second.
airbag and SRS curtain airbag illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
are not designed to deploy in curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
most cases in most cases.
SRS airbag system warning light (type A)

1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
1) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on SRS airbag system warning light (type B)

A diagnostic system continually monitors – Rear wheel house right-hand side checked and properly repaired, the
the readiness of the SRS airbag system – Rear wheel house left-hand side seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
(including front seatbelt pretensioners) . Curtain airbag module airbag will not operate properly in
while the vehicle is being driven. The – Right-hand side the event of a collision, which may
SRS airbag system warning light will show – Left-hand side increase the risk of injury.
normal system operation by illuminating . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
for approximately 6 seconds when the center seat) ing light
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
. Seatbelt pretensioner . No illumination of the warning
position.
– Driver’s side light when the ignition switch is
The following components are monitored – Front passenger’s side first turned to the “ON” position
by the indicator: . Lap belt pretensioner . Continuous illumination of the
. Front impact sensor – Front passenger’s side warning light
– Right-hand side . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Illumination of the warning light
– Left-hand side ger’s side) while driving
. Airbag control module (including im- . Front passenger’s occupant detection
pact sensor and rollover sensor) system sensor
. Frontal airbag module . Front passenger’s occupant detection & SRS airbag system servicing
– Driver’s side control module
– Front passenger’s side . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator
. Side airbag sensor . All related wiring . When discarding an airbag mod-
– Center pillar right-hand side ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
– Center pillar left-hand side WARNING cle damaged by a collision, con-
. Front door impact sensor sult your SUBARU dealer.
If the warning light exhibits any of . The SRS airbag has no user-
– Right-hand side the following conditions, there may
– Left-hand side serviceable parts. Do not use
be a malfunction in the seatbelt electrical test equipment on any
. Side airbag module pretensioners and/or SRS airbag circuit related to the SRS airbag
– Driver’s side system. Immediately take your vehi- system. For required servicing of
– Front passenger’s side cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer the SRS airbag, consult your
. Curtain airbag sensor to have the system checked. Unless nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
– CONTINUED –

ing with or disconnecting the . In each roof side (from the front area near these parts, was involved in
system’s wiring could result in pillar to a point behind the rear an accident in which the SRS side
accidental inflation of the SRS quarter glass) airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
airbag or could make the system . Between the rear seat cushion deploy.
inoperative, which may result in and rear wheel house on each . The fabric or leather of either front
serious injury. side seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. Under the rear center seat . The rear part of the vehicle was
CAUTION involved in an accident in which no
In the event that the SRS airbag is SRS airbag was deployed.
If you need service or repair in areas deployed, replacement of the system
indicated in the following list, have should be performed only by an author-
the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- & Precautions against vehicle
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- nents of the SRS airbag system are modification
bag control module, impact sensors replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
and airbag modules are stored in parts. WARNING
these areas.
NOTE To avoid accidental activation of the
. Under the center console system or rendering the system
In the following cases, contact your
. On both the right and left sides at SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. inoperative, which may result in
the front of the vehicle . The front part of the vehicle was serious injury, no modifications
. Steering wheel and column and involved in an accident in which only should be made to any components
nearby areas the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
. Bottom of the steering column driver’s and front passenger’s SRS This includes following modifica-
and nearby areas frontal airbags did not deploy. tions.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the . Installation of custom steering
. Top of the dashboard on front
cover over the front passenger’s SRS wheels
passenger’s side and nearby
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
areas
the front pillar to a point behind the rear . Attachment of additional trim
. Each front seat and nearby area quarter glass) is scratched, cracked, or materials to the dashboard
. Inside each center pillar otherwise damaged. . Installation of custom seats
. Inside each front door . The center pillar, front door, rear . Replacement of seat fabric or
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an leather

. Installation of additional fabric or system or front end structure.

leather on the front seat . Installation of a tire of different
. Attachment of a hands-free mi- size and construction from the
crophone or any other accessory tires specified on the vehicle
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a placard attached to the driver’s
rear pillar, the windshield, a side door pillar or specified for indivi-
window, an assist grip, or any dual vehicle models in this Own-
other cabin surface that would be er’s Manual.
near a deploying SRS curtain . Attachment of any equipment
airbag. (side steps or side sill protectors,
. Installation of additional electri- etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
cal/electronic equipment such as accessory parts to the side body.
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag system Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
components and/or wiring is not you want to install any accessory parts on
advisable. This could interfere your vehicle.
with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Selecting audible signal operation (models

Key number plate ................................................ 2-2 without “keyless access with push-button start
system”).......................................................... 2-19 2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-2
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-20
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-3
Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-20
Key replacement ................................................. 2-3
Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-3 Alarm system ..................................................... 2-20
System operation............................................... 2-20
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-21
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5 system ............................................................ 2-21
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6 Arming the system ............................................ 2-21
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-7 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-24
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-25
Keyless access with push-button start Passive arming (models without “keyless access
system (if equipped) ........................................ 2-8 with push-button start system”) ....................... 2-25
Safety precautions .............................................. 2-8 Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-26
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access” Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-26
entry function................................................... 2-11 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-27
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-15 Windows............................................................. 2-27
Warning chimes and warning light ...................... 2-15 Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-28
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-15 Power window operation by passengers............. 2-30
When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-16 Initialization of power window ............................ 2-31
Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-16
Rear gate ............................................................ 2-31
Replacing access key......................................... 2-16
Manual rear gate (if equipped) ............................ 2-31
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system ..................................................... 2-16 Power rear gate (if equipped) ............................. 2-32
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-17 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-39
Locking the doors .............................................. 2-19 Moonroof switch ................................................ 2-39
Unlocking the doors ........................................... 2-19 Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-40
Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-19 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-40
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-19

2-2 Keys and doors/Keys
Keys . Driver’s door Immobilizer

. Glove box
NOTE The valet key fits only the ignition switch The immobilizer system is designed to
For models with “keyless access with and door locks. You can keep the glove prevent an unauthorized person from
push-button start system”, refer to box locked when you leave your vehicle starting the engine. Only keys registered
“Keyless access with push-button start and valet key at a parking facility. with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
system” F2-8. be used to operate your vehicle.
CAUTION For models with “keyless access with
Do not attach a large key holder or push-button start system”:
key case to either key. If it bangs If you press the push-button ignition
against your knees while you are switch when carrying an unregistered
driving, it could turn the ignition access key, the switch will not turn to the
switch from the “ON” position to the “ON” position and the engine will not start.
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby For models without “keyless access
stopping the engine. with push-button start system”:
Even if an unregistered key fits into the
& Key number plate ignition switch and can be turned to the
“START” position, the engine will auto-
The key number is stamped on the key matically stop after several seconds.
number plate attached to the key set.
1) Master key Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
Write down the key number and keep it in
2) Submaster key
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This ponder in which the key’s ID code is
3) Valet key
number is needed to make a replacement stored. The transponder transmits the
4) Key number plate
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-3. receiver under any of the following condi-
vehicle: tions.
Master key, submaster key and valet key. . When an access key is detected within
the operating range of the antennas inside
The master key and submaster key fit all the vehicle (models with “keyless access
locks on your vehicle. with push-button start system”)
. Ignition switch . When a key is inserted into the ignition

Keys and doors/Immobilizer 2-3
switch and turned to the “ON” position NOTE One key that has already been registered
(models without “keyless access with To protect your vehicle from theft, is required in order to register a new key.
push-button start system”) please pay close attention to the fol- If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
lowing security precautions: remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
If the transmitted ID code matches the ID
code registered in the immobilizer system, . Never leave your vehicle unattended immobilizer system. For security reasons,
the system allows the engine to be with its keys inside. the lost key’s ID code should be erased
started. Since the ID code is transmitted . Before leaving your vehicle, close all from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
and acted upon almost instantly, the windows and the moonroof, and lock ID code, all keys that will be used are
immobilizer system does not impede the doors and rear gate. required.
normal starting of the engine. . Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the For details about new key registration and
If the engine does not start, perform either vehicle. erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact
of the following procedures. . The vehicle has a maintenance-free your SUBARU dealer.
. Perform the procedure described in type immobilizer system.
“Starting engine” F9-18 (models with & Certification for immobilizer
“keyless access with push-button start
system”). & Security indicator light system
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-28. For models with “keyless access with
. Pull out the key once before trying
push-button start system”:
again (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”). Refer to & Key replacement Refer to “Certification for keyless access
“Ignition switch (models without push- with push-button start system” F2-16.
Your key number plate will be required if
button start system)” F3-3. you ever need a replacement key made. For models without “keyless access
Any new key must be registered for use with push-button start system”:
CAUTION with your vehicle’s immobilizer system FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
before it can be used. The maximum
. Do not place the key under direct
number of keys that can be registered CAUTION
sunlight or anywhere it may
for use with one vehicle is as follows.
become hot.
. Four (models without “keyless access FCC WARNING
. Do not get the key wet. If the key with push-button start system”) Changes or modifications not ex-
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth pressly approved by the party re-
. Seven (models with “keyless access
immediately. sponsible for compliance could void
with push-button start system”)
the user’s authority to operate the
– CONTINUED –

2-4 Keys and doors/Door locks
equipment. Door locks the “ON” position.

For details about the alarm system,
This device complies with Part 15 of & Locking and unlocking from refer to “Alarm system” F2-20.
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the outside
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter- NOTE
ference, and (2) this device must If you unlock the driver’s door with a
accept any interference received, in- key (including a mechanical key) and
cluding interference that may cause open the door while the alarm system
undesired operation. is armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
NOTE case, perform any of the following
This device complies with Industry operations:
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the follow- Models with “keyless access with
ing two conditions: (1) this device may push-button start system”:
not cause interference, and (2) this . Press any button on the access key
device must accept any interference, (except when the access key battery is To lock the driver’s door from the outside
including interference that may cause discharged). with the key, turn the key toward the front.
undesired operation of the device. . Turn the push-button ignition switch To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
to the “ACC” position. rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
NOTE . Carry the access key and perform an unlocked door.
either of the following procedures.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
– Grip the front door handle To lock the door from outside without the
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. – Press the rear gate opener button key, the following methods are available.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux Models without “keyless access with
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne push-button start system”:
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) . Press any button on the remote
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter transmitter (except when the transmit-
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, ter battery is discharged).
même si le brouillage est susceptible . Insert the key into the ignition
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. switch and turn the ignition switch to

Keys and doors/Door locks 2-5
& Locking and unlocking from

the inside
Locking using lock lever Locking using power door locking switch
1) Rotate the lock lever forward. 1) Press the front side (lock side) of the
2) Close the door. power door locking switch.
2) Close the door. 1) Unlock
2) Lock
In this case, all closed doors and the rear
gate are locked at the same time. To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
Always make sure that all doors and the the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle. The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
NOTE
Pull the inside door handle to open an
Make sure that you do not leave the key unlocked door.
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key. Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are closed before starting to
drive.
– CONTINUED –

2-6 Keys and doors/Door locks
WARNING NOTE
Switch Automatically turning
Item position off . The factory setting (default setting)
Keep all doors locked when you for this function is set as “operational”.
Approximately 20
drive, especially when small chil- Map lights DOOR*1 minutes later . When leaving the vehicle, please
dren are in your vehicle. make sure that all doors and the rear
Dome light DOOR Approximately 20 gate are completely closed.
Along with the proper use of seat- minutes later
belts and child restraints, locking . The battery drainage prevention
Ignition — Approximately 20 function does not operate while the
the doors reduces the chance of switch light minutes later
being thrown out of the vehicle in an key is in the ignition switch.
Door step — None*2
accident. lights
It also helps prevent passengers Cargo Approximately 20
from falling out if a door is acciden- area light DOOR minutes later
tally opened, and intruders from
unexpectedly opening doors and *1: The map lights can be controlled by the
entering your vehicle. battery drainage prevention function only when
the map light switches are in the OFF position
and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR
& Battery drainage prevention position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map
function lights” F6-3.
If a door or the rear gate is not completely *2: The door step lights are not affected by the
closed, the interior lights will remain battery drainage prevention function, so the
illuminated as a result. However, several lights will not turn off automatically. To turn off
lights will be automatically turned off by the lights, it is necessary that each door is
the battery drainage prevention function to completely closed.
prevent the battery from discharging. The
following interior lights will be affected by The operational/non-operational setting of
this function. this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to change the setting.

Keys and doors/Power door locking switches 2-7
Power door locking switches NOTE ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
Make sure that you do not leave the key tion function operational
inside the vehicle before locking the With the driver’s door open, the doors are
doors from the outside using the power automatically kept unlocked even if the
door locking switches. front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
& Key lock-in prevention func- ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion tion function non-operational
This function prevents the doors from . If the lock lever is turned to the front
being locked under the following condi- (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
tions. open and the driver’s door is then closed
. The key is still in the ignition switch with the lock lever in that position, the
(models without “keyless access with driver’s door is locked.
push-button start system”) . If the spare key is used to lock the
1) Lock . The ignition switch is in the “ON” driver’s door from the outside of the
2) Unlock position (models with “keyless access with vehicle, the door is locked.
All doors and the rear gate can be locked
and unlocked by the power door locking This function’s operational/non-opera-
switches located at the driver’s side and tional setting can be changed by a
the front passenger’s side doors. SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
To lock the doors, push the front side of
the switch. NOTE
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of . The factory setting (default setting)
the switch. for this function is set as “operational”.
When you close the doors after you set . When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the door locks, the doors remain locked. you are holding the key before locking
the doors.

2-8 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
Keyless access with push- . Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting and
button start system (if stopping engine (models with push-button
equipped) start system)” F7-11.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-20.
Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access key.
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” F2-17.
1) Release button
A mechanical key is attached to each
2) Mechanical key
access key. The mechanical key is used
for the following operations. While pressing the release button of the
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door access key, take out the mechanical key.
1) Access key (main) . Locking and unlocking the glove box
2) Access key (sub) & Safety precautions
3) Key number plate You cannot unlock the glove box without
using the mechanical key. You can keep WARNING
The vehicle has two access keys and a the glove box locked when you leave your
key number plate. For details about the vehicle and the access key (with the If you wear an implanted pacemaker
key number plate, refer to “Key number mechanical key removed) at a parking or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
plate” F2-2. facility. least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
The keyless access with push-button start transmitting antennas installed on
system allows you to perform the following the vehicle.
functions when you are carrying the The radio waves from the transmit-
access key. ting antennas on the vehicle could
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and adversely affect the operation of
rear gate implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system 2-9
If you wear electric medical equip- glove box, on the seat, in the
ment other than an implanted pace- door pocket or at the corner of
maker or an implanted defibrillator, the cargo area) or within 6.6 ft (2
before using the keyless access m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the
with push-button start system, refer garage). The access key may be
to “Radio waves used for the key- locked inside the vehicle, or the
less access with push-button start battery may discharge rapidly.
system” mentioned later, and con- Note that the push-button igni-
tact the electric medical equipment tion switch may not turn on in
manufacturer for more information. some cases depending on the
The radio waves from the transmit- location of the access key.
ting antennas on the vehicle could . The access key contains electro-
adversely affect the operation of the nic components. Observe the
electric medical equipment. following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys- – Although you can replace the
tem” battery of the access key
yourself, it is recommended
. The keyless access with push- that the battery be replaced by
button start system uses radio a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
waves of the following fre- risk of damage at the time of
quency* in addition to the radio replacement.
waves used for the remote key-
less entry system. The radio – Do not get the access key wet.
waves are periodically output If the access key gets wet,
from the antennas installed on wipe it off immediately and let
1) Antenna it dry completely.
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations. – Do not allow strong impacts to
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz
CAUTION the access key.
. Never leave or store the access – Keep the access key away
key inside the vehicle (e.g., on from magnetic sources.
the instrumental panel, inside the – Never leave the access key in
– CONTINUED –

direct sunlight or anywhere of the access key from being and power transmission lines
that may become hot, such pressed. – When products that transmit
as on the dashboard. It may radio waves are used, such as an
damage the battery or cause access key or a remote transmitter
circuit malfunctions. NOTE key of another vehicle
– Do not wash the access key in . The operational/non-operational – When carrying more than one
an ultrasonic washer. setting for the keyless access function access key
can be changed. For the setting proce- – When the access key is placed
– Do not leave the access key in dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-
humid or dusty locations. near wireless communication
cess function” F2-15. The setting can equipment such as a cell phone
Doing so may cause malfunc- also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
tions. – When the access key is placed
For more details, contact a SUBARU near a metallic object
– Do not leave the access key dealer. – When metallic accessories are
near personal computers or . For detailed information about the attached to the access key
home electric appliances. operation method for the push-button
Doing so may cause the ac- – When carrying the access key
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess key to malfunction, re- with electronic appliances such as
cess function is switched to the non-
a laptop computer
sulting in battery discharge. operational mode, refer to “Access key
– if access key does not operate – When the battery of the access
. If the access key is dropped, the key is discharged
integrated mechanical key inside properly” F9-17.
. The keyless access with push-but- . The access key is always commu-
may become loose. Be careful nicating with the vehicle and is con-
not to lose the mechanical key. ton start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key tinuously using the battery. Although
. When you carry the access key the life of the battery varies depending
and environmental conditions may in-
on an airplane, do not press the on the operating conditions, it is ap-
terfere with the communication be-
button of the access key while in proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery
tween the access key and the vehicle
the airplane. When any button of becomes fully discharged, replace it
under the following conditions, and it
the access key is pressed, radio with a new one.
may not be possible to lock or unlock
waves are sent and may affect . If an access key is lost, it is
the doors or start the engine.
the operation of the airplane. recommended that the access key be
When you carry the access key – When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are trans- reregistered. For reregistration of an
in a bag on an airplane, take access key, contact a SUBARU dealer.
measures to prevent the buttons mitted, such as a broadcast station
. For a spare access key, contact a

SUBARU dealer. & Locking and unlocking with

. Up to 7 access keys can be regis- “keyless access” entry func-
tered for one vehicle. tion
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key. It is ! Operating ranges
necessary for vehicle repair.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
as the door pocket, dashboard and the
corner of the cargo area. Vibrations
may damage the key or turn on the
switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
. After the vehicle battery is dis- 1) LED indicator
charged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be re- When the access key is within either of the
quired to start the engine. In this case, operating ranges of the front doors, the
perform the following procedure to LED indicator on the access key flashes.
initialize the steering lock. When the keyless access functions are
1) Antenna disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
2) Operating range
switch to the “OFF” position. For unless a button on the access key is
details, refer to “Switching power” The operating ranges of the door and rear pressed.
F3-6. gate locking/unlocking functions are ap- ! Operating range tips
(2) Open and close the driver’s proximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from
door. the respective door handles and the rear . Locking by using the keyless access
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- gate ornament. function can be operated only by the door
onds. lock sensor in the operating range in
which the access key is detected.
When the steering is locked, the initi- . Unlocking by using the keyless access
alization is completed. function can be operated only by the door
handle in the operating range in which the
access key is detected.
. If the access key is placed too close to
– CONTINUED –

the vehicle body, the keyless access on a cell phone, the operating ranges may released.
function may not operate properly. If they be reduced, or the keyless access func- . If the door lock sensor is touched three
do not operate properly, repeat the operation may not operate. times or more repeatedly, the system will
tion from further away. In such a case, perform the procedure ignore the sensor operation.
. If the access key is placed near the described in “Locking and unlocking” F9- . When performing the locking proce-
ground or in an elevated location from the 17. dure too quickly, locking may not have
ground, even if it is in the indicated . When an access key is in the operating been completed. After locking the doors, it
operating range, the keyless access func- range, if the door handle becomes wet is recommended to pull the REAR door
tion may not operate properly. due to exposure to a significant amount of handles to confirm that the doors have
. When the access key is within the water when the vehicle is washed or been locked.
operating range, it is possible for anyone, during heavy rain, the doors may be . It is possible to lock the doors even
even someone who is not carrying the locked or unlocked. when one of the doors is open. After
access key, to operate the keyless access . The keyless access function may not performing the locking procedure, close
function. Note that locking and unlocking operate properly depending on the status the opened door or rear gate to lock it.
can be operated only by the door handle, of the access key and the radio wave . Within 3 seconds after locking the
door lock sensor, rear gate opener button conditions around the vehicle. In such a doors and the rear gate by using the
or rear lock button in the operating range case, perform the procedure described in keyless access function, it is not possible
in which the access key is detected. “Locking and unlocking” F9-17. to unlock doors and/or the rear gate by
. It is not possible to lock the doors and ! How to use keyless access func- using the keyless access function.
rear gate using the keyless access functions . When locking, be sure to carry the
tion when the access key is inside the access key to prevent locking the access
vehicle. However, depending on the status ! Keyless access function tips key in the vehicle.
of the access key and the environmental . When you lock the doors and rear gate . The setting of the hazard warning
conditions, the access key may be locked using the keyless access function, turn the flasher operation can be changed by your
inside the vehicle. Before locking, make push-button ignition switch off. It is not SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
sure that you have the access key. possible to lock the doors and rear gate dealer for details.
. When the battery of the access key is using the keyless access function when . For models with the multi function
discharged, or when operating it in a the push-button ignition switch is on the display, the setting of the hazard warning
location with strong radio waves or noise “ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to “Switch- flasher operation can be changed by
(e.g., near a radio tower, power plant, ing power” F3-6. operating the multi function display. For
broadcast station or an area where wire- . If the door handle is gripped with a details, refer to “Hazard warning flasher
less equipment is used), or while talking gloved hand, the door lock may not be setting” F3-73.

! Unlocking ! Opening rear gate ! Locking with the door lock

sensor
Carry the access key, and grip the door 1) Rear gate opener button
handle. 1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key, and press the rear
. When the driver’s door handle is gate opener button. Only the rear gate will Carry the access key, close all doors
gripped, only the driver’s door will be be unlocked and opened. Also, an elec- including the rear gate and touch the door
unlocked. tronic chirp will sound twice and the lock sensor on the door handle. All doors
. When the front passenger’s door han- hazard warning flashers will flash twice. including the rear gate will be locked. Also,
dle is gripped, all doors including the rear an electronic chirp will sound once and the
gate will be unlocked. hazard warning flashers will flash once.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice NOTE
and the hazard warning flashers will flash After touching the door lock sensor to
twice. lock all of the doors (including the rear
gate), if you touch the door lock sensor
once more to attempt the lock opera-
tion without first unlocking the doors,
nothing will happen, even if the door
lock sensor is touched. In this case,
perform the unlocking operation once
– CONTINUED –

first. You can then touch the door lock have not been used for 2 weeks or longer ! Door unlock selection function
sensor to lock the doors. while all doors are locked The door unlock selection function makes
it possible to unlock the driver’s door or
! Locking with the rear lock button Case 2: When the access key has been the rear gate without unlocking any other
left in the operating range for 10 minutes doors. You can change the setting for the
or longer while all doors are locked driver’s door and for the rear gate inde-
! Recovery from power saving pendently.
mode Operational: Only the driver’s door or the
When one of the following is operated, the rear gate will be unlocked.
keyless access function will be recovered.
Non-operational: All doors and the rear
Case 1:
gate will be unlocked.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position For the factory setting (default setting),
. Unlock the doors by operating any refer to “Function settings” F22.
procedure other than gripping the front
passenger’s door handle
NOTE
1) Rear lock button . Lock the doors The setting can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
Carry the access key, close all doors . Open a door and then close it dealer for details. Also, for models with
including the rear gate and press the rear Case 2: the multi function display, the setting
lock button. The rear gate and all doors can be changed by operating the multi
. Unlock the doors by gripping the door
will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will function display. For details, refer to
handle
sound once and the hazard warning “Keyless access setting (models with
flashers will flash once. . Unlock the doors by pressing the rear “keyless access with push-button start
gate opener button system”)” F3-77.
! Power saving function . Lock the doors by touching the door
The keyless access function will be lock sensor
disabled in the following cases to protect . Lock or unlock the doors by using the
the access key battery and the vehicle remote keyless entry system
battery. . Lock or unlock the doors by using the
Case 1: When the keyless access func- power door locking switch
tion and the remote keyless entry system . Open either of the front doors

& Selecting audible signal op- & Disabling keyless access ! Disabling functions
eration function 1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
Using an electronic chirp, the system will When the vehicle is not going to be used door.
give you an audible signal when the doors for a long time, or when you choose not to
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn use the keyless access function, the
the audible signal off. For more details, keyless access function can be disabled.
contact a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
NOTE . The locking and unlocking function
For models with the multi function by the remote keyless entry system is
display, the setting can be changed by not disabled.
operating the multi function display. . The setting can also be changed at
For details, refer to “Audible signal SUBARU dealers. For more details,
setting” F3-71. contact a SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the func-
& Warning chimes and warning tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting engine”
light F9-18.
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the
power door locking switch.
The keyless access with push-button start . We recommend that you disable the
system sounds a warning chime and keyless access functions under the 3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
flashes the access key warning light on following conditions. performed, open the driver’s door.
the combination meter in order to minimize – When the vehicle is not going to 4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is
improper operations and help protect your be used for an extended period of performed, push the rear side (unlock
vehicle from theft. time side) of the power door locking switch
For details, refer to “Warning chimes and twice while the door is open.
– When the keyless access func-
warning light of the keyless access with tions are not going to be used 5. Within 30 seconds after step 4 is
push-button start system” F3-23. – When the access key needs to be performed, close and open the driver’s
stored inside or near the vehicle door twice.
6. Within 30 seconds after step 5 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
– CONTINUED –

7. Within 30 seconds after step 6 is & Replacing access key undesired operation.
performed, close and open the driver’s Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU
door once. ! Canada-spec. models
dealers. For more details, contact a
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is SUBARU dealer. NOTE
performed, close the door. A chirp sound This device complies with Industry
will be heard, and the functions will be & Certification for keyless ac- Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
disabled. (s). Operation is subject to the follow-
cess with push-button start
system ing two conditions: (1) this device may
NOTE not cause interference, and (2) this
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door ! U.S.-spec. models device must accept any interference,
locking switch slowly. If the switch is FCC ID: HYQ14ACX including interference that may cause
pressed quickly, the functions may not undesired operation of the device.
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
be disabled. FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02 NOTE
! Enabling functions CAUTION Le présent appareil est conforme aux
When the procedure to disable the func- CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
tions is performed again, the functions are FCC WARNING aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
enabled. Changes or modifications not ex- L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne
& When access key does not pressly approved by the party re-
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
operate properly sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
Refer to “Access key – if access key does equipment. tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
not operate properly” F9-17. même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
& Replacing battery of access NOTE
key This device complies with Part 15 of
Refer to “Replacing access key battery” the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
F11-45. the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-17
Remote keyless entry system responsible for compliance doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
could void the user’s authority l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
to operate the equipment. tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
CAUTION même si le brouillage est susceptible
FCC ID: CWTWB1U811 d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
FCC ID: CWTWBU766 For models with “keyless access with
those experienced as a result of FCC ID: HYQ14ACX push-button start system”, the access
dropping or throwing. This device complies with Part 15 of key is used as the transmitter for the
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to remote keyless entry system. For models
. Do not take the remote transmit- the following two conditions: (1) This without “keyless access with push-button
ter apart except when replacing device may not cause harmful inter- start system”, the transmitter for the
the battery. ference, and (2) this device must remote keyless entry system is located
. Do not get the remote transmitter accept any interference received, in- inside the key head.
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with cluding interference that may cause
a cloth immediately. The remote keyless entry system has the
undesired operation. following functions.
. When you carry the remote trans- . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
mitter on an airplane, do not NOTE
This device complies with Industry rear gate) without a key
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard . Unlocking the rear gate without a key
When any button of the remote (s). Operation is subject to the follow- . Sounding a panic alarm
transmitter is pressed, radio ing two conditions: (1) this device may . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
waves are sent and may affect not cause interference, and (2) this tem. For detailed information, refer to
the operation of the airplane. device must accept any interference, “Alarm system” F2-20.
When you carry the remote trans- including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device. The operable distance of the remote
mitter in a bag on an airplane, keyless entry system is approximately 30
take measures to prevent the feet (10 meters). However, this distance
buttons of the remote transmitter NOTE will vary depending on environmental
from being pressed. Le présent appareil est conforme aux conditions. The system’s operable dis-
. FCC WARNING CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables tance will be shorter in areas near a
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. facility or electronic equipment emitting
Changes or modifications not
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux strong radio waves such as a power plant,
expressly approved by the party
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne
– CONTINUED –

2-18 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote

controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the key is inserted in Access key Transmitter
the ignition switch. 1) Lock/arm button 1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button 2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Rear gate unlock button 3) Rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button 4) PANIC button
NOTE
The hazard warning flashers will flash
once or twice when the transmitter
button is pressed in the following
cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When unlocking the rear gate
Operation of the hazard warning
flashers in the above cases can be set
to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-19
tails. Also, for models with a multi NOTE ter. Unless a button on the access key/
function display, the setting can be If the interval between the first and remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm
changed using the display. For details, second presses of the unlock/disarm will be deactivated after approximately 30
refer to “Hazard warning flasher button (for unlocking of all of the doors seconds.
setting” F3-73. and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond. & Selecting audible signal op-
& Locking the doors eration (models without
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors & Vehicle finder function “keyless access with push-
and rear gate. An electronic chirp will Use this function to find your vehicle
button start system”)
sound once and the hazard warning parked among many vehicles in a large Using an electronic chirp, the system will
flashers will flash once. parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet give you an audible signal when the doors
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) is not (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound lock/arm button three times in a 5-second the audible signal off.
five times and the hazard warning flashers period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
will flash five times to alert you that the Perform the following steps to deactivate
sound once and its hazard warning the audible signal. You can also use the
doors (or the rear gate) are not properly flashers to flash three times.
closed. When you close the door, it will same steps to restore the function.
automatically lock and then an electronic NOTE 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
chirp will sound once and the hazard If the interval between presses is too doors and the rear gate.
warning flashers will flash once. short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
& Unlocking the doors not respond to the signals from the
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock access key/remote transmitter.
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning & Sounding a panic alarm
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
doors and the rear gate, briefly press the button once.
unlock/disarm button a second time within
5 seconds. The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the access key/remote transmit-
– CONTINUED –

2-20 Keys and doors/Alarm system
2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side Alarm system & System operation
of the power door locking switch. The alarm system will sound the following
3. While holding down the REAR (UN- The alarm system helps to protect your alarms when triggered.
LOCK) side of the power door locking vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn . The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into sounds and the hazard warning flashers seconds.
the ignition switch at least 6 times within
10 seconds after Step 2.
flash if someone attempts to break into . The hazard warning flashers will flash
your vehicle. for 30 seconds.
4. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds after Step 3. For models with “keyless access with If any of the doors or the rear gate remains
5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3 push-button start system”: open after the 30-second period, the horn
times to indicate completion of the setting. The system can be armed and disarmed will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
with the keyless access function or access minutes. If the door or the rear gate is
You may have the above settings done by key. closed while the horn is sounding, the
your SUBARU dealer. Also, for models The system will not be activated when the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up
with a multi function display, the setting push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC” to 30 seconds.
can be changed using the display. For or “ON” position.
details, refer to “Audible signal setting” The alarm is triggered by:
F3-71. For models without “keyless access . Opening any of the doors or the rear
with push-button start system”: gate
& Replacing the battery The system can be armed and disarmed . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
Refer to “Battery replacement” F11-44. with the remote transmitter. forced entry (only models with shock
The system will not be activated when the sensors (dealer option))
& Replacing lost transmitters key is inserted into the ignition switch.
If you lose a transmitter or want to
NOTE
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set The alarm system can be set to trigger
purchase additional transmitters (up to for activation at the time of shipment from
four can be programmed), your transmit- the illumination of the following interior
the factory. You can set the system for lights.
ters should be reprogrammed for security deactivation yourself or have it done by
reasons. For details, contact your . Map lights (illuminate only when the
your SUBARU dealer. door interlock switch is in the “DOOR”
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry position)
system. . Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-21
position) “AL oF” and the horn sounds twice, stop.

. Cargo area light (illuminates only indicating that the system is now deacti-
when the cargo area light switch is in vated. & Arming the system
the “ON” position) If the system was previously deacti-
vated: NOTE
The notifications regarding the map . The system can be armed even if the
lights, dome light and cargo area light The odometer/trip meter screen displays
are deactivated as the factory setting. A “AL on” and the horn sounds once, engine hood, the windows and/or
indicating that the system is now acti- moonroof are open. Always make sure
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- that they are fully closed before arming
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for vated.
the system.
details. NOTE . The 30-second standby time can be
You may have the above setting eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
& Activating and deactivating change done by your SUBARU dealer. formed by your SUBARU dealer.
the alarm system . The system is in the standby mode
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
& If you have accidentally trig- for a 30-second period before arming
alarm system for activation or deactiva- gered the alarm system the system. The security indicator light
will flash at short intervals during this
tion, do the following. ! To stop the alarm period.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to Perform any of the following operations. . If any of the following actions is
“Disarming the system” F2-24.
. Press any button on the access key/ done during the standby period, the
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all remote transmitter. system will not switch to the surveil-
doors and the rear gate. lance state.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (models without “keyless access – Doors (including the rear gate)
position. with push-button start system”). are unlocked using the access key/
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side . Turn the push-button ignition to the remote transmitter.
of the driver’s power door locking switch, “ACC” position (models with “keyless – Doors (including the rear gate)
open the driver’s door within the following access with push-button start system”). are unlocked using the keyless
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without access function (models with “key-
releasing the switch. The setting will then NOTE less access with push-button start
be changed as follows. Only registered keys will stop the system”).
If the system was previously activated: alarm. If the immobilizer transponder – Any door (including the rear
is not registered, the alarm will not gate) is opened.
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
– CONTINUED –

– The ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position (models without
“keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position (mod-
els with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
! To arm the system using the access
key/remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
Access key Transmitter
2. Remove the key from the ignition
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system 1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
switch (models without “keyless access
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the 2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
with push-button start system”)/turn the system system
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
6. Briefly press the arm button (for less

than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear

gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will leave only the driver’s door or the front ! To arm the system using the key-
sound once, the hazard warning flashers passenger’s door open. less access function (if equipped)
will flash once, and the security indicator
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
equipped)
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice 2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- the “OFF” position.
ing that the system has been armed for 3. Open the doors and get out of the
surveillance. vehicle.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not locked.
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automa- 6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
tically lock. the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
! To arm the system using power
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
door locking switches
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
1. Close all windows. will flash once and the security indicator
2. Remove the key from the ignition light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
switch (models without “keyless access flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
with push-button start system”)/turn the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF” approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
position (models with “keyless access with ing that the system has been armed for 1) Door lock sensor
push-button start system”). surveillance.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate) but
– CONTINUED –

tically lock. The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-
& Disarming the system mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
Perform either of the following procedures. proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
. Briefly press the disarm button (for less that the alarm system has been disarmed.
than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote
transmitter. To unlock all other doors and the rear
gate, briefly press the disarm button a
. Carry the access key and perform
second time within 5 seconds.
either of the following procedures (models
with “keyless access with push-button ! Emergency disarming
start system”). If you cannot disarm the system using the
– Grip the front door handle. access key/transmitter (i.e. the transmitter
– Press the rear gate opener button. is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is
Security indicator light
too weak), you can disarm the system
6. Carry the access key and touch the The following door(s) will unlock, an without using the access key/remote
door lock sensor. All doors (and the rear electronic chirp will sound twice and the transmitter.
gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
sound once, the hazard warning flashers . Driver’s door: when either of the the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
will flash once, and the security indicator following procedures is performed to the “ON” position with a registered key/
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid – Press the disarm button on the access key.
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the access key/remote transmitter briefly
security indicator light will then flash (for less than 2 seconds). NOTE
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- – Grip the driver’s door handle (mod- For models with “keyless access with
onds), indicating that the system has been els with “keyless access with push- push-button start system”, if the ac-
armed for surveillance. button start system”). cess key battery is discharged, perform
. Rear gate: when pressing the rear gate the procedure described in “Switching
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not opener button (models with “keyless ac- power” F9-17. In such a case, replace
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds cess with push-button start system”) the battery immediately. Refer to “Re-
five times, the hazard warning flashers placing access key battery” F11-45.
. All doors: when gripping the front
flash five times to alert you that the doors
passenger’s door handle (models with
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
“keyless access with push-button start
When you close the door, the system will
system”)
automatically arm and doors will automa-

& Valet mode ! To enter the passive mode

When you choose the valet mode, the If you wish to program the passive arming
alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, have it done by your SUBARU
mode, the access key/remote transmitter dealer.
is used only for locking and unlocking the ! Arming the system
doors and rear gate and for panic activa-
tion. CAUTION
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for In passive mode, the system will
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating automatically activate the alarm but
and deactivating the alarm system” F2- WILL NOT automatically lock the
21. The security indicator light will con- doors. In order to lock the doors
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds you must either lock them as in- 1) ON
indicating that the system is in the valet dicated in step 4 below or with the 2) LOCK
mode. key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually 2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
To exit valet mode, change the setting of will result in a higher security risk. “LOCK” position and remove the key from
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation the ignition switch.
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” 3. Open the doors and get out of the
ing the alarm system” F2-21. position. vehicle.
& Passive arming (models

without “keyless access with
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
– CONTINUED –

& Tripped sensor identification & Shock sensors (dealer op-

The security indicator light flashes when tion)
the alarm system has been triggered. The shock sensors trigger the alarm
Also, the number of flashes indicates the system when they sense impacts applied
location of unauthorized intrusion or the to the vehicle and when any of their
severity of impact on the vehicle. electric wires are cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the hazard
When the ignition switch is turned to the
warning flashers to flash for a short time
“ON” position, the indicator light will light
when the sensed impact is weak, but it
for 1 second and then flash as follows.
warns of a strong impact or multiple
. When a door or rear gate was opened: impacts by sounding the horn and flashing
5 times the hazard warning flashers, both lasting
. When a strong impact or multiple approximately 30 seconds.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors impacts were sensed: twice (only models If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
with the inside door lock levers. with shock sensors (dealer option)) connect them and set them for activation
5. Close the doors. The system will . When a light impact was sensed: once or deactivation.
automatically arm after 1 minute. (only models with shock sensors (dealer
option)) NOTE
In the passive mode, the system can also
. The shock sensors are not always
be armed with the remote transmitter or NOTE able to sense impacts caused by break-
with the power door locking switches. If Any of the above indicator light flash-
the remote transmitter or power door ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
ings will recur each time the ignition does not cause vibration (such as
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, switch is turned to the “ON” position.
arming will take place immediately regard- breaking the glass using a rescue
Rearming the alarm system cancels the hammer).
less of whether or not the passive mode flashing.
has been selected. . The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration as indicated in the following
! Disarming the system examples and trigger the alarm system.
To disarm the system, briefly press the Select the settings of the alarm system
disarm button on the remote transmitter. and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.

Keys and doors/Child safety locks 2-27
Examples: Child safety locks Windows

– Vibration from a construction site
– Vibration in a multistory car park
– Vibration from trains WARNING
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre- To avoid serious personal injury
ference by your SUBARU dealer. caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
Each rear door has a child safety lock. dows using the lock switch when
When the child safety lock lever is in the children are riding in the vehicle.
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be . Before leaving the vehicle, al-
opened from inside. The door can only ways remove the key from the
be opened from the outside. ignition switch for safety (models
without “keyless access with
WARNING push-button start system”) and
Always turn the child safety locks to never allow an unattended child
the “LOCK” position when children to remain in the vehicle. Failure
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury to follow this procedure could
could result if a child accidentally result in injury to a child operat-
opens the door and falls out. ing the power window.
. The driver should be aware of
and pay careful attention to his/
her responsibilities.
– CONTINUED –

2-28 Keys and doors/Windows
CAUTION power window” F2-31. ! Operating the driver’s window

The power windows operate only when
After fully opening or fully closing a the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
window, do not continue to push the
switch in the same direction. It may & Power window operation by
cause the power window to mal- driver
function.
! Driver’s side power window
switches
NOTE
. Due to the structure of the vehicle
body, the rear seat window cannot be
fully opened.
. When the following operations are
performed, the power window breaker 1) Automatically open/close
will operate and it may not be possible 2) Open/close
to open or close the window.
– After the driver’s side window is To open:
fully closed or fully opened, the Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
switch continues to be operated in The window will open as long as the
the same direction for a few sec- switch is held.
onds.
NOTE
– After the windows for three or 1) Lock switch
more seats are fully closed or fully If you continue to hold the AUTO
2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto
opened, each switch continues to up and down feature) (if equipped) switch in the down position after the
be operated in the same direction 3) For front passenger’s window window has been fully opened, the
simultaneously for a few seconds. 4) For rear left window circuit breaker may activate for a short
. In this case, after the breaker re- 5) For rear right window time and the window may not operate.
covers, be sure to initialize the power Allow several seconds for the system
All door windows can be controlled by the to reset without touching the switch,
windows. If they are not initialized, the power window switch cluster at the driver
one-touch auto up/down function will and the window will begin to operate
side door. normally on its own.
not operate. Refer to “Initialization of

Keys and doors/Windows 2-29
This switch also has a one-touch auto closed fully without holding the switch. NOTE
down feature that allows the window to be Pull the switch up until it clicks and release . If a window detects an impact simi-
opened fully without holding the switch. it, and the window will fully close. To stop lar to that caused by trapping an object
Push the switch down until it clicks and the window halfway, push the switch down (for example, when the vehicle encoun-
release it, and the window will fully open. lightly. ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
To stop the window halfway, pull the ment function may operate.
switch up lightly. NOTE . The window cannot be operated for
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
To close: due to situations such as battery or ment function operates.
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The fuse replacement, the one-touch auto . If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
window will close as long as the switch is up/down function is deactivated. Initi- nected due to situations such as
held. alize the power window to reactivate battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
the one-touch auto up/down function. entrapment function is deactivated.
NOTE Refer to “Initialization of power win- Initialize the power window to reacti-
If you continue to hold the AUTO dow” F2-31. vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
switch in the up position after the fer to “Initialization of power window”
window has fully closed, the circuit ! Anti-entrapment function F2-31.
breaker may open and the system may
not operate. After several seconds, the CAUTION While closing the driver’s window auto-
window will be able to be opened by matically, if the window senses a sub-
holding the switch down until it is fully . Never attempt to test this func- stantial enough object trapped between
opened. The AUTO function will not tion using fingers, hands or other the window and the window frame, it
operate. The window can be raised by parts of your body. automatically moves down slightly and
stops.
pulling up on the switch several times . The anti-entrapment function
until the window is fully closed. may not operate properly if some
To reset to normal operation, initialize object gets trapped just before
the power window to reactivate the the window fully closes.
one-touch auto up/down function. Re-
fer to “Initialization of power window”
F2-31.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
feature that allows the window to be
– CONTINUED –

2-30 Keys and doors/Windows
! Operating the passengers’ win- ! Locking the passengers’ windows & Power window operation by
dows passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
1) Lock
To open: 2) Unlock
Push the appropriate switch down and To lock:
hold it until the window reaches the Press the lock switch. When the lock
desired position. Each passenger window can be controlled
switch is in the lock position, the passen-
To close: by the power window switch located on
gers’ windows cannot be opened or
Pull the switch up and hold it until the the door.
closed.
window reaches the desired position. To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.

Keys and doors/Rear gate 2-31
! Operating the windows & Initialization of power win- Rear gate

dow
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due & Manual rear gate (if
to situations such as battery or fuse equipped)
replacement, the following functions will The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
be deactivated. using any of the following systems.
. One-touch auto up/down function . Power door locking switch: Refer to
. Anti-entrapment function “Power door locking switches” F2-7.
. Keyless access with the push-button
Initialize the power window using the start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
following procedure to reactivate these less access with push-button start system”
functions. F2-8.
1. Close the driver’s door. . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” “Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.
To open: position.
Press the switch down and hold it until the To open:
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
window reaches the desired position.
by pushing down the power window
To close: switch.
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
4. Pull up the power window switch and
window reaches the desired position.
close the window completely. Continue
When the lock switch on the power pulling up the switch for approximately 1
window switch cluster, located on the second after the window is closed com-
driver’s side door, is in the lock position, pletely.
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper- 5. Open the driver’s side window com-
ated with the passengers’ switches. pletely by fully pushing down the power
windows switch.
Rear gate opener button

1. Unlock the rear gate.
– CONTINUED –

2-32 Keys and doors/Rear gate
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener WARNING & Power rear gate (if equipped)
button. The rear gate will open slightly.
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly. . To prevent dangerous exhaust WARNING
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed . When opening the rear gate,
NOTE make sure there are no people
while driving.
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due around it. If the rear gate, by any
to a discharged vehicle battery, a . Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed chance, should hit a part of the
malfunction in the door locking/unlock- body, this may result in an injury.
ing system or other causes, you can grip. Also avoid closing the rear
unlock it by manually operating the gate by pulling on the recessed . When closing the rear gate, be
rear gate lock release lever. For the grip from inside the cargo space. extremely careful to prevent any-
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the There is a danger of your hand one’s fingers, arms, neck, head
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-18. being caught and injured. or other objects from being
caught in the rear gate. Other-
To close: wise, serious personal injury
CAUTION may be caused by entrapment.
. If either of the operating condi-
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
tions has not been satisfied while
place cellophane tape on the rear
operating the power rear gate, an
gate stays or scratch the stays
electronic chirp will sound and
while loading or unloading cargo.
the power rear gate will be deac-
That could cause leakage of gas
tivated. In this case, the rear gate
from the stays, which may result
may open or close suddenly. Be
in their inability to hold the rear
careful to prevent anyone’s body
gate open.
or any objects from being hit
. Be careful not to hit your head or against the rear gate or being
face on the rear gate when open- caught in the rear gate.
ing or closing the rear gate and
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down . After opening the rear gate on a
when loading or unloading car-
firmly until the latch engages. slope by using the power rear
go.
gate feature, the rear gate may
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
close. Make sure that the rear
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
gate has stopped completely

after opening it. maged. rear gate automatically. At this time, if

. Before leaving the vehicle, al- the system detects jamming, it will
ways remove the key from the The power rear gate operates only when deactivate the power rear gate and the
ignition switch for safety (models all of the following conditions are satisfied. rear gate will not be closed. If this
without “keyless access with . The vehicle is stopped completely. occurs, close the rear gate via regular
push-button start system”) and . The outside temperature is within a procedures.
never allow an unattended child range from −228F to 1588F (from −308C to . If you try to open the rear gate using
to remain in the vehicle. Failure 708C). the power rear gate function immedi-
ately after closing the rear gate using
to follow this procedure could . The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
the power rear gate function, an elec-
result in injury to a child operat- “OFF” or “ACC” position. Or, the ignition
tronic chirp will sound and the rear
ing the power window. switch is in the “ON” position and the
gate will not open. Wait for a while
. The driver should be aware of parking brake is applied (MT models)/the
before trying to open the rear gate via
and pay careful attention to his/ select lever is in the “P” position (CVT
the power rear gate function. If you
her responsibilities. models).
wish to open it right away, it can be
. The power rear gate button NOTE opened manually.
should only be used to open
. If the button is pressed repeatedly
and close the rear gate when
while the power rear gate is operating,
the area around the rear gate is
the system may ignore the button
clearly visible and when you
operation in order to avoid being
have checked that there is no
damaged. Do not press the button
danger of people being caught in
unnecessarily.
the gate.
. It is not possible to stop the rear
gate temporarily while opening be-
CAUTION tween the completely closed position
and approximately 12 in (30 cm) open.
When closing the rear gate after If you press one of the power rear gate
opening it by using the memory buttons briefly during this range, the
function, make sure to use the rear gate will be closed.
power rear gate. If you close the . If the vehicle starts to move while
rear gate manually with extra force, the power rear gate is operating, the
the power rear gate may be da- system sounds a buzzer and closes the
– CONTINUED –

! Operation by the button on the opening.

instrument panel
To close the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate
button. Then an electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers will
flash twice. If the button is briefly pressed
again, the rear gate will open. However,
you cannot stop the rear gate midway
even if you press the button again.
! Operation by the button on the
access key/transmitter
Power rear gate button (models with

transmitter)
Power rear gate button To open the rear gate:
To open the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed. Then an
Press and hold the power rear gate button
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
when the rear gate is closed. Then an
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
The rear gate will open automatically.
The rear gate will open automatically. To stop the rear gate midway:
To stop the rear gate midway: Briefly press the power rear gate button
while the rear gate is being opened. Then
Briefly press the power rear gate button
Power rear gate button (models with the hazard warning flashers will flash
while the rear gate is being opened. Then
access key) twice. If the button is pressed again, the
the hazard warning flashers will flash
rear gate will close. If the button is briefly
twice. If the button is pressed again, the
rear gate will close. If the button is briefly pressed while the gate is closed, the rear
pressed while the gate is closed, the rear gate can be opened. However, the rear
gate can be opened. However, the rear gate cannot be stopped again while it is
gate cannot be stopped again while it is opening.

To close the rear gate: To close the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate Briefly press the power rear gate button on
button. Then an electronic chirp will sound the inside edge of the rear gate. Then an
twice and the hazard warning flashers will electronic chirp will sound twice and the
flash twice. If the button is briefly pressed hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If
again, the rear gate will open. However, the button is briefly pressed again, the
you cannot stop the rear gate midway rear gate will open. However, you cannot
even if you press the button again. stop the rear gate midway even if you
! Operation by the buttons on the press the button again.
rear gate NOTE
When the rear gate was fully open, the
power rear gate button on the inside
Power rear gate button on the inside edge edge of the rear gate will only function.
of the rear gate
To open the rear gate: ! Manual operation
Briefly press the rear gate opener button The power rear gate can open and close
when the rear gate is closed. Then an manually. Refer to “Manual rear gate” F2-
electronic chirp will sound twice and the 31.
The rear gate will open automatically.
NOTE
In the following cases, the power rear
To stop the rear gate midway: gate cannot be opened or closed
Briefly press the opener button / power manually.
Rear gate opener button rear gate button on the inside edge of the . The power rear gate is stopped
rear gate while the rear gate is being midway.
opened. Then the hazard warning flashers . The memory switch is ON and the
will flash twice. If the button is pressed power rear gate is stopped at the set
again, the rear gate will close. If the button height.
is briefly pressed while the gate is closed,
the rear gate can be opened. However,
the rear gate cannot be stopped again
while it is opening.
– CONTINUED –

! Memory function
Memory switch status Rear gate opener button

Memory switch (except Canada-spec. 1) ON status
2) OFF status
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener
models) button located above the license plate.
Your desired rear gate height can be After the latch releases, let go of the
registered. button and raise the rear gate to the
Registration of the rear gate height: desired height manually.
To register the rear gate height, perform
the following procedures while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
1. Press the memory switch to select the
“ON” status.
Memory switch (Canada-spec. models)

from approximately 12 in (30 cm) or you cannot close it by pressing the

more from the completely closed posi- power rear gate button on the rear gate.
tion. To close it, press the other power rear
. Before closing the rear gate in step gate button or close it manually.
4, it is possible to register the height
many times through step 3. Therefore, ! Reverse function
the registered height can easily be fine-
tuned. WARNING
Retrieval of the rear gate height: . Do not let parts of your body be
caught intentionally to operate
To open the rear gate and stop it at the
the reverse function. If the re-
registered height, perform the following
verse function does not operate
procedure.
Power rear gate button on the inside edge for some reason, this may lead to
1. Press the memory switch to select the serious injury or accidents.
of the rear gate
ON status.
3. With the rear gate at the desired . The reverse function may not
2. Press and hold any of the power rear
height, press and hold the power rear operate if foreign objects are
gate switches.
gate button on the inside edge of the rear caught in the rear gate just
gate until an electronic chirp is heard and Even if any of the power rear gate before it closes completely. Be
the hazard warning flashers flash three switches are pressed and held while the careful not to catch your fingers
times. The electronic chirp and the flash- memory switch is in the OFF status, you and other body parts.
ing hazard warning flashers confirm the can stop it at the registered height by . The reverse function may not
selected rear gate height has been regis- pressing the memory switch to select the operate depending on the object
tered. ON status before the rear gate reaches shape and the manner in which it
4. Close the rear gate manually (without the registered height. was caught. Be careful not to
using the power rear gate). catch your fingers and other
NOTE body parts.
. The rear gate will open to the
NOTE position that is stored in the memory
. To change the registered height, function even if the rear gate is opened
perform the registering procedure by the reverse function.
again. . If the rear gate is opened manually
. It is possible to register the height while the memory function is activated,
– CONTINUED –

CAUTION ! Rear gate drop prevention function

If, while fully opened via the power rear
. If the reverse function is operated gate function, the rear gate is lowered by
3 times consecutively, automatic the weight of snow and such, an electronic
opening and closing of the power chirp will sound and the rear gate will
rear gate function will be can- close automatically.
celed and the rear gate can be
opened and closed normally. NOTE
Whether the rear gate opens or . If there is snow on the rear gate,
closes depends on the rear gate only use the power rear gate function
height when automatic operation after removing the snow.
is ceased. Be careful that the rear . If you close the rear gate manually
gate does not hit anyone’s head just after the rear gate is fully opened
or face, etc. and that fingers and 1) Touch sensor using the power rear gate function, the
baggage, etc. are not caught in it. Touch sensors are attached on the left rear gate drop prevention function will
. Take care not to damage the and right edges of the rear gate. If the operate to close the rear gate automa-
touch sensors. Otherwise, the touch sensors detect fingers, baggage, tically. In this case, this is not a
reverse function may cease to etc. while closing by the power rear gate malfunction.
operate. function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3
times and the rear gate will open auto-
If, while opening or closing using power matically.
rear gate, the rear gate catches persons
or baggage or hits an obstacle, an NOTE
electronic chirp will sound 3 times and When the rear gate is opened using the
the rear gate will operate as follows. reverse function, it will be opened fully
or to the height registered in the
When opening the rear gate: The rear memory function.
gate will automatically close.
When closing the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically open.

Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-39
Moonroof (if equipped) to remain in the vehicle. Failure & Moonroof switch
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
WARNING ing the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, trapment function by deliberately
head or any objects protrude from placing part of your body in the
the moonroof. A person could be moonroof.
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly. CAUTION
. The vehicle turns sharply. . Do not sit on the edge of the open
. The vehicle is involved in an moonroof.
accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if 1) OPEN/CLOSE switch
. Body parts protruding from the falling snow or extremely cold 2) Open
vehicle are struck by outside conditions have caused it to 3) Close
objects. freeze shut.
To open the moonroof:
To avoid serious personal injury . Do not touch the moving parts of Slide the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch rear-
caused by entrapment, always con- the moonroof while the moonroof ward. The sun shade will also be opened
form to the following instructions is operating. together with the moonroof. The moonroof
without exception. . If the moonroof does not close, will stop at a position approximately 8 in
. Before closing the moonroof, we recommend that you have the (20 cm) away from the fully opened
make sure that no one’s hands, system checked by a SUBARU position. Slide the switch rearward again
arms, head or other objects will dealer. to open the moonroof completely.
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof. The moonroof operates only when the To close the moonroof:
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Slide the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch forward.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
ignition switch for safety and way position while opening or closing it,
never allow an unattended child momentarily push the switch to the
“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.
– CONTINUED –

2-40 Keys and doors/Moonroof
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, NOTE

wipe away water on the roof prior to For the sake of safety, it is recom-
opening the moonroof to prevent drops mended that you avoid driving with the
of water from falling into the passenger moonroof fully opened.
compartment.
NOTE & Sun shade
Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc-
curs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 8 in (20 cm) away from
the fully opened position.
& Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap- The sun shade can be slid forward or
ment function may also be activated by a backward by hand while the moonroof is
strong shock on the moonroof even when closed.
there is nothing trapped. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.

Instruments and controls
Ignition switch (models without push- CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

button start system)......................................... 3-3 indicator light .................................................. 3-14
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant
ACC.................................................................... 3-4 temperature high warning light......................... 3-15
ON...................................................................... 3-4 Charge warning light.......................................... 3-16 3
START ................................................................ 3-4 Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-16
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4 Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-16
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-5 Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-16
Push-button ignition switch (models with AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-17
push-button start system) ............................... 3-5 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-17
Safety precautions .............................................. 3-5
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-18
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-5
Brake system warning light................................ 3-19
Switching power ................................................. 3-6
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-20
When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-7
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-7 indicator light .................................................. 3-20
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-7 Door open warning light .................................... 3-20
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-7 All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models) ........ 3-21
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Power steering warning light.............................. 3-21
movement upon turning on the ignition Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
switch............................................................... 3-8 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-22
Speedometer....................................................... 3-8 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-23
Odometer............................................................ 3-8 Warning chimes and warning light of the keyless
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-9 access with push-button start system (if
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-9 equipped) ........................................................ 3-23
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10 Security indicator light....................................... 3-28
ECO gauge (if equipped) .................................... 3-10 SI-DRIVE indicator light (if equipped).................. 3-29
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-11 Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-11 models) ........................................................... 3-29
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-13 Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-30
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF High beam indicator light ................................... 3-30
indicators......................................................... 3-13 Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-30

Instruments and controls
Cruise control set indicator light (if Audio setting (if equipped) ................................. 3-82
equipped)......................................................... 3-30 Sound setting (if equipped) ................................ 3-85
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Hands-free system setting.................................. 3-85
(models with HID headlights) ............................ 3-30 Light control switch........................................... 3-88
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-30 Headlights ......................................................... 3-89
Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-30 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-90
X-mode indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-30 Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-90
Hill descent control indicator light (if Daytime running light system............................. 3-91
equipped)......................................................... 3-30
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-91
Information display (if equipped) ...................... 3-31
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-31 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-92
Driving information display................................. 3-32 Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............... 3-92
Clock ................................................................. 3-35 Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with
HID headlights) ................................................ 3-92
Multi function display (if equipped) .................. 3-36
Basic operation .................................................. 3-37
Fog light switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-93
Welcome screen................................................. 3-37 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-93
Ending screen.................................................... 3-37 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-95
Self-check screen............................................... 3-38 Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-96
Interruption screen ............................................. 3-39 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-97
Basic screens .................................................... 3-40 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-97
Selection screen ................................................ 3-47 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-97
Date and time settings........................................ 3-49 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
Image quality and volume settings...................... 3-56 (if equipped) .................................................... 3-99
Screen settings .................................................. 3-59 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-104
Maintenance settings.......................................... 3-66 Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-106
Driving history registration ................................. 3-70 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-108
Car settings ....................................................... 3-71 Horn .................................................................. 3-108
Initialize ............................................................. 3-80

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system) 3-3
Ignition switch (models with- against your knees or hands while . Using electrical accessories for a
you are driving, it could turn the long time with the ignition switch in the
out push-button start sys- “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tem) tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- battery to go dead.
tion, thereby stopping the engine. . If the ignition switch will not move
WARNING Also, if the key is attached to a from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
keyholder or to a large bunch of position, turn the steering wheel
. Never turn the ignition switch to other keys, centrifugal force may act slightly to the left and right as you turn
“LOCK” while the vehicle is on it as the vehicle moves, resulting the ignition switch.
being driven or towed because in unwanted turning of the ignition
that will lock the steering wheel, switch. & LOCK
preventing steering control. And The key can only be inserted or removed
when the engine is turned off, it in this position. The ignition switch will lock
takes a much greater effort than the steering wheel when you remove the
usual to steer. key.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- If turning the key is difficult, turn the
ways remove the key from the steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ignition switch for safety and as you turn the key.
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
CAUTION NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
Do not attach a large key holder or “LOCK” position when the engine is
key case to either key. If it banged not running.
– CONTINUED –

3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)
the key is released (after the engine has . The key grip is touching another key
started), the key automatically returns to or a metallic key holder.
the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
If your registered key fails to start the

engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
The key can be turned from the “ACC” to
the “START” position and again try to start
“LOCK” position only when the select
the engine.
lever is in the “P” position (CVT models) . The key is near another key that
and the key is pushed in while turning it NOTE contains an immobilizer transponder.
(all models). The engine may not start in the follow- . The key is near or touching another
ing cases: transmitter.
& ACC
In this position the electrical accessories & Key reminder chime
(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can The reminder chime sounds when the
be used. driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after The chime stops under the following
the engine is started. conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
& START “ON” position
. when the key is removed from the
The engine is started in this position. The
ignition switch
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
. when the driver’s door is closed

Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system) 3-5
& Ignition switch light (if Push-button ignition switch . Even when the access key is outside
equipped) the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
(models with push-button the glass, it may be possible to switch
For easy access to the ignition switch in start system) the power or to start the engine.
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- . Do not leave the access key in the
nates when the driver’s door is opened or & Safety precautions following places. It may become im-
when the driver’s door is unlocked using Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-8. possible to operate the push-button
the remote keyless entry transmitter. ignition switch and the engine start.
The light remains illuminated for several & Operating range for push- – On the instrument panel
tens of seconds and then gradually turns button start system – On the floor
off under the following conditions. – Inside the glove box
. when the driver’s door is closed – Inside the door trim pocket
. when the doors are unlocked using the – On the rear seat
remote keyless entry transmitter – At the corner of the cargo area
The light turns off immediately under the . When operating the push-button
following conditions. ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
. when the ignition switch is turned to the perform the procedure described in
“ON” position “Access key – if access key does not
. when all doors and the rear gate are operate properly” F9-17. In such a
locked using the remote keyless entry case, replace the battery immediately.
transmitter Refer to “Replacing access key bat-
tery” F11-45.
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the an-
tennas inside the vehicle, the push-
button ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
– CONTINUED –

3-6 Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)
& Switching power Power

does not operate smoothly, stop
status Indicator color Operation the operation. Contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
OFF Turned off Power is turned
off. . If the push-button ignition switch
The following does not illuminate even when
systems can be the instrument panel illumination
ACC Orange used: is turned on, have the vehicle
audio and ac- inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
cessory power
outlet. . If the vehicle was left in the hot
Orange sun for a long time, the surface of
(while engine is the push-button ignition switch
stopped) All electrical may get hot. Be careful not to
ON systems can be
Turned off used. burn yourself.
(while engine is
1) Operation indicator running)
2) Push-button ignition switch NOTE
CAUTION . The push-button ignition switch can-
The power is switched every time the
not be switched to “OFF” when the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the . When the push-button ignition select lever is in a position other than
switch is left in “ON” or “ACC” “P”.
driver’s seat. . When operating the push-button
for a long time, it may result in
2. Shift the select lever into the “P” vehicle battery discharge. ignition switch, firmly press it all the
position. way.
. Do not spill drinks or other
3. Press the push-button ignition switch . If the push-button ignition switch is
without depressing the brake pedal. Every liquids on the push-button igni-
pressed quickly, the power may not
time the button is pressed, the power is tion switch. It may cause a mal-
turn on or off.
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, function.
. If the indicator light on the push-
“ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When the engine . Do not touch the push-button button ignition switch flashes in green
is stopped and the push-button ignition ignition switch with a hand soiled when the push-button ignition switch is
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation with oil or other contaminants. It pressed, steering is locked. When this
indicator on the push-button ignition may cause a malfunction. occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch illuminates in orange. . If the push-button ignition switch switch while turning the steering wheel

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher 3-7
left and right. Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges

! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion NOTE
When the push-button ignition switch is Liquid-crystal displays are used in
left in the “ACC” or “ON” position for some of the meters and gauges on
approximately 1 hour, the push-button the combination meter. You will find
ignition switch will be automatically their indications hard to see if you wear
switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery polarized glasses.
from going dead. This function is activated
when the select lever is in the “P” position. & Combination meter illumina-
& When access key does not tion
operate properly When the ignition switch is turned to the
Refer to “Access key – if access key does “ON” position, the various parts of the
not operate properly” F9-17. combination meter are illuminated in the
The hazard warning flasher is used to following sequence.
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions. 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
The hazard warning flasher works regard- needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal
less of the position of the ignition switch. display illuminate.
2. Meter and gauge indications each
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, show MAX position.
push the hazard warning button on the 3. Meter and gauge indications each
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, show MIN position.
push the button again. 4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
NOTE gins.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
– CONTINUED –

3-8 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
& Canceling the function for trip knob. & Odometer

meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” *: They cannot be displayed when the
position. To change the setting, perform ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
the following procedure.
To change the current setting, press the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
“OFF” or “ACC” position.
: Activated
: Deactivated 1) Trip knob
NOTE This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
. Your vehicle’s initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles The odometer shows the total distance
has been set for activation “ ” at that the vehicle has been driven.
the time of shipment from the factory. If you press the trip knob when the ignition
. It is not possible to change the initial switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
movement setting of the meter/gauge position, the odometer/trip meter will light
needles when the ignition switch is in up. If you do not press the trip knob within
the “ON” position. Change the setting 10 seconds of illumination of the od-
when the ignition switch is in the ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter
1) Trip knob “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position. will turn off.
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or Also, if you open and close the driver’s
& Speedometer door within 10 seconds of illumination of
“ ” on the trip meter display.
The speedometer shows the vehicle the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
The display can be switched as shown in speed. meter will turn off.
the following sequence by pressing the

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-9
& Double trip meter Also, if you open and close the driver’s reason such as vehicle maintenance or
door within 10 seconds of illumination of fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip the trip meter will be lost.
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in & Tachometer
the following sequence by pressing the The tachometer shows the engine speed
trip knob. in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
mage to the engine.
1) Trip knob *: They cannot be displayed when the
This meter displays the two trip meters ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
position.
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
The trip meter shows the distance that the and keep the knob pressed for more than
vehicle has been driven since you last set 2 seconds.
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition CAUTION
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” To ensure safety, do not attempt to
position, the odometer/trip meter will light change the function of the indicator
up. It is possible to switch between the A during driving, as an accident could
trip meter and B trip meter indications result.
while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If
you do not press the trip knob within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/ NOTE
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn If the connection between the combina-
off. tion meter and battery is broken for any
– CONTINUED –

3-10 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
& Fuel gauge driver’s door, the fuel gauge indication will NOTE
turn off. . The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication of fuel effi-
NOTE ciency.
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel . After resetting the trip meter, the
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler average rate of fuel consumption is not
door (lid) is located on the right side of shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
the vehicle. Before that time, the ECO gauge does
not operate.
& ECO gauge (if equipped)
Fuel gauge
1) Trip knob
The fuel gauge is displayed when the
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it
shows the approximate amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge indication may change slightly
during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel level movement in the tank. The ECO gauge shows the difference
If you press the trip knob while the ignition between the current rate of fuel consump-
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
position, the fuel gauge will light up and tion since the trip meter was last reset.
indicate the amount of fuel remaining in If the needle of the gauge moves towards
the tank. If, while the fuel gauge is the right side, this indicates better fuel
indicating the amount of fuel remaining in efficiency.
the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob
for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights 3-11
Warning and indicator lights : Coolant temperature high warning light : Cruise control indicator light
(if equipped)
: Charge warning light
Several of the warning and indicator lights : Cruise control set indicator light
illuminate when the ignition switch is : Oil pressure warning light (if equipped)
initially turned to the “ON” position. This : Engine low oil level warning light
permits checking the operation of the : Headlight indicator light (if equipped)
bulbs. : Windshield washer fluid warning light : Automatic headlight beam leveler
Apply the parking brake and turn the : AT OIL TEMP warning light warning light (models with HID head-
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For (CVT models) lights)
the system check, the following lights : Low tire pressure warning light : Access key warning light
illuminate and then turn off after several (U.S.- spec. models) (if equipped)
seconds or after the engine has started.
/ : ABS warning light : X-mode indicator light (if equipped)
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off / : Brake system warning light : Hill descent control indicator light (if
only when the driver fastens the equipped)
seatbelt.) : Low fuel warning light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning : Hill start assist warning light/Hill start burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
light assist OFF indicator light corresponding system.
(The seatbelt warning light turns off : Door open warning light Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
only when the front seat passenger for repair.
fastens the seatbelt.) : AWD warning light (CVT models)
& Seatbelt warning light
: SRS airbag system warning light : Power steering warning light and chime
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
ON indicator light light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- warning device at the driver’s and front
tion indicator light passenger’s seat, as required by current
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag safety standards.
OFF indicator light : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- position, this device reminds the driver
function indicator light and front passenger to fasten their seat-
– CONTINUED –

3-12 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
belts by illuminating the warning lights in The warning light(s) for unfastened
the locations indicated in the following seatbelt(s) will alternate between
illustration and sounding a chime. steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
Front passenger’s warning light . It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
! Operation
warning after turning ON the ignition
Driver’s warning light (type A) If the driver and/or front passenger have/ switch. When the ignition switch is
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when turned ON next time, however, the
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” complete sequence of the warning
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will operation resumes. For further details
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the about canceling the warning operation,
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- please contact your SUBARU dealer.
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed. Observe the following precautions. Failure
Driver’s warning light (type B)
– At speeds lower than approxi- to do so may prevent the device from
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) functioning correctly or cause the device

to fail. seat are locked into place securely by . Continuous illumination of the
. Do not install any accessory such as a moving the seat back and forth. warning light
table or TV onto the seatback. . Illumination of the warning light
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
. Do not store a heavy load in the passenger’s seat does not function cor- while driving
seatback pocket. rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to tions described above, immediately con-
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- & Front passenger’s frontal
tion. airbag ON and OFF indica-
pull the seatback.
tors
. Do not use front seats with their back- & SRS airbag system
ward-forward position and seatback not warning light
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them WARNING
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Front seats” F1-2. If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
If the seatbelt warning device for the front be a malfunction in the seatbelt
passenger’s seat does not function cor- pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the system. Immediately take your vehi-
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
deactivated even when the front passen- to have the system checked. Unless
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), checked and properly repaired, the
take the following actions. seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
. Ensure that no article is placed on the airbag will not operate properly in ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
seat other than a child restraint system the event of a collision, which may indicator
and its child occupant, although we / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
increase the risk of injury. indicator
strongly recommend that all children sit . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
in the rear seat properly restrained. ing light The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Ensure that there is no article left in the and OFF indicators show you the status of
seatback pocket. . No illumination of the warning the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
light when the ignition switch is
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- first turned to the “ON” position
The indicators are located next to the
sition and seatback of front passenger’s clock in the center portion of the dash-
– CONTINUED –

board. & CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE

When the ignition switch is turned to the ing light/Malfunction in- This light also illuminates when the fuel
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF dicator light filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
which time the system is checked. Follow- CAUTION the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
ing the system check, both indicators turn light/malfunction indicator light illuminating
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi- could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
indicators illuminates depending on the nates while you are driving, have Remove the cap and retighten it until it
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag tion without having the emission warning light turn off immediately. It may
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag control system checked and re- take several driving trips. If the light does
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF paired as necessary could cause not turn off, take your vehicle to your
indicator will remain off. serious damage, which may not be authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
! If the light is blinking
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while If this light illuminates steadily or blinks If the light is blinking while driving, an
the OFF indicator will illuminate. while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de-
that there is a problem or potential tected which may damage the emission
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
problem somewhere in the emission con- control system.
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
trol system. To prevent serious damage to the emis-
tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check ! If the light illuminates steadily sion control system, you should do the
period, the system is malfunctioning. following.
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- . Reduce vehicle speed.
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
ately for an inspection. an emission control system malfunction . Avoid hard acceleration.
has been detected. . Avoid steep uphill grades.
You should have your vehicle checked by . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ble.
ately. . If towing a trailer, stop doing so as soon
as possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may – Blinking or illuminated in After that, this indicator light/warning light
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after RED: changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
several driving trips. You should have your Safely stop the vehicle as tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
vehicle checked by an authorized soon as possible, and refer turns off when the engine is warmed up
SUBARU dealer immediately. to the emergency steps to sufficiently.
take in the case of engine
& Coolant temperature overheating. After that, have
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases over the specified range, the
low indicator light/Cool- the system checked by your
indicator light/warning light blinks in
ant temperature high nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer
RED. At this time, the engine is close to
warning light to “Engine overheating” F9-
overheating.
12.
CAUTION – Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning
. After turning the ignition switch The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At
to the “ON” position, if this malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating.
indicator light/warning light be- SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
haves in any of the following When the indicator light/warning light
tion. blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
ways, the electrical system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
This coolant temperature low indicator refer to the emergency steps to take in the
SUBARU dealer immediately for light/coolant temperature high warning
an inspection. case of engine overheating. Refer to
light has the following three functions. “Engine overheating” F9-12. After that,
– It remains blinking in RED. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- have the system checked by your nearest
– It remains illuminated in RED cient warming up of the engine SUBARU dealer.
for more than 2 seconds. . Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light
– It remains blinking in RED and often blinks in RED, the electrical system
BLUE alternately. . Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
ing condition of the engine may be malfunctioning. Contact your
. While driving, if this indicator SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
light/warning light behaves in For a system check, this indicator light/
any of the following ways, take warning light illuminates in RED for NOTE
the specified appropriate mea- approximately 2 seconds when the igni- If the engine is restarted after a certain
sure listed below. tion switch is turned to the “ON” position. driving condition, this indicator light/
– CONTINUED –

warning light may illuminate in RED. illuminated, contact your nearest NOTE
However, this is not a malfunction if the SUBARU dealer immediately. . After replacing or adding the engine
indicator light/warning light turns off For details about checking the engine oil oil, if the engine oil level is within the
after a short time. level or adding the engine oil, refer to normal range when restarting the en-
“Engine oil” F11-10. gine on a level surface, the warning
& Charge warning light light will turn off.
CAUTION . The warning light may illuminate
If this light illuminates when the engine is temporarily in the following conditions
running, it may indicate that the charging Do not operate the engine with the because a low oil level may be detected
system is not working properly. oil pressure warning light illumi- as a result of significant oil movement
nated. This may cause serious en- in the engine.
If the light illuminates while driving or does gine damage.
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the – when the vehicle is considerably
engine at the first safe opportunity and inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continu-
check the alternator belt. If the belt is & Engine low oil level ously accelerated and decelerated
loose, broken or if the belt is in good warning light
condition but the light remains illuminated, – when the vehicle is continuously
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer This light illuminates when the engine oil turned
immediately. level decreases to the lower limit. – when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates continuously
& Oil pressure warning If the engine low oil level warning light
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
between uphill and downhill
light in a safe and level location, and then
If this light illuminates when the engine is check the engine oil level. When the & Windshield washer
running, it may indicate that the engine oil engine oil level is not within the normal fluid warning light
pressure is low and the lubricating system range, refill with engine oil. Refer to This light illuminates when the fluid level in
is not working properly. “Engine oil” F11-10. the windshield washer fluid tank de-
If the light illuminates while driving or does If the warning light does not turn off after creases to the lower limit (approximately
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the refilling the engine oil, or the warning light 1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).
engine at the first safe opportunity and illuminates even though the engine oil
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is level is within the normal range, have the
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
at the proper level but the light remains

& AT OIL TEMP warning should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with
light (CVT models) and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating properly.
If this light illuminates when the engine is turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
running, it may indicate that the transmis- pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
sion fluid temperature is too hot. a different size than the size indicated on When the system detects a malfunction,
If the light illuminates while driving, im- the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- the telltale will flash for approximately one
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place sure label, you should determine the minute and then remain continuously
and let the engine idle until the warning proper tire inflation pressure for those illuminated. This sequence will continue
light turns off. tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
! Transmission control system warn- As an added safety feature, your vehicle malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
ing has been equipped with a tire pressure system may not be able to detect or signal
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes a low tire pressure telltale when one or
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
after the engine has started, it may malfunctions may occur for a variety of
more of your tires is significantly under- reasons, including the installation of re-
indicate that the transmission control inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
system is not working properly. Contact placement or alternate tires or wheels on
pressure telltale illuminates, you should the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service stop and check your tires as soon as
immediately. functioning properly. Always check the
possible, and inflate them to the proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
& Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
one or more tires or wheels on your
warning light (U.S.-spec. vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
models) reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, to continue to function properly.
When the ignition switch is turned to the and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate stea-
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- dily after blinking for approximately one
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 Please note that the TPMS is not a minute, have the system inspected by
seconds to check that the tire pressure substitute for proper tire maintenance, your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible.
properly. If there is no problem and all tires maintain correct tire pressure, even if
are properly inflated, the light will turn off. under-inflation has not reached the level
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
– CONTINUED –

WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires.
four road wheels. Contact your
If this light does not illuminate SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting.
steadily after blinking for approxi- If the light illuminates steadily after CAUTION
mately one minute, you should have blinking for approximately one min-
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- . If any of the following conditions
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as occur, we recommend that you
dealer to have the system inspected.
soon as possible. have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
If this light illuminates while driving, your SUBARU dealer.
never brake suddenly and keep CAUTION
driving straight ahead while gradu- – The warning light does not
ally reducing speed. Then slowly The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition
pull off the road to a safe place. is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the “ON”
Otherwise an accident involving checking tire pressure. The tire position.
serious vehicle damage and serious pressure should be checked peri- – The warning light illuminates
personal injury could occur. odically (at least monthly) using a when the ignition switch is
tire gauge. After any change to tire turned to the “ON” position,
If this light still illuminates while pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
driving after adjusting the tire pres- but it does not turn off even
itoring system will not re-check tire when the vehicle speed ex-
sure, a tire may have significant inflation pressures until the vehicle
damage and a fast leak that causes ceeds approximately 25 mph
is first driven more than 25 mph (40 (40 km/h).
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to – The warning light illuminates
as soon as possible. at least 25 mph (40 km/h) to start the during driving.
When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- . When the warning light is on (and
wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures the brake system warning light is
original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low off), the ABS function shuts
being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire down. However, the conventional
sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn brake system continues to oper-
steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be ate normally.
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for

The ABS warning light illuminates to- nate. This is due to the low battery voltage ! Brake fluid level warning
gether with the brake system warning light and does not indicate a malfunction. This light illuminates when the brake fluid
if the EBD system malfunctions. For When the battery becomes fully charged, level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
further details of the EBD system mal- the light will turn off. of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
function warning, refer to “Electronic switch in the “ON” position and with the
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system & Brake system parking brake fully released.
warning” F3-19. warning light
If the brake system warning light should
NOTE WARNING illuminate while driving (with the parking
If the warning light behavior is as brake fully released and with the ignition
described in the following conditions, . Driving with the brake system switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
the ABS system may be considered warning light on is dangerous. indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
normal. This indicates your brake system brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
. The warning light illuminates when may not be working properly. If stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
the ignition switch is turned to the the light remains illuminated, and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
“ON” position and turns off approxi- have the brakes inspected by a level is below the “MIN” mark in the
mately 2 seconds after the engine has SUBARU dealer immediately. reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
started. . If at all in doubt about whether the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
. The warning light illuminates right the brakes are operating prop- dealer for repair.
after the engine is started but turns off erly, do not drive the vehicle. ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
immediately, remaining off. Have your vehicle towed to the (EBD) system warning
. The warning light remains illumi- nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
The brake system warning light also
nated after the engine has been started, pair.
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
reaches approximately 25 mph (40 This light has the following functions.
together with the ABS warning light.
km/h).
! Parking brake warning The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and The light illuminates with the parking the brake system warning light and ABS
remains off. brake applied while the ignition switch is warning light illuminate simultaneously
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the during driving.
When driving with an insufficient battery
parking brake is fully released. Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
voltage such as when the engine is jump
tional braking system will still function.
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
However, the rear wheels will be more
– CONTINUED –

prone to locking when the brakes are ! Vacuum pump system warning & Hill start assist warning
applied harder than usual and the vehi- (turbo models) light/Hill start assist
cle’s motion may therefore become some- This light illuminates when a malfunction OFF indicator light
what harder to control. is detected in the vacuum pump system.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, NOTE ! Hill start assist warning light
take the following steps. The vacuum pump system assists the While the engine is running, if there are
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, boost pressure when driving at high any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
flat place. altitudes while the engine is cold. system, the warning light will illuminate.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it. & Low fuel warning light WARNING
3. Release the parking brake. If both The low fuel warning light illuminates When the Hill start assist warning
warning lights turn off, the EBD system when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi- light illuminates, have the vehicle
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). inspected at an authorized SUBARU
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the It only operates when the ignition switch is dealer.
system inspected. in the “ON” position.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again ! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
and remain illuminated after the engine CAUTION
has been restarted, shut down the engine While the Hill start assist system is
again, apply the parking brake, and check Promptly put fuel in the tank when- deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
the brake fluid level. ever the low fuel warning light indicator light illuminates continuously to
illuminates. Engine misfires as a inform the driver that the Hill start assist
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
result of an empty tank could cause system is not operational.
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
damage to the engine.
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the & Door open warning
system inspected. NOTE light
6. If the brake fluid level is below the This light does not turn off unless the The warning light illuminates if any door or
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. tank is replenished up to an internal the rear gate is not fully closed. This
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US function is effective even if the ignition
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal). switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, or the key is removed from the

ignition switch. & Power steering warn- . The steering wheel is operated fre-
ing light quently and turned sharply while the
Always make sure this light is not illumi- vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
nated before you start to drive. This warning light illuminates when the speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ing the steering wheel during parallel
& All-Wheel Drive warn- position and turns off after the engine parking.
ing light (CVT models) has started. This indicates that the warn- . The steering wheel remains in the
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven ing system is working properly. fully turned position for a long period
with tires of differing diameters fitted on While the engine is running, this warning of time.
the wheels or with an excessively low air light illuminates when a malfunction has At this time, there will be more resis-
pressure in any of the tires. been detected in the electric power steer- tance when steering. However this is
ing system. not a malfunction. Normal steering
CAUTION
force will be restored after the steering
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can damage When the power steering warning the power steering control system has
the powertrain. If the AWD warning light is illuminated, there may be an opportunity to cool down. However,
light starts to flash, promptly park in more resistance when the steering if the power steering is operated in a
a safe place and check whether the wheel is operated. Drive carefully to non-standard way which causes power
tires have differing diameters and the nearest SUBARU dealer and assist limitation to occur too fre-
whether any of the tires has an have the vehicle inspected immedi- quently, that may result in a malfunc-
excessively low inflation pressure. ately. tion of the power steering control
system.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
– CONTINUED –

& Vehicle Dynamics NOTE . The warning light illuminates right

Control warning light/ . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle after the engine is started but turns off
Vehicle Dynamics Con- Dynamics Control system itself mal- immediately, remaining off.
functions, the warning light only illumi- . The warning light illuminates after
trol operation indicator the engine has started and turns off
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
light Brake System) remains fully opera- while the vehicle is subsequently being
tional. driven.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . The warning light illuminates when . The warning light illuminates during
light the electronic control system of the driving, but it turns off immediately and
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system remains off.
CAUTION malfunctions. . The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- illuminate after the engine has been
probably inoperative under any of the
tem provides its ABS control restarted. However, it will turn off once
following conditions. Have your vehicle
through the electrical circuit of the the vehicle starts moving.
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
ately. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to . The warning light does not illuminate tion indicator light
provide ABS control. As a result, the when the ignition switch is turned to the The indicator light flashes during activa-
Vehicle Dynamics Control system “ON” position. tion of the skid suppression function and
also becomes inoperative, causing . The warning light illuminates while the during activation of the traction control
the warning light to illuminate. vehicle is running. function.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS systems are inop-
NOTE NOTE
erative in this case, the ordinary If the warning light behavior is as . The light may remain illuminated for
functions of the brake system are described in the following examples, a short period of time after the engine
still available. You will be safe while the Vehicle Dynamics Control system has been started, especially in cold
driving with this condition, but drive may be considered normal. weather. This does not indicate the
carefully and have your vehicle . The warning light illuminates when existence of a problem. The light
checked at a SUBARU dealer as the ignition switch is turned to the should turn off as soon as the engine
soon as possible. “ON” position and turns off approxi- has warmed up.
mately 2 seconds after the engine has . The indicator light illuminates when
started. the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ & Warning chimes and warning switch is flashing in green when
malfunction indicator light is on. light of the keyless access starting the engine. This indicates
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is with push-button start sys- the status that the steering wheel is
probably malfunctioning under the follow- tem (if equipped) not released and could result in an
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked accident involving serious injury or
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. death.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
CAUTION
started. . When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
& Vehicle Dynamics the push-button ignition switch
Control OFF indicator flashes in green, if the operation
light indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
malfunction. Contact your
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- Access key warning light sible.
trol system.
The keyless access with push-button start . When the operation indicator on
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is system sounds a warning chime and the push-button ignition switch
probably malfunctioning under any of the flashes the access key warning light on flashes in orange, contact a
following conditions. Have your vehicle the combination meter in order to minimize SUBARU dealer immediately.
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- improper operations and help protect your
ately. vehicle from theft.
. The light does not illuminate when the When the warning chime sounds and/or NOTE
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” the warning light flashes, take the appro- . Even when the access key is within
position. priate action. the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
. The light does not turn off even once the access key warning for engine start
several seconds have elapsed after the WARNING may be provided depending on the
ignition switch has been turned to the status of the access key and the
“ON” position. Never drive the vehicle if the indi- environmental conditions.
cator on the push-button ignition . When the access key is taken out of
– CONTINUED –

the vehicle through an open window,

the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
! List of warnings
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing light does not illuminate, take
the appropriate action.

Inside warning Access key

Outside warning warning Operation indica-
chime chime light on tor on push-button Status Action
meter ignition switch
Switch the push-button ignition
The driver’s door was opened while switch to “OFF”, or close the
the push-button ignition switch is driver’s door.
Ding, “ACC” and the select lever is in the *When exiting the vehicle, be sure
ding ... — — — “P” position. to switch the push-button ignition
(intermittent) switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch
was switched to “OFF” while the Close the driver’s door.
driver’s door is open.
Take out the access key from the
Lockout warning: vehicle, and lock the doors.
Ding Short beep — — An attempt was made to lock all *The doors cannot be locked while
(2 seconds) doors while the access key is left the access key is inside the vehicle.
inside the vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all
doors will be unlocked.
Access key lock-in warning: Take out the access key from the
Short beep The door lock sensor was touched vehicle, and lock the doors.
— (2 seconds) — — while the push-button ignition *If the access key is inside the
switch is “OFF” and the access key vehicle, the doors cannot be
is inside the vehicle. locked.
Door ajar warning: Close the doors securely and lock
The door lock sensor is touched them.
— Beep, beep ... — — while the push-button ignition *If one of the doors including the
(5 beeps) switch is in the “OFF” position and rear gate is opened, the doors
one of the doors including the rear cannot be locked.
gate is opened.
Power warning: Return the access key inside the
The door lock sensor was touched vehicle, or switch the push-button
Ding Long beep (60 — — while carrying the access key and ignition switch to “OFF”.
seconds max.) the push-button ignition switch is in *If the push-button ignition switch is
a position other than “OFF” and the not switched to “OFF”, the doors
select lever is in the “P” position. cannot be locked.
– CONTINUED –


Access key warning:

Ding, ding ... — — The vehicle was driven while the Carry the access key, and drive the
(7 seconds) (Flashes 1 sec. access key is not inside the vehi- vehicle.
intermittent) cle.
Access key warning for engine

start: Carry the access key, and press the
Ding — — The push-button ignition switch push-button ignition switch.
(Flashes 1 sec. was pressed while the access key
intermittent) is not inside the vehicle.
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with
Beep, beep, the access key and closed the Switch the push-button ignition
Ding beep (3 beeps) (Flashes 1 sec. — driver’s door while the push-button switch to “OFF”, and get out of the
intermittent) ignition switch is in a position other vehicle.
than “OFF” and the select lever is in
the “P” position.
Passenger access key takeout
warning:
A fellow passenger exited the Return the access key to inside the
Ding Beep, beep, — vehicle with the access key and vehicle, or switch the push-button
beep (3 beeps) (Flashes 1 sec. closed a door other than the ignition switch to “OFF”.
intermittent) driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF”.
The driver exited the vehicle with
the access key and closed the Shift the select lever to the “P”
Long beep Long beep driver’s door while the push-button position, switch the push-button
(continuous) (continuous) (Flashes 1 sec. — ignition switch is in a position other ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
intermittent) than “OFF” and the select lever is in vehicle.
a position other than the “P” posi-
tion.


Select lever position warning:
The driver’s door was opened while Shift the select lever to the “P”
Long beep — — — the push-button ignition switch is in position, switch the push-button
(continuous) a position other than “OFF” and the ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
select lever is in a position other vehicle.
than the “P” position.
Ding — — — The battery of the access key is Replace the battery of the access
low. key.
Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel
Ding — — Flashes in green The engine start procedure was right and left lightly, depress the
(15 seconds max.) performed, but the steering is still brake pedal and press the push-
locked. button ignition switch.
System malfunction warning: Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
Ding — — Flashes in orange A malfunction was detected in the diately and have the vehicle in-
power system or steering lock. spected.
NOTE
An electronic chirp will sound while the select lever is in the “R” position. In this case, the select lever position warning chime
will not sound.
– CONTINUED –

& Security indicator light position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. after the ignition switch is turned
. Immediately after the key is pulled out. from the “ON” position to the
This indicator light shows the status of the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
alarm system. It also indicates operation If the indicator light does not blink in the
of the immobilizer system. above conditions, it may indicate that . Even if the security indicator light
immobilizer system may be malfunction- flashes irregularly or its fuse blows (the
! Alarm system
ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer light does not flash if its fuse is blown),
It blinks to show the driver the operational immediately. the immobilizer system will function
status of the alarm system. For detailed normally.
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2- In the event that an unauthorized key (for
20. example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
! Immobilizer system used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates. For details about the immobilizer
The security indicator light starts blinking system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-2.
in the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
NOTE
push-button start system”: . The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. This is
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
normal and does not indicate a mal-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
function.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following Models with “keyless access with
conditions are met. push-button start system”:
– The push-button ignition switch is in – while the engine is running
the “ON” or “ACC” position. – the push-button ignition switch
– The access key is outside the has been turned to the “ON” or
vehicle. “ACC” position and the driver’s
– The engine is not running. door has not been opened or closed
For models without “keyless access Models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”: with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the – while the engine is running
ignition switch is turned from the “ON” – for approximately 60 seconds

& SI-DRIVE indicator light (if & Select lever/gear position in-
equipped) dicator (CVT models)
Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
1) Sport (S) mode Type A
2) Intelligent (I) mode 1) Upshift indicator This indicator shows the position of the
3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode 2) Downshift indicator select lever.
This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE For models with manual mode, when the
mode. manual mode is selected, the gear posi-
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI- tion indicator (which shows the current
DRIVE” F7-29. gear selection) and the upshift/downshift
indicator light up. Refer to “Continuously
variable transmission” F7-23.
For models with SI-DRIVE, the upshift/
downshift indicators are switched off while
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.
– CONTINUED –

& Turn signal indicator speed and have your vehicle in- & Headlight indicator
lights spected at a SUBARU dealer as light (if equipped)
soon as possible.
These lights show the operation of the turn This indicator light illuminates under the
signal or lane change signal. following conditions.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink & Cruise control set in- . when the light switch is turned to the
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned dicator light (if “ ” or “ ” position
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. equipped) . when the light control switch is in the
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-40. “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
This light illuminates when vehicle speed nate automatically
& High beam indicator has been set to use the cruise control
light function. Refer to “To set cruise control” & X-mode indicator light
F7-49. (if equipped)
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode. & Automatic headlight This light illuminates while the X-mode is
This indicator light also illuminates when beam leveler warning activated. It will turn off when the X-mode
the headlight flasher is operated. light (models with HID is deactivated. Refer to “To activate/
headlights) deactivate the X-mode” F7-40.
& Cruise control indica-
tor light (if equipped) This light illuminates when the automatic & Hill descent control
headlight beam leveler does not operate indicator light (if
This light illuminates when the cruise normally.
control main button is pressed to activate equipped)
If this light illuminates while driving or does
the cruise control function. For details, not turn off approximately 3 seconds after This indicator illuminates while the hill
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-49. turning the ignition switch to the “ON” descent control function is in standby. It
position, have your vehicle inspected at will flash while the hill descent control
CAUTION function is operating. It will turn off when
your SUBARU dealer.
the hill descent control function is not
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ available. Refer to “Hill descent control
malfunction indicator light illumi- & Front fog light indicator
function” F7-41.
nates, the cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
light flashes at the same time. At This indicator light illuminates while the
this time, avoid driving at high front fog lights are illuminated.

Instruments and controls/Information display 3-31
Information display (if & Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi-
equipped) tor cation
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a color
multi function display, refer to “Multi
function display” F3-36.
The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to
the outside temperature in a range from 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
−40 to 1228F (−40 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F
under any of the following conditions. (38C) or lower while the display is giving
1) Outside temperature indicator . When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside
2) Driving information display . During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the
3) Clock speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes
With the ignition switch in the “ACC” is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its
position, the clock appears on the display. down. original indication.
. When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an
With the ignition switch in the “ON” falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
position, the outside temperature indica- when the ignition switch is turned to the
tor, driving information display and clock “ON” position, the indication does not
all appear on the display. flash.
– CONTINUED –

3-32 Instruments and controls/Information display
NOTE the average rate of fuel consumption.

The outside temperature indication When the low fuel warning light illumi-
may differ from the actual outside nates, the driving range display flashes for
temperature. The road surface freeze 5 seconds. (The display first switches to
warning indication should be treated the driving range value if a different value
only as a guide. Be sure to check the was previously displayed.)
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Driving information display
! Driving range on remaining fuel
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,

there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-
ately.
1) Information display selection knob NOTE
With the ignition switch in the “ON” The driving range on remaining fuel is
position, each successive press of the only a guide. The indicated value may
information display selection knob differ from the actual driving range on
switches the display in the following remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
sequence. The driving range indicates the distance ately fill the tank when the low fuel
that can be driven taking into account the warning light illuminates.
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

! Average fuel consumption Pressing the trip knob toggles the display ! Current fuel consumption
between the average fuel consumption
corresponding to the A trip meter display
and the average fuel consumption corre-
sponding to the B trip meter display.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
This display shows the average rate of actual values and should thus be This indication shows the rate of fuel
fuel consumption since the trip meter was treated only as a guide. consumption at the present moment.
last reset. . When either trip meter display is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter dis-
play is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
1) Trip knob
– CONTINUED –

3-34 Instruments and controls/Information display
! Journey time display is giving a reading other than the

journey time, the display switches to the
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and
returns to its original reading each time a
complete hour has elapsed.
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. It is also reset if the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position prior to
restarting of the engine.
1) Trip knob
! Average vehicle speed
The journey time shows the time that has Pressing the trip knob toggles the display
elapsed since the ignition switch was between the average vehicle speed cor-
turned to the “ON” position. responding to the A trip meter display and
the average vehicle speed corresponding
to the B trip meter display.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding average vehicle
speed value is also reset.
NOTE
When either trip meter display is reset,
the average vehicle speed correspond-
ing to that trip meter display is not
This display shows the average vehicle shown until the vehicle has subse-
speed since the trip meter was last reset. quently covered a distance of 1 mile
(or 1 km).
The journey time indication flashes each
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

! X-mode indicator (if information display, the display will 1. Place the ignition switch in the
equipped) automatically turn on when the battery “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
voltage is disconnected and then re- 2. Press and hold the “−” button that is
This indicator will be shown while the X- connected for battery replacement or located near the clock display for approxi-
mode is activated. It will turn off when the fuse replacement. mately 5 seconds. The clock display will
X-mode is deactivated.
then start to flash.
! Turn off display of driving informa-
tion display
& Clock 3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
The driving information display can be mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
turned off. then change.
To turn off the display, turn the ignition 4. The clock display will continue to flash
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and for approximately 3 seconds to inform you
press the “+” button adjacent to the clock that the clock display has been changed.
display for approximately 5 seconds. If you want to change the clock display
Then, the driving information display and again, press and hold the “+” button for
the clock display will blink for 3 seconds to approximately 2 seconds while the clock
notify you that the driving information display is flashing.
display has been turned off.
To restore the driving information display,
once again press the “+” button for
approximately 5 seconds.
To adjust the time shown by the clock,
NOTE press the “+” button or “−” button. If you
. The initial display setting of the press the “+” button, the indicated time will
driving information display has been change in one-minute increments. If you
set to operational at the time of ship- press the “−” button, the indicated time will
ment from the factory. change in one-minute decrements. If you
. The average fuel consumption and keep the button pressed, the rate at which
average vehicle speed are calculated the indicated time changes will speed up.
even while the driving information dis- The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
play is not displayed. clock displays. Perform the following
. Even if you turn off the driving procedure to switch the display format.

3-36 Instruments and controls/Multi function display
Multi function display (if The multi function display has the follow-
ing functions.
equipped)
Description Page
NOTE
Displays useful messages, such
. If your vehicle is equipped with an as warning information, etc. 3-39
information display (monochrome), re-
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel
fer to “Information display” F3-31. consumption screen, etc.) 3-40
. Illustrations show the display for
U.S.-spec. models as an example. For Sets and adjusts maintenance 3-66
notification
models other than U.S.-spec. models,
elements in the illustrations (such as Registers driving history 3-70
the display indication and measure- Sets and customizes car opera- 3-71
ment unit) may be different than the tion
ones for U.S.-spec. models.
Also, the multi function display can also be
used to set and initialize the multi function
WARNING display itself.
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi function display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi-function display is dis-
turbing your awareness and ability
to concentrate on driving, stop the
vehicle in a safe place before per-
forming operations on the screen. Multi function display
Also, do not concentrate on the 1) Outside temperature indicator
display while driving. Doing so may 2) Information reminder
cause you to look away from the 3) Top display (For the display setting, refer
to “Top display setting” F3-59.)
road and could result in an accident. 4) Clock
5) Driving information display (For the dis-
played contents, refer to “Basic screens”

Instruments and controls/Multi function display 3-37
F3-40.) rear gate) is opened while the welcome
screen is displayed, the door ajar
& Basic operation warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Bypass
screen setting” F3-64.
. For a certain period of time after the
welcome screen has once appeared, it
may not appear again even when the
driver’s door is opened again. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
& Ending screen

If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, one of the follow-
ing screens will be displayed as the
Control switch ending screen before the screen turns off.
1) Up (select)
. If “Eco Summary” is set to “Off” in the
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)
“Bypass screen setting”: The “Goodbye”
screen will be displayed.
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control . If “Eco Summary” is set to “On” in the
switch, the screens and selection items “Bypass screen setting”: The “Fuel con-
can be switched. When the “ /SET” sumption results screen” will be displayed.
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set. For details about the bypass screen
setting, refer to “Bypass screen setting”
& Welcome screen NOTE F3-64.
. The welcome screen will disappear
When the door is unlocked and the when the ignition switch is turned to
driver’s door is opened, the welcome the “ON” position while the welcome
screen will appear for a short time. screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors (including the
– CONTINUED –

. “Goodbye” screen . Fuel consumption results screen
1) Windshield washer fluid: Checks the

1) The average fuel consumption for the level of windshield washer fluid.
entire driving distance, from when the 2) Brake fluid: Checks the level of brake
ignition switch was turned to the “ON” fluid.
position to when it was turned to the 3) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. oil replacement.
2) The average fuel consumption for the 4) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
driving interval displayed on the trip replacement.
meter at the point when the ignition 5) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.
switch was turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” 6) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the
position. interval of inspection and maintenance.
When the checks are performed, the color
& Self-check screen of the icon corresponding to the checked
When the ignition switch is turned to the item will turn green.
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will If there is no warning message, the self-
be performed. The screens corresponding check will complete without notification.
to the following items will appear one after
another for several seconds each.

following conditions. & Interruption screen

– The period of time remaining
until the registered notification date
is 15 days or less.
– The total driving distance remain-
ing until the registered notification
distance is approximately 311 miles
(500 km) or less.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed until either of the
following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
Example of notification days or more.
If there is a warning message or a – The total distance driven after the Warning information (display example)
maintenance notification, the color of the registered notification distance is Useful messages, such as reminder in-
icon corresponding to the item will turn approximately 311 miles (500 km) or formation, vehicle information, warning
yellow and the warning message or the more. information, etc. may interrupt the current
maintenance notification will be displayed. screen and appear on the display accom-
Take the appropriate actions based on the panied by a beep. Take proper action
messages indicated. according to the message.
NOTE The warning screen will return to the
. The self-check screen can be set to original screen after a few seconds. If
on or off. For details, refer to “On/Off the warning screen can be displayed
setting” F3-68. again, an information reminder “ ” will
. After performing the maintenance, appear on the upper left part of the
change the setting of the correspond- display. To recall the message marked
ing maintenance item. For details, refer with “ ” on the display, pull the “ /SET”
to “Maintenance settings” F3-66. switch on the steering wheel toward you.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
– CONTINUED –

& Basic screens ! Information bar

These are the basic screens of the multi
function display.
Item Page
Information bar 3-40
Fuel consumption screen 3-41
ECO gauge screen 3-42
ECO history screen 3-42
Vehicle activation status 3-42
screen
EyeSight screen (models with Icy road surface warning screen
the EyeSight system) 3-44
1) Information bar When the outside temperature becomes
Triple meter screen 3-44 2) Outside temperature indicator 378F (38C) or less, the icy road surface
Guidance screen 3-45 3) Information reminder warning screen interrupts to inform the
4) Top display driver that the road surface may be frozen.
Clock/calendar screen 3-45 5) Clock
Audio screen (if equipped) 3-46 NOTE
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
. The outside temperature indicator
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the “ON” position, the outside temperature
shows the temperature around the
steering wheel, you can switch the screen indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
that is always displayed. Also, when the information bar.
dication may differ from the actual
“ /SET” switch is pulled and held, the ! Outside temperature indicator outside air temperature.
selection screen can be displayed. For
This displays the outside temperature . The icy road surface warning screen
details about the selection screen, refer to should be treated only as a guide. Be
between −408F (−408C) and 1228F
“Selection screen” F3-47. sure to check the condition of the road
(508C).
surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
screen is displayed, it will not be
displayed again unless the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” NOTE ! Fuel consumption screen

position after it has been turned to The driving range on the remaining fuel
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. is calculated using the average fuel
consumption of the last 19 miles (30
! Information reminder km) driven. This value may be different
The screen returns to the original screen from the values calculated using the
several seconds after the interruption average fuel consumption correspond-
screen has been displayed. If the inter- ing to the driving distance of each trip
ruption screen can be displayed once meter or the current fuel consumption.
more even after the original screen has
appeared, an information reminder should ! Clock
be displayed. For details about the inter- The clock can be displayed in either 12-
ruption screen, refer to “Interruption hour display or 24-hour display. For details
screen” F3-39. about the setting, refer to “Current date
! Top display and time setting” F3-49. 1) Driving range on remaining fuel
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
One of the following items can be dis- NOTE to the driving distance of each trip meter
played on the top display. If the vehicle battery is disconnected, 3) Current fuel consumption
. Average fuel consumption correspond- the clock shown in the information bar The displayed location can be custo-
ing to the driving distance of each trip will be reset. Set the time again after mized. For details, refer to “Fuel consump-
meter the vehicle battery is connected. For tion screen setting” F3-60.
. Current fuel consumption (This may details about the setting, refer to “Top
not be displayed when driving at a low display setting” F3-59.
speed.)
. Driving range on remaining fuel
For details about the setting of the top
display, refer to “Top display setting” F3-
59.
– CONTINUED –

! ECO gauge screen ! ECO history screen Time range Width of bar graph
30 minutes 1 minute
60 minutes 2 minutes
120 minutes 4 minutes
For details about the setting, refer to

“Economy history setting” F3-61.
! Vehicle activation status screen
1) Average fuel consumption corresponding 1) Average fuel consumption per unit time
to the driving distance of each trip meter (bar graph)
2) ECO gauge 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
The gauge pointer shows the difference (red line)
between the current fuel consumption and
the average fuel consumption that is This screen displays the fuel economy
displayed on the center part of the screen. history for the vehicle using a bar graph.
If the gauge pointer moves toward the The horizontal scale represents the past
green side, this indicates better fuel time range and the vertical scale repre- When the vehicle stops
efficiency. sents the fuel consumption. The green 1) Steering axle
bars show driving with good fuel economy
and the yellow bars show driving with poor
fuel economy.
The time range of the history can be set.
The width of the bar graph is adjusted as
follows depending on the set time range.

When the vehicle is being driven regularly When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- When the X-mode is selected (if equipped)
1) Power train (illuminated in blue) tem has been activated: the tires remain 1) Hill descent control indicator
illuminated in yellow while the Vehicle
Dynamics Control System is activated. This screen displays the following vehicle
1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock information.
Brake System) . steering angle and driving wheel status
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper- . activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
ating indicator (flashing in yellow)
3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control Brake System)
system activation . activation status of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system
. activation status of the X-mode (if
equipped)
While driving, the vehicle wheels are
illuminated in blue and the driving direc-
tion is represented using an animation of
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
the traffic lane.
tem is being activated: the tires illuminate
in yellow. If the ABS is activated, all of the vehicle’s
1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control wheels will be illuminated in yellow and
system activation
– CONTINUED –

the length of operation in seconds and the This screen displays the status of the
Item Details
number of activations will be displayed in EyeSight system.
the bar indicator, located on the lowermost Average vehicle speed (Average
! Triple meter screen vehicle speed for the entire driving
part of the display. time from when the trip meter was
If the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reset)
activated, the activated vehicle wheels will Lifetime fuel consumption
be illuminated in yellow and the operating
indicator “ ” will appear on the upper right Engine oil temperature
part of the display. Also, the length of
operation in seconds and the number of
activations will be displayed in the bar Accelerator opening ratio
indicator.
! EyeSight screen (models with Eye- Journey time (the time that has
elapsed since the ignition switch
Sight system) was turned to the “ON” position)
Journey distance (the distance
Triple meter screen (display example) that has been driven since the
ignition switch was turned to the
This screen displays up to three optional “ON” position)
pieces of information that can be selected Average fuel consumption for the
from the following items. entire driving distance from when
The items shown in the triple meter screen the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position
can be changed. For details, refer to
“Triple meter setting” F3-62. Boost pressure (turbo models
only)
1) Current vehicle speed

2) Set vehicle speed
3) Preceding vehicle
4) Your vehicle

! Guidance screen ! Clock/calendar screen
Calendar
1) Today’s date
When the “ /SET” switch is pulled and Clock (analog format)
2) Birthday/Anniversary
held, the selection screen can be dis-
played. In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-
The displayed contents can be set or side temperature and average fuel con-
customized from the selection screen. For sumption can also be displayed.
details, refer to “Selection screen” F3-47. You can select clock (analog format),
clock (digital format) or calendar. The
clock/calendar can also be set so that it
is not displayed. For details, refer to
“Clock/calendar screen setting” F3-63.
Clock (digital format)
– CONTINUED –

! Audio screen (if equipped) Press the “LIST” button on the audio set to . Podcast date (while playing a podcast)
display the preset frequencies of the
broadcasting stations. Press the “LIST” button on the audio set to
display the titles of playlists etc.
When CD mode is selected:
. Track number When Bluetooth® audio mode is se-
lected:
. Album title (while playing a CD-Text)
. Album title
. Folder title (while playing MP3/WMA/
AAC format CDs) . Artist title
. Artist title . Song title
. Song title When AUX mode is selected:
While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC format “No Device” (only when you select AUX
track, press the “LIST” button on the audio mode while an external device is not
set to display a list of the folder titles for 8 connected)
Example of the audio screen
seconds. When satellite radio mode is selected:
This screen displays the current audio
mode (FM mode, AM mode, etc.) and the When USB mode is selected: . Broadcasting station on-air
following items. . Folder title . Artist title
. Artist title . Song title
When FM mode or AM mode is se-
lected: . Song title Press the “LIST” button on the audio set to
. Broadcasting station on-air Press the “LIST” button on the audio set to display the preset channel.
. Frequency on-air display a list of the folder titles. Hands-free system:
. HD indicator* (type B and E audio) ®
When iPod mode is selected: . Name of the person you are calling
*: When the HD radio is set to ON and gathering . Album title (voice tag)
digital data or when receiving a live broadcast . Artist title (while playing music or an . Phone number of the person you are
such as a ball game, the indicator will illuminate audiobook) calling
in gray. When the HD radio is set to ON and is . Song title (while playing music or a . Length of call
receiving a broadcast from a HD broadcasting podcast)
station, the indicator will illuminate in yellow. . Audiobook title (while playing an audio-
book)

& Selection screen

When the “ /SET” switch is pulled and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by
operating the “ ” or “ ” switch.
Top menu Menu option Description Page

Date Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-49
Birthday Set a birthday. 3-50
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-52
Daylight Saving Time Turn the daylight saving time on or off 3-55
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Display Brightness Adjust the brightness. +5 ↔ −5 3-56
Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔ −5 3-57
Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off 3-57
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-58
Screen Setting Set and customize the top display information Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range or
Top Display contents. Off 3-59
Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display. 3-60
Eco History Set and customize the time of logging fuel 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 3-61
consumption history.
Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. 3-62
Clock Select the clock format. Analog, Digital, Calendar or Off 3-63
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-64
Languages Select the display language. English or French or Spanish 3-65

(U.S.-spec. models only)
– CONTINUED –

Top menu Menu option Description Page

Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-67
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-68
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-68
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-68
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
On/Off activated when the ignition switch is turned to On or Off 3-68
the “ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-69
Driving History Set Register and overwrite the driving record. 3-70
Car Setting Audible Signal Set the audible signal. On or Off 3-71
Hazard Warning Flasher Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off 3-73
Defogger Set and customize the operation of the defogger. 15 minutes or Continuous 3-74
Interior Light Set and customize the interior light off delay 10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 3-75
timer.
Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto Low, Mid, High or Max 3-76
light sensor.
Keyless Access Setting (if Driver’s Door Unlock 3-77

equipped) Set and customize the keyless access function.
Rear Gate Unlock 3-79
Go Back Return to top menu. —
Initialize Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-80
Lifetime Fuel Consumption Reset Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No 3-81
Go Back — Return to the top menu. —

& Date and time settings

The items in the date and time settings
can be set. To change the items, operate
the “ ” or “ ” switch.
NOTE
. The “Date” item must be set to
display the “Birthday”, “Anniversary”
and notifications for vehicle mainte-
nance.
. The “Birthday” and “Anniversary”
items can be entered after the “Date”
item has been set.
. Dates that do not exist in the 3. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Date” item. Then pull the “ /
example, April 31). “Date” item. Then, pull the “ /SET” switch SET” switch toward you.
toward you.
! Preparation for date setting
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” ! Current date and time setting
position. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
2. Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
toward you to show the selection screen. 49.
3. Select the item to set by operating the

“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –

5. After entering the date and time, select

“Set” by operating the “ ” switch and
confirm the setting by pulling the “ /SET”
switch toward you.
4. Select a number by operating the “ ” 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” select the “Birthday” item. Then pull the
switch toward you. When “12 h” is “ /SET” switch toward you.
selected, the clock will be set to a 12-
hour display. When “24 h” is selected, the 6. The system will notify you that the
clock will be set to a 24-hour display. setting is complete.
! Birthday setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
49.

“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.

4. The selected item will be shown. 5. Select numbers by operating the “ ” 7. Select characters by operating the
– Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /
to set the selected item. switch toward you. SET” switch toward you.
– If you want to select the other item, – You can select characters of the
operate the “ ” switch to go back to English alphabet (upper case charac-
step 3. ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
6. After entering the date by repeating

step 5, you can enter the name.
– CONTINUED –

If a birthday is approaching, the following

screen will be displayed accompanied by
a beep when the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position. This function
can be set to on or off. For details, refer to
“Bypass screen setting” F3-64.
8. After entering the name by repeating On a birthday (displayed in red)

step 7, select “Set” by operating the “ ” NOTE
switch and confirm the setting by pulling If “_ _” is selected for either the
the “ /SET” switch toward you. “Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the birthday notification will
From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday be deactivated.
! Anniversary setting
49.
9. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete.

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. The selected item will be shown. 5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”
select the “Anniversary” item. Then pull – Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
the “ /SET” switch toward you. to set the selected item. switch toward you.
– If you want to select another item,
operate the “ ” switch to go back to
step 3.
3. Select the item to set by operating the 6. After entering the date by repeating
“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” step 5, you can enter the name.
switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –

If an anniversary is approaching, the

following screen will be displayed accom-
panied by a beep when the ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set to on or off. For details,
refer to “Bypass screen setting” F3-64.
7. Select characters by operating the 8. After entering the name by repeating

“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ / step 7, select “Set” by operating the “ ”
SET” switch toward you. switch and confirm the setting by pulling
– You can select characters of the the “ /SET” switch toward you.
English alphabet (upper case charac-
ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.


! Daylight saving time setting
49.
On an anniversary (displayed in orange) 3. The current setting will be displayed.

NOTE Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to
If “_ _” is selected for either the enter the selection mode.
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the anniversary notification 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
will be deactivated. select the “Daylight Saving Time” item.
Then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Clearing birthday or anniversary
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-49
and display “Birthday” or “Anniversary” on
the screen.
2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver-
sary.
3. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of numbers,
the setting of “Birthday” or “Anniversary” 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
will be cleared. “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –

& Image quality and volume ! Brightness setting

settings
The image quality and volume settings ing to “Preparation for image quality and
can be adjusted. To change the items, volume settings” F3-56.
operate the “ ” or “ ” switch.
! Preparation for image quality and
volume settings
position.
2. Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch
toward you to show the selection screen.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
the “ /SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Brightness” item. Then pull the
“ /SET” switch toward you.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
“Display” item. Then, pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.

! Screen OFF setting
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-56.
3. Select a brightness level by operating 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

the “ ” or “ ” switch, and confirm the select the “Contrast” item. Then pull the
setting by pulling the “ /SET” switch “ /SET” switch toward you.
toward you.
! Contrast setting select the “Screen OFF” item. Then pull
1. Perform the preparation steps accord- the “ /SET” switch toward you.
3. Select a contrast level by operating the

“ ” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting
by pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –

pulled toward you after the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position, the screen
will be restored. The screen will be
restored with the basic screen that was
displayed when the screen was turned off.
While the screen is off, a warning mes-
sage will be displayed if necessary, but
other screens will not be displayed.
! Beep volume setting
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
toward you.

select the “Beep” item. Then pull the “ /
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or
SET” switch toward you.
4. The screen is turned off. “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch
toward you.
Restoring the screen
When the “ ”, “ ” or “ /SET” switch is

& Screen settings F3-59.
The items in screen settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “ ” or
“ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.
! Preparation for screen settings
position.

switch, and confirm the setting by pulling 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
the “ /SET” switch toward you. select the “Top Display” item. Then pull the

“Screen Setting” item. Then, pull the “ /
6. The system will notify you that the ! Top display setting
setting is complete. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord- 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
– CONTINUED –

4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
“ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch setting is complete. select the “Cons” item. Then pull the “ /
toward you. SET” switch toward you.
! Fuel consumption screen setting
F3-59.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.

4. Select the displayed configuration by 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
operating the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull setting is complete. select the “Eco History” item. Then pull the
the “ /SET” switch toward you. “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Economy history setting
F3-59.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.
– CONTINUED –

! Triple meter setting

F3-59.
4. Select the time of the logged fuel 6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
consumption history by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pulling
“ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ / the “ /SET” switch toward you.
select the “Triple Meter” item. Then pull

5. Select “Go Back” by operating the “ ” setting is complete.
switch.


3. Select the setting location (left, center 4. Select the preferred item by operating
or right) by operating the “ ” or “ ” the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /
switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch SET” switch toward you. 6. The system will notify you that the
toward you. If you also want to change the setting for setting is complete.
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE ! Clock/calendar screen setting
The same item cannot be selected for
the left, center or right location. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
F3-59.

– CONTINUED –

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “Analog Clock”, “Digital Clock”,

select the “Clock” item. Then pull the “ / “Calendar” or “Off” by operating the “ ” 6. The system will notify you that the
SET” switch toward you. switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch setting is complete.
toward you.
! Bypass screen setting
F3-59.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more.


“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by

pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the

select the “Bypass Screen” item. Then pull “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. 6. The system will notify you that the
If you want to change setting for another setting is complete.
item, repeat steps 3 and 4.
! Language setting
F3-59.

“ ” or “ ” switches. Then pull the “ /
SET” switch toward you. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or
– CONTINUED –

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the preferred language by 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Languages” item. Then pull the operating the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then setting is complete.
“ /SET” switch toward you. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
& Maintenance settings
The items in the maintenance settings can
be set. To change the items, operate the
“ ” or “ ” switch toward you.
! Preparation for maintenance set-
tings
position.
3. The current language setting will be 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

displayed. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward switch and confirm the setting by pulling
you to enter the language selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.

toward you.
3. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Engine Oil” item. Then pull the 4. Select a number by operating the “ ”
“Maintenance” item. Then, pull the “ / “ /SET” switch toward you. or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET”
SET” switch toward you. switch toward you.
If you also want to change the setting for
! Engine oil setting another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-66.
3. Select the setting location (month, day,

year or distance) by operating the “ ” or
“ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” switch
– CONTINUED –

5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or reaches 0 km, the display will show
“ ” switch and confirm the setting by “0000” for the next 311 miles (500 km).
pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you. After exceeding 311 miles (500 km), “_
_ _ _” will be displayed.
! Oil filter setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-67, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 2.
! Tires setting
“Engine oil setting” F3-67, but select the
“Tires” item in step 2.
! Maintenance schedule setting select the “On/Off” item. Then pull the “ /
The setting procedure is the same as SET” switch toward you.
6. The system will notify you that the “Engine oil setting” F3-67, but select the
setting is complete. “Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
! On/Off setting
NOTE 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
. The notification will be displayed ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
with information of both date and tings” F3-66.
distance or either date or distance in
accordance with the setting
. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”
item instead of numbers, the set noti-
fication will be deactivated.
. If the notification continues for 15
days or more, the system will display 3. The current setting will be displayed.
“_ _” on the screen. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to
. When the distance announcement enter the selection mode.

4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
“ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete. select the “Clear All Settings” item. Then
switch toward you. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Clear setting
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-66.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” 3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

switch, and confirm the setting by pulling dialogue (“No” is selected first). To clear
the “ /SET” switch toward you. all maintenance settings, select “Yes” by
– CONTINUED –

operating the “ ” switch. & Driving history registration

The items in the driving history can be
registered. To change the items, operate
the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the
position.
4. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you

4. Confirm the setting by pulling the “ / once more to enter the setting mode.

“Driving History” item. Then, pull the “ /
5. The system will notify you of the place

5. The system will notify you that the to be selected for approximately 2 sec-
setting is complete. onds.

registered directly without a notification. ! Preparation for car settings

position.
6. Select one of the registration lines by

operating the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull 8. The system will notify you that the
the “ /SET” switch toward you. registration is complete.
NOTE
The driving history can be registered 3. After the selection screen is displayed,
for the trip meter A or B. operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
“Car Setting” item. Then, pull the “ /SET”
& Car settings switch toward you.
The items in the car settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “ ” or ! Audible signal setting
“ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET” 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
switch toward you. ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-71.
NOTE
When the vehicle is in motion, the
7. To overwrite the previous registration, selectable items will be limited.
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. When
registration is performed the first time, it is
– CONTINUED –

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Audible Signal” item. Then pull “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete.
the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
3. The current setting will be displayed. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
enter the selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.

! Hazard warning flasher setting 3. The current setting will be displayed. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
1. Perform the preparation steps accord- Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-71. enter the selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item. “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete.
Then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. If the setting is not available, the following
– CONTINUED –

“ /SET” switch toward you. “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Defogger setting
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-71.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Defogger” item. Then pull the
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the setting is complete.

If the setting is not available, the following

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the preferred setting by operat-

select the “Interior Light” item. Then pull ing the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the
the “ /SET” switch toward you. “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Interior light off delay timer setting
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-71.

– CONTINUED –

! Auto light sensor sensitivity setting 3. The current setting will be displayed.
1. Perform the preparation steps accord- Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you to
ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-71. enter the selection mode.

If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
perform the setting procedure again. select the “Auto Light Sensor” item. Then ing the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. “ /SET” switch toward you.


! Keyless access setting (models 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

with “keyless access with push- select the “Keyless Access Setting” item.
button start system”) Then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
setting is complete. ! Preparation for keyless access ! Driver’s door unlock setting
If the setting is not available, the following settings
notification will be displayed. In this case, 1. Perform the preparation steps according to “Preparation for keyless access
perform the setting procedure again. ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-71. settings” F3-77.
– CONTINUED –

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Driver’s Door Unlock” item. ing the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the setting is complete.
Then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. “ /SET” switch toward you. If the setting is not available, the following


! Rear gate unlock setting

ing to “Preparation for keyless access
settings” F3-77.


select the “Rear Gate Unlock” item. Then
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch. Then pull the setting is complete.
“ /SET” switch toward you. If the setting is not available, the following
– CONTINUED –


3. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Reset to Defaults” item. Then
“Initialize” item. Then, pull the “ /SET” pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
& Initialize switch toward you.
Items that have been set to your pre-
ference can be initialized. To select an ! Reset to factory default settings
initialization menu, operate the “ ” or “ ” 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
switch as follows. ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
! Preparation for initialization 80.
position.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

dialogue (“No” is selected first). To return
to the factory default settings, select “Yes”

by operating the “ ” switch. ! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting

ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
80.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No

4. Confirm the setting by pulling the “ / dialogue (“No” is selected first). To reset
SET” switch toward you. the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes”
by operating the “ ” switch.
select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption
Resetting” item. Then pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.

setting is complete. 4. Confirm the setting by pulling the “ /
– CONTINUED –

You can set the audio by operating the

multi function display.
1. Display the audio screen. For details,
refer to “Basic screens” F3-40.
2. Press the “MENU” button on the audio
set to display the audio setting screen.
The menus are shown in the following
table.
First menu Second menu Page

Pair Audio 3-83
BT Audio Select Audio 3-83

5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If 7. The system will notify you that the Setup Set Passkey 3-84
you are sure you want to proceed, select setting is complete.
“Yes” by operating the “ ” switch. Delete Audio 3-84
& Audio setting (if equipped) Speed — 3-84
Volume
HD Radio* — 3-84
“MENU” button Beep — 3-84
Go Back — —
*: If equipped
Control dial (type A, To select the next menu in the same
B, C and D audio)
layer (first or second menu): Press the
“MENU” button.
To enter the second menu: Press the
Control dial (type E
audio) control dial while the “BT Audio Setup”
6. Confirm the setting again by pulling menu is selected.

To enter the setting mode of the ! Registering (pairing) audio de- ! Selecting audio device
selected menu: Press the control dial vice
while the menu other than “BT Audio
Setup” is selected.
To complete the audio setting: Select
the “Go Back” menu and press the control
dial. Then the audio screen will be
displayed. For details about audio screen,
refer to “Audio screen” F3-46.
! Bluetooth® audio setting
1. Select the “Select Audio” menu.

1. Select the “Pair Audio” menu. 2. Perform the procedure described in
2. Perform the procedure described in “Selecting device” F5-38.
“Registering (pairing) device” F5-37.
Select the “BT Audio Setup” menu. Then

you can set the following items.
– CONTINUED –

! Setting passkey ! Deleting audio device ! Speed volume setting
1. Select the “Set Passkey” menu. 1. Select the “Delete Audio” menu. 1. Select the “Speed Volume” menu.
2. Perform the procedure described in 2. Perform the procedure described in 2. Operate the control dial to select the
“Setting passkey” F5-38. “Deleting device” F5-38. preferred setting.
! HD radio setting (if equipped)

“Speed volume setting” F3-84, but select
the “HD Radio” item in step 1.
! Beep setting
“Speed volume setting” F3-84, but select
the “Beep” item in step 1.

& Sound setting (if equipped) Item Range of levels

& Hands-free system setting
Bass −8 to +8
Middle −8 to +8
Treble −8 to +8
Fader R9 to F9
Balance L9 to R9
Virtual Bass* Off to On
Sound Restorer* Off to On
Vocal Image Control* L9 to R9
*: If equipped
Example of the sound setting screen To select the next item: Press the control 1) OFF hook switch
dial.
To set the selected item: Turn the control 1. Display the audio screen. For details,
Control dial (type A, dial. refer to “Basic screens” F3-40.
B, C and D audio) 2. Press the OFF hook switch to display
For details, refer to “Tone and balance the “BT-TEL” menu.
control” F5-10.
3. Select the preferred menu.
Control dial (type E The menus are categorized. The following
audio)
menus come under category 1.
. Phone Book
1. Display the audio screen. For details, . Redial
refer to “Basic screens” F3-40. . Call Back
2. Press the control dial on the audio set . Setup
to display the sound setting screen. You
can set the following items by operating If you press the OFF hook switch while a
the multi function display. category 1 menu is displayed, you can
select the “Top Redial” menu.
– CONTINUED –

! Phonebook setting . “Go Back” menu to go back to the “BT- ! Redial setting
TEL” menu.
! Using list names function

Select the “List Names” menu to show the
list of the names (voice tags) registered in
the phonebook. For details, refer to “List
names function” F5-55.
! Changing name
Select the “Change Name” menu to
change the name (voice tag) registered
in the phonebook.
! Setting speed dial
Select the “Phone Book” menu. Then you Select the “Redial” menu. Then the
Select the “Set Speed Dial” menu to
can add, use, set or delete phonebook number stored in the outgoing call history
register a speed dial.
data as follows. memory will be displayed.
! Deleting phonebook entry . Select the “Dial” menu to dial the phone
! Adding phonebook entry
Select the “Delete Entry” menu to delete number.
Select the “Add Entry” menu. Then you . Select the “Store” menu to add the
phonebook data.
can select the following menus to add a phone number to the phonebook.
phone number to the phonebook. ! Deleting speed dial
. Select the “Delete” menu to delete the
. “By Voice” menu to add by saying a Select the “Delete Speed Dial” menu to phone number from the outgoing call
number. delete a registered speed dial. history.
. “By Phone” menu to add by using a cell . Select the “Go Back” menu to go back
phone. to the “BT-TEL” menu.
. “Manual Input” menu to add by input-
ting manually.
. “Call History” menu to add from the call
history. After selecting the “Call History”
menu, select the “Incoming” or “Outgoing”
menu.

! Callback setting ! Setup select the following menus.

. “Set PIN” menu to set a PIN code.
. “Phone Book Lock” menu to lock the
phonebook.
. “Phone Book Unlock” menu to unlock
the phonebook.
. “Go Back” menu to go back to the “BT-
TEL” menu.
! Phone setting
Select the “Call Back” menu. Then the Select the “Setup” menu. Then you can
number stored in the incoming call history set the following items.
memory will be displayed.
! Security setting
. Select the “Dial” menu to dial the
number.
. Select the “Store” menu to add the
phone number to the phonebook.
. Select the “Delete” menu to delete the
phone number from the incoming call
history. Select the “Phone Setup” menu. Then you
. Select the “Go Back” menu to go back can select the following menus.
to the “BT-TEL” menu. . “Pair Phone” to register a new cell
phone.
. “Select Phone” to select a cell phone to
be used.
. “Change Name” to change the regis-
Select the “Security” menu. Then you can tered name of the cell phone.
– CONTINUED –

3-88 Instruments and controls/Light control switch
. “List Phones” to show the list of the ! System setting Light control switch
registered cell phones. For details, refer to
“List phones function” F5-57.
. “Set Passkey” to change the pass key. CAUTION
. “Delete” to delete a registered cell
. Use of any lights for a long period
phone.
of time while the engine is not
. “Go Back” menu to go back to the “BT- running can cause the battery to
TEL” menu. discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the lights are turned off.
If the vehicle is left unattended
for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be
Select the “System Setup” menu. Then discharged.
you can select the following menus.
Models with “keyless access with
. “Guidance Volume” to set the volume
of the voice guidance.
The light control switch operates when the
. “Initialize” to initialize the settings.
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
. “Select Language” to select the lan- or “ON” position.
guage (using the Hands-free system).
Regardless of the position of the light
. “Go Back” menu to go back to the “BT- control switch, the illuminated lights are
TEL” menu. turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are

Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-89
turned off when the key is removed from & Headlights “ ” position: auto on/off headlights (if
the ignition switch. equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
NOTE position, the instrument panel illumination,
The light control switch can be oper- headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ated (except auto on/off headlights), ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
even under the following conditions. and license plate lights are automatically
. when the key is not inserted into the on or off depending on the level of the
ignition switch (models without “key- ambient light.
less access with push-button start
system”) “ ” position
. when the push-button ignition The headlights are all off.
switch is turned off (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
NOTE
system”) The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on lights can be changed by a SUBARU
If the driver’s door is opened while the the end of the turn signal lever. dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
headlights are illuminated under such “ ” position for details. Also, for models with a multi
conditions, the chirp sound will inform function display, the setting can be
the driver that the lights are illumi- Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear changed using the display. For details,
nated.
side marker lights, tail lights and license refer to “Auto light sensor sensitivity
plate lights are on. setting” F3-76.
“ ” position
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
– CONTINUED –

3-90 Instruments and controls/Light control switch
! Sensor for the auto on/off head- & High/low beam change & Headlight flasher
lights (if equipped) (dimmer)
The sensor is on the instrument panel as To change from low beam to high beam, CAUTION
shown in the illustration. push the turn signal lever forward. When
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
the headlights are on high beam, the high
CAUTION position for more than just a few
beam indicator light “ ” on the combina-
seconds.
tion meter is also on.
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect To switch back to low beam, pull the lever To flash the headlights, pull the lever
the level of the ambient light cor- back to the center position. toward you and then release it. The high
rectly and the auto on/off headlights beam will stay on for as long as you hold
may not operate properly. the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
“ ” (off) position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates.

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever 3-91
& Daytime running light system level, the high beam headlights that Turn signal lever
have illuminated at reduced brightness
WARNING turn off, and the low beam headlights
turn on alternatively. At this time, the
The brightness of the illumination of instrument panel illumination, front
the high beam headlights is reduced side marker lights, tail lights and
by the daytime running light system. license plate lights are also illuminated.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the following conditions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released. To activate the right turn signal, push the
. The light control switch is in the turn signal lever up. To activate the left
“AUTO” (if equipped), “ ” or off position. turn signal, push the turn signal lever
. For CVT models, the select lever is in a down. When the turn is finished, the lever
position other than the “P” position. will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
NOTE to the neutral position by hand.
. When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina- To signal a lane change, push the turn
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
and license plate lights are also illumi- during the lane change. The turn signal
nated. indicator lights will flash in the direction of
. For models with the auto on/off the turn or lane change. The lever will
headlights, while the light control return automatically to the neutral position
switch is in the “AUTO” position and when you release it.
the system is activated to the auto-on
mode depending on the ambient light

3-92 Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
Illumination brightness con- To darken, turn the control dial downward. Headlight beam leveler (if
trol NOTE equipped)
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
& Automatic headlight beam
becomes the maximum and the auto- leveler (models with HID
matic dimming function does not work headlights)
at all. The HID headlights generate more light
. The brightness setting is not can- than conventional halogen headlights.
celed even when the ignition switch is Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. may experience too much glare if your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
The illumination brightness of the instru-
ment panel dims under the following
conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position
. when the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
nate automatically (models with auto on/
off headlights: Refer to “Headlights” F3-
89.)
You can also adjust the illumination bright-
ness for better visibility in the following
ways.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

Instruments and controls/Fog light switch 3-93
Fog light switch (if equipped) Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
The indicator light on the combination
meter will illuminate when the front fog CAUTION
1) Headlight switch lights are illuminated.
2) Fog light switch . Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
The front fog lights will turn on when the onds, or when the washer fluid
fog light switch is placed in the “ ” tank is empty. This may cause
position while the headlights are in the overheating of the washer motor.
following condition. Check the washer fluid level
. while the headlight switch is in the “ ” frequently, such as at fuel stops.
position . Do not operate the wipers when
. for models with the auto on/off head- the windshield or rear window is
lights, while the headlight switch is in the dry. This may scratch the glass,
“AUTO” position and the headlights turn damage the wiper blades and
on automatically cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the on a dry windshield or rear
switch back down to the “ ” position. window, always use the wind-
shield washer.
– CONTINUED –

3-94 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
. In freezing weather, be sure that Refer to “Windshield washer over the windshield or rear window.
the wiper blades are not frozen to fluid” F11-32. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
the windshield or rear window Also, when driving the vehicle rial on the windshield or the wiper
before switching on the wipers. when there are freezing tempera- blade results in jerky wiper operation
Attempting to operate the wiper tures, use non-freezing type wi- and streaking on the glass. If you
with the blades frozen to the per blades. cannot remove those streaks after
window glass could cause not operating the washer or if the wiper
only the wiper blades to be . Do not clean the wiper blades operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
damaged but also the wiper mo- with gasoline or a solvent, such face of the windshield or rear window
tor to burn out. If the wiper as paint thinner or benzine. This and the wiper blades using a sponge or
blades are frozen to the window will cause deterioration of the soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
glass, be sure to operate the wiper blades. mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
defroster, windshield wiper dei- rinse the window glass and wiper
cer (if equipped) or rear window NOTE blades with clean water. The glass is
defogger before turning on the clean if no beads form on the glass
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- when you rinse with water.
wiper.
tected against overloads by a circuit . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
. If the wipers stop during opera- breaker. If the motor operates continu-
tion because of ice or some other even after following this procedure,
ously under an unusually heavy load, replace the wiper blades with new
obstruction on the window, the the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
wiper motor could burn out even ones. For replacement instructions,
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
if the wiper switch is turned off. If your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
this occurs, promptly stop the F11-33.
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
vehicle in a safe place, turn the mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ will reset itself, and the wipers will
“OFF” position and clean the again operate normally.
window glass to allow proper . Clean your wiper blades and win-
wiper operation. dow glass periodically with a washer
. Use clean water if windshield solution to prevent streaking, and to
washer fluid is unavailable. In remove accumulations of road salt or
areas where water freezes in road film. Operate the windshield
winter, use SUBARU Windshield washer for at least 1 second so that
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. washer solution will be sprinkled all

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-95
& Windshield wiper and washer For a single wipe of the wipers, push the ! Windshield washer
switches lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. ! Wiper intermittent time control
! Windshield wipers
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” wipers operate while you pull the lever.
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
: Mist (for a single wipe)
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
: Off from the shortest interval to the longest.
: Intermittent
: Low speed
: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “ ” position.
– CONTINUED –

3-96 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
NOTE & Rear window wiper and tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-
washer switch tently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed. In this position, when you
move the select lever to the “R” position
(CVT models) or the shift lever to the
reverse position (MT models), the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the “R” (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
NOTE
. Even if the rear wiper switch is in the
“ ” position, while the shift lever/
select lever is in the “R” position with
The windshield washer fluid warning the windshield wiper operating con-
light illuminates when the washer fluid : Washer (accompanied by wiper op- tinuously, the rear wiper will operate
level in the tank has dropped to the eration)
intermittently.
lower limit. If the warning light illumi- : Continuous . If a cargo carrier or other object that
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the : Intermittent disturbs rear wiper operation is at-
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind- tached, the rear wipers may be da-
: Off
shield washer fluid” F11-32. maged when they operate. In cases like
Washer (accompanied by wiper op- this, set the reverse gear interlocked
: eration)
rear wiper to “non-operational”. For
more details, we recommend that you
! Rear wiper
contact a SUBARU dealer.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward. ! Washer
To turn the wiper off, return the knob To wash the rear window while the rear
switch to the “ ” position. wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “ ” position. The washer
With the switch turned to the “ ” posi- fluid sprays until you release the knob.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-97
To wash the rear window when the rear Mirrors & Auto-dimming mirror/com-
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch pass (if equipped)
downward to the “ ” position. The washer
Always check that the inside and outside
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
you release the knob.
start driving.
& Inside mirror
1) LED
2) Switch
3) Sensor
4) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
The inside mirror has a day and night feature which automatically reduces glare
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the coming from headlights of vehicles behind
mirror toward you for the night position. you. It also contains a built-in compass.
Push it away for the day position. The . By pressing and holding the switch for
night position reduces glare from head- 3 seconds, the automatic dimming func-
lights. tion is toggled on or off. When the
automatic dimming function is on, the
LED indicator will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
– CONTINUED –

3-98 Instruments and controls/Mirrors
is to ensure good rearward visibility during glare from vehicle headlights behind you 3. Press the switch repeatedly until the
reversing. and automatically dim the mirror to elim- correct zone setting for your location is
. By pressing and releasing the switch inate glare and preserve your vision. For displayed.
for less than 3 seconds, the compass this reason, use care not to cover the 4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
display is toggled on or off. When the sensors with stickers, or other similar will exit the zone setting mode.
compass is on, an illuminated compass items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
reading will appear in the upper right using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an ! Compass calibration
corner of the mirror. applicator.
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
! Compass zone adjustment window, the compass needs to be cali-
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with brated.
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner 2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
directly on the mirror as that may cause km/h) or less until the display reads a
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror direction.
housing and damage the mirror. 3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
! Photosensors
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C”
appears in the compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
Compass calibration zones step 2 or step 3.
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the switch for 6
seconds until the zone selection comes
The mirror has a photosensor attached on up (a number will be displayed in the
the front and back sides. During nighttime mirror compass window).
driving, these sensors detect distracting

& Auto-dimming mirror/com- dimming function is on, the LED indicator ! Photosensors
pass with HomeLink® (if will illuminate.
equipped) Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner The mirror has a photosensor attached on
directly on the mirror as that may cause both the front and back sides. During
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror nighttime driving, these sensors detect
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2 housing and damage the mirror. distracting glare from vehicle headlights
3) LED behind you and automatically dim the
4) HomeLink® button 3 mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
5) Sensor your vision. For this reason, use care not
6) Automatic dimming on/off button to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
7) Compass display button similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
8) Compass display sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare cloth or an applicator.
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink® wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
– CONTINUED –

! Compass zone adjustment ! Compass calibration www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali- Note the following information about this
brated. system.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8 If your vehicle is equipped with the
km/h) or less until the display reads a HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it
direction. complies with Part 15 of the Federal
3. You can also calibrate the compass by Communications Commission Rules in
driving your vehicle on your everyday the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
routine. The compass will be calibrated Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
once it has tracked a complete circle. to the following two conditions:
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and (1) this device may not cause harmful
hold the compass display button for 9 interference, and (2) this device must
Compass calibration zones seconds until a “C” appears in the accept any interference received, includ-
compass window. ing interference that may cause undesired
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration 5. Calibrate the compass according to operation.
zones” map shown above to verify that step 2 or step 3.
the compass zone setting is correct for Changes and modifications to this system
your geographical location. by anyone other than an authorized
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- service facility could void authorization to
2. Press and hold the compass display tem
button for 3 seconds until the zone use this equipment.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
selection comes up (a number will be HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
can be used to activate remote control
displayed in the mirror compass window). registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
devices such as gate operators, garage
3. Press the compass display button door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc.
repeatedly until the correct zone setting and security systems.
for your location is displayed. WARNING
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will There are three HomeLink® buttons on the
exit the zone setting mode. mirror, each of which can be programmed . When programming the
for operation of one desired device. For HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
details on the device types which can be tem, you may be operating a
operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of NOTE

the garage door or other device . After programming your HomeLink®
to prevent potential harm or Wireless Control System for the de-
damage. sired devices, retain the hand-held
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- transmitters for further programming
less Control System with a gar- or device testing in the event of a
age door opener that lacks the problem.
safety stop and reverse feature . It is recommended that you insert a
as required by applicable safety new battery in the hand-held transmit-
standards. A garage door opener ter of a device to ensure correct
which cannot detect an object, programming.
signaling the door to stop and
! Garage door opener program-
reverse, does not meet these
ming in the U.S.A. 1) HomeLink® button 1
safety standards. Using a garage
2) HomeLink® button 2
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious NOTE 3) HomeLink® button 3
injury or death. For more infor- When programming the HomeLink ® 2. Press and hold the two outer
mation, consult the HomeLink® Wireless Control System for a garage HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
website at www.homelink.com or door opener, it is suggested that you 3) until the indicator light begins to flash
call 1-800-355-3515. park the vehicle outside the garage. (after approximately 20 seconds). Then
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door release both buttons.
opener from the outlet. 3. Hold the end of the garage door
CAUTION opener’s hand-held transmitter between
NOTE 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
When programming the HomeLink®
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
Wireless Control System to operate
already programmed for other devices, gram.
a garage door opener or an entrance
skip step 2 because it clears the 4. Simultaneously press and hold both
gate, unplug the device’s motor
memory of all three buttons. the hand-held transmitter button and the
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout. desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
– CONTINUED –

NOTE ! Programming rolling-code-pro- refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

Some gate operators and garage door tected garage door openers in tion manual.
openers may require you to replace the U.S.A.
this programming step 4 with proce- If your garage door opener has a rolling
dures in “Programming for entrance code feature, program the HomeLink®
gates and garage door openers in Wireless Control System for it by following
Canada” F3-103. steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
5. Hold down both buttons until the programming in the U.S.A.” F3-101. Then
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first continue with the following steps.
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be NOTE
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi- The assistance of a second person
cates successful programming of the new may make the programming quicker
frequency signal.) and easier.
6. Press and hold the programmed but- 1) Training button
ton and check the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con- 2. Press the training button on the
tinuously, your garage door should acti- garage door opener motor head unit
vate and the programming is completed. (which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
seconds and then stays on continuously,
2 seconds and release the HomeLink®
your garage door opener may be pro-
button that was programmed in the pre-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
vious section. Press and release the
case you need to perform the additional
button a second time to complete the
steps that are described in “Programming
programming procedure.
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A.” F3-102.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,

NOTE 6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
Some garage door openers may re- and then rapidly after several seconds,
quire you to do the above press-hold- release both buttons.
release sequence a third time to com- 7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
plete the programming. garage door opener to the outlet.
4. The garage door opener should now 8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control opener by pressing the programmed
System and your garage door opener HomeLink® button.
should activate when the HomeLink ®
button is pressed. ! Operating the HomeLink® Wire-
less Control System
! Programming for entrance gates Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-
and garage door openers in 1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to
Canada 2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
device, simply press the appropriate but-
or garage door opener from the outlet. 2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
NOTE HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted.
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
begins to flash (after approximately 20 ! Programming other devices
already programmed for other devices, To program other devices such as door
seconds). Then release both buttons.
skip step 2 because it clears the locks, home lighting and security systems,
memory of all three buttons. 3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515.
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single
wish to program. HomeLink® button
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
– CONTINUED –

begins to flash slowly (after approximately & Outside mirrors

20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches ! Convex mirror (passenger side)
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program. WARNING
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
Objects look smaller in a convex
mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
mirror and farther away than when
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
4. When the indicator light begins to flash the convex mirror to judge the
rapidly, release both buttons. distance of vehicles behind you
The programming for the previous device when changing lanes. Use the inside
is now erased and the new device can be mirror (or glance backwards) to
operated by pressing the HomeLink ® 1) HomeLink® button 1 determine the actual size and dis-
button. 2) HomeLink® button 2 tance of objects that you view in
3) HomeLink® button 3 convex mirror.
! Erasing HomeLink® button mem-
ory 1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
NOTE light begins to flash (after approximately
. Performing this procedure erases 20 seconds).
the memory of all the preprogrammed 2. Release both buttons.
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased. ! In case a problem occurs
. It is recommended that upon the If you cannot activate a device using the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all corresponding HomeLink® button after
programmed HomeLink® buttons be programming, contact HomeLink® at
erased for security purposes. www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.

! Remote control mirror switch ! Power folding mirror switch (if manually folded slightly forward of the
equipped) regularly unfolded position, when you
turn the ignition switch from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC”
or “ON” position, the outside mirrors
may automatically fold further forward
depending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch. When this hap-
pens, press the power folding mirror
switch. By doing so, the outside mir-
rors which have been folded to the
furthest forward position will extend to
the regularly unfolded position and
then fold rearward in the usual way. In
order to unfold the outside mirrors,
: Select side to adjust
press the switch again.
: Direction control The power folding mirror switch operates
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
The remote control mirrors operate only only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
manually, the mirrors may become
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or or “ACC” position.
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
“ACC” position. To fold the outside mirrors, press the by operating the switch. If the outside
1. Turn the control switch to the side that power folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror, mirrors, press the switch again. again and then unfold them by operat-
“R” is for the right mirror. ing the switch again.
NOTE
2. Move the control switch in the direction . When the temperature is low, the
. If the outside mirrors have been outside mirrors may stop during opera-
you want to move the mirror.
operated (folded or unfolded) manually, tion. Push the switch again. When the
3. Return the control switch to the neutral when you turn the ignition switch from
position to prevent unintentional opera- outside mirrors do not work by operat-
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position to the ing the switch, move the outside mir-
tion. “ACC” or “ON” position, the outside rors several times manually. This
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- mirrors may be adjusted automatically makes it possible to operate them by
ally. depending on the status of the power switch operation.
folding mirror switch. . When you operate the power folding
. If the outside mirrors have been mirror switch continuously, it may not
– CONTINUED –

3-106 Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
work. This is not a malfunction. Oper- Defogger and deicer vated only when the ignition switch is in
ate after waiting for a short period of the “ON” position.
time.
Climate control system type A and type B
1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) Climate control system type C and type D
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
To activate the defogger and deicer
The defogger and deicer system is acti- system, press the control switch that is

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer 3-107
located on the climate control panel. The If the battery voltage drops below the cally stops operating, though the rear
rear window defogger, outside mirror permissible level, continuous operation of window defogger and outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are the defogger and deicer system is can- defogger maintain continuous opera-
activated simultaneously. The indicator celed and the system stops operating. tion in this condition.
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti- CAUTION
vated.
. To prevent the battery from being
To turn them off, press the control switch discharged, do not operate the
again. They also turn off when the ignition defogger and deicer system con-
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/ tinuously for any longer than
“OFF” position. necessary.
The defogger and deicer system will . Do not use sharp instruments or
automatically shut off after approximately window cleaner containing abra-
15 minutes. If the rear window and the sives to clean the inner surface
outside mirrors have been cleared and the of the rear window. They may
windshield wiper blades have been deiced damage the conductors printed
completely before that time, press the on the window.
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
NOTE
turn them on again. . Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
For models with the automatic climate windshield.
control system (type B, C and D), it is . If the windshield is covered with
possible for the defogger and deicer snow, remove the snow so that the
system to be set to continuous operation windshield wiper deicer works effec-
mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your tively.
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for . While the defogger and deicer sys-
models with a multi function display, the tem is in the continuous operation
setting can be changed using the display. mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
For details, refer to “Multi function display” 9 mph (15 km/h) or less for 15 minutes,
F3-36. the windshield wiper deicer automati-

3-108 Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel Horn
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking 1) Tilt adjustment
the steering wheel. This may 2) Telescopic adjustment
cause loss of vehicle control
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
and result in personal injury.
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.

Climate control
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2 Defrosting........................................................... 4-11

Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-2 Type A and B..................................................... 4-11
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3 Type C............................................................... 4-11
Type A ................................................................ 4-3 Type D............................................................... 4-11
Type B ................................................................ 4-4 Operating tips for heater and air
Type C ................................................................ 4-5 conditioner ...................................................... 4-12
Type D ................................................................ 4-6 Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-12 4
Automatic climate control operation (type Efficient cooling after parking in direct
B, C and D) ....................................................... 4-7 sunlight ........................................................... 4-12
Type B ................................................................ 4-7 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Type C and D ...................................................... 4-7 circuit.............................................................. 4-12
Temperature sensors........................................... 4-8 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-12
Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-8 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-8 low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12
Temperature control ............................................ 4-9 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
Fan speed control .............................................. 4-10 is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12
Air conditioner control ....................................... 4-10 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Air inlet selection ............................................... 4-10 Air filtration system ........................................... 4-13
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-13

4-2 Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control
& Center and side ventilators
Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Center ventilators To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
1) Open To open or close the ventilator, turn the
2) Close thumb-wheel up or down.

Climate control/Climate control panel 4-3
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
Climate control panel perature control” F4-9.)
2) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
& Type A conditioner control” F4-10.)
3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-10.)
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-10.)
5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-106.)
– CONTINUED –

4-4 Climate control/Climate control panel
& Type B 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-9.)
conditioner control” F4-10.)
3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Auto-
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Fan speed control”
F4-10.)
5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Automatic climate control operation
(type B, C and D)” F4-7 and/or “Airflow
mode selection” F4-8.)
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.

Climate control/Climate control panel 4-5
& Type C 1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8.)
7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
trol” F4-9.)
8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B, C and D)”
F4-7.)
9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation (type B, C and D)” F4-
7.)
– CONTINUED –

4-6 Climate control/Climate control panel
& Type D 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

trol” F4-9.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8.)
4) DUAL mode button (Refer to ““DUAL”
mode (type D)” F4-10.)
8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
9) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
trol” F4-9.)
10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B, C and D)”
F4-7.)
11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation (type B, C and D)” F4-
7.)

Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D) 4-7
Automatic climate control the AUTO mode is controlled automa- and temperature control dial(s) during
tically. Any function not set to the FULL AUTO mode operation, the
operation (type B, C and D) AUTO mode can be manually adjusted “FULL” indicator light on the control
as desired. panel will turn off and the “AUTO”
When this mode is selected, the fan . The controllable temperature range indicator light will remain illuminated.
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, may vary depending on the regional You can then manually control the
and air conditioner compressor operation specifications of the vehicle. system as desired using the button
are automatically controlled. To activate you operated. To change the system
this mode, perform the following. 3. To turn off the climate control system,
back to the FULL AUTO mode, press
turn the fan speed control dial to the “OFF”
the “AUTO” button.
NOTE position. Then the air inlet selection will be
. Operate the automatic climate con- set as follows. 3. To turn off the climate control system,
trol system when the engine is running. press the “OFF” button. Then the air inlet
. when the AUTO mode is selected: OFF
. Even when cooling is not necessary, (outside air)
selection will be set to OFF (outside air).
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature . when the AUTO mode is not selected:
turns on the air conditioner compres- the mode that was selected when turning
sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- off the climate system will be selected.
cator light on the control panel illumi-
nates. & Type C and D
1. Depress the “AUTO” button. The
& Type B indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display
illuminates.
1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial
and fan speed control dial to the “AUTO” 2. Set the preferred temperature using
position. the temperature control dial.
2. Set the preferred temperature using NOTE
the temperature control dial.
. The controllable temperature range
NOTE may vary depending on the regional
. Each function can be individually
. If you operate any of the buttons on
set to the AUTO mode independently of
the control panel other than the “OFF”
the other functions. Any function set to
button, rear window defogger button
– CONTINUED –

4-8 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
& Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys- Manual climate control op-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
eration
the sensors, observe the following pre- & Airflow mode selection
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact. To select the airflow mode:
– Keep water away from the sensors. Type A, B and C: Turn the airflow mode
selection dial.
– Do not cover the sensors.
Type D: Press the airflow mode selection
The sensors are located as follows. button.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield To select the defrost mode:
defroster grille Type A and B: Turn the airflow mode
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to selection dial.
the steering column Type C and D: Press the defroster button.
– Outside temperature sensor: near the
front bumper opening Airflow modes are as follows.
1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system (Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated

Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-9
both side windows to prevent fogging.) and both side outlets of the instrument
panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-11.)
& Temperature control

! Type A
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! Type B, C and D
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature. With the
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
dial set to your preferred temperature, the
foot outlets (Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets, system automatically adjusts the tempera-
foot outlets and both side outlets of the ture of air supplied from the outlets so that
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting” the preferred temperature is achieved and
F4-11.) maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system provides maximum cooling
performance. If the dial is turned fully
clockwise, the system provides maximum
heating performance.
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and (Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets
– CONTINUED –

4-10 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
! “DUAL” mode (type D) & Air conditioner control & Air inlet selection
You can change the setting of the driver’s The air conditioner operates only when Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
side and front passenger’s side tempera- the engine is running. selection button.
ture independently by selecting the Press the air conditioner button while the
“DUAL” mode. ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
fan is in operation to turn on the air recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
You can select the “DUAL” mode by conditioner. When the air conditioner is air inlet selection button to the ON position
performing either of the following proce- on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
dures. To turn off the air conditioner, press the when driving on a dusty road.
. Press the “DUAL” button button again.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
. Turn the passenger’s side temperature NOTE drawn into the passenger compartment.
control dial For efficient defogging or dehumidify- Press the air inlet selection button to the
The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by ing in cold weather, turn on the air OFF position when the interior has cooled
pressing the “DUAL” button. conditioner. However, if the ambient to a comfortable temperature and the road
temperature decreases to approxi- is no longer dusty.
When the “DUAL” mode is selected: mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner
Turn the driver’s side dial to set the compressor will stop operating. WARNING
driver’s side temperature. Turn the front
passenger’s side dial to set the front Continued operation in the ON posi-
passenger’s side temperature. tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled: outside conditions are no longer
Set the desired temperature by turning the dusty.
driver’s side dial.
& Fan speed control NOTE

. When the indicator light on the air
The fan operates only when the ignition inlet selection button is flashing at
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the engine starting, a malfunction might
preferred fan speed by turning the fan be occurring in the electrical system.
speed control dial. Contact your SUBARU dealer for in-
spection.

Climate control/Defrosting 4-11
. The indicator light on the air inlet Defrosting selection is automatically set to the
selection button may flash in the outside air mode.
following cases. However, this does & Type A and B For type A climate control system, in
not indicate a malfunction. this state:
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode by turning the
– After the vehicle battery has been airflow mode selection dial to defrost or to – You cannot stop the air condi-
disconnected and reconnected. dehumidify the windshield and front door tioner compressor by pressing the
– When the vehicle battery voltage windows. air conditioner button.
is low. – You cannot select the recircula-
& Type C tion mode by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the . For type C and D climate control
defroster button, or select the “ ” mode system, after defrosting the windshield
by turning the airflow mode selection dial by pressing the defroster button “ ”,
to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield pressing the button again returns the
and front door windows. system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
& Type D vated.
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “ ” mode
by pressing the airflow mode selection
button to defrost or to dehumidify the
windshield and front door windows.
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor operates automatically regardless
of the position of the air conditioner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet

4-12 Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
Operating tips for heater and allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning
heated interior. This results in quicker system.
air conditioner cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
& Cleaning ventilation grille windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving up a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. incline.
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate

system before summer sea- control system
son
1) Front ventilation inlet grille
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Have the air con-
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. ditioning system checked by your
Since the condenser is located in front of SUBARU dealer.
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in
by any accumulation of insects and leaves high humidity and low tem-
on the condenser. perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
& Efficient cooling after parking relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
in direct sunlight small amount of water vapor emission 1) Air conditioner label
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This
the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

Climate control/Air filtration system 4-13
refrigerant HFC134a (as shown on the air Air filtration system NOTE
conditioner label). Therefore, the method The filter can influence the air condi-
of adding, changing or checking the tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
Replace the filter element according to the
refrigerant is different from the method mance if not properly maintained.
replacement schedule as follows. This
for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
schedule should be followed to maintain
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a & Replacing an air filter
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
extremely dusty conditions, the filter 1. Remove the glove box.
not covered under warranty.
should be replaced more frequently. It is (1) Open the glove box.
recommended that you have your filter
checked or replaced by your SUBARU
dealer. For replacement, use only a
genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter: (2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
– CONTINUED –

4-14 Climate control/Air filtration system
doing this, be careful not to damage CAUTION

the hinge.
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go. 2. Remove the air filter.
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
6. Attach the service label to the driver’s
side door pillar.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally 3. Replace the air filter element with a
and remove the hinge portion. When new one.

Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-3 CD player operation .......................................... 5-20

Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-3 Play file ............................................................. 5-21
FM reception ....................................................... 5-3 How to insert a CD ............................................ 5-21
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-21
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-22
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-22
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Repeating .......................................................... 5-22
Type C audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-7 Random playback .............................................. 5-23
Type D audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-8 Scan ................................................................. 5-23 5
Type E audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-9 Display selection ............................................... 5-24
Power and audio controls ................................. 5-10 Folder selection ................................................. 5-25
Power switch and volume control ....................... 5-10 How to eject a CD from the player ...................... 5-25
Sound controls and audio settings ..................... 5-10 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-25
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-13 Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-26
FM/AM selection (type E audio)........................... 5-13 Precautions to observe when handling a
FM selection (except type E audio) ..................... 5-13 compact disc................................................... 5-27
AM selection (except type E audio) ..................... 5-13 USB storage device / iPod® operations ........... 5-28
Tuning ............................................................... 5-14 Play file ............................................................. 5-28
HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-28
Radio) (type B and E audio).............................. 5-15 Connectable iPod® models................................. 5-29
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and Connecting USB storage device / iPod® ............. 5-30
RT (Radio Text) (type A, B and E audio) ............ 5-17 How to play back ............................................... 5-30
Station preset .................................................... 5-17 To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-31
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-19 To select a chapter from the beginning when
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-19 connecting iPod® ............................................. 5-31
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-19 Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-31
Band selection ................................................... 5-19 Repeating .......................................................... 5-32
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-19 Random playback .............................................. 5-32
Channel preset................................................... 5-20 SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
Display selection................................................ 5-20 device) ............................................................ 5-33

Audio
Selecting category (only when connecting Bluetooth® audio ............................................... 5-36

iPod®) .............................................................. 5-33 Media format ..................................................... 5-37
Display selection................................................ 5-33 Setting Bluetooth® audio.................................... 5-37
Folder selection (only when connecting USB Bluetooth® audio operation ................................ 5-38
storage device) ................................................ 5-33
Hands-free system (if equipped) ...................... 5-39
When “CHECK DEVICE” is displayed.................. 5-34
Safety precautions ............................................. 5-40
Audio control buttons........................................ 5-34 Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-41
MODE button ..................................................... 5-34 Bluetooth® settings............................................ 5-56
“ ” and “ ” switch........................................... 5-35 Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-58
Volume control switch ........................................ 5-36 Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-60
MUTE button (models without Hands-free
system)............................................................ 5-36

Audio/Antenna system 5-3
Antenna system & FM reception

Although FM is normally static free,
& Roof antenna reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
CAUTION strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
. Be sure to remove the antenna momentary static, flutter or station inter-
rod before entering garages, ference. If reception continues to be
parking towers and other loca- unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
tions with low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod is left attached, it
1) Unscrew
may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed in the center
tighten it. at the rear of the roof.
The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.

5-4 Audio/Installation of accessories
Installation of accessories Audio set

Always consult your SUBARU dealer Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
before installing a citizen band radio or of the following audio sets. Refer to the
other transmitting device in your vehicle. pages indicated in this section for operat-
Such devices may cause the electronic ing details.
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not NOTE
suited for the vehicle. If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.

Audio/Audio set 5-5
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-10
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-20
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-26
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-36
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-39
– CONTINUED –

5-6 Audio/Audio set
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
position.
5-10
refer to page 5-20
refer to page 5-28
NOTE
HD Radio Technology is included as a
feature in the type B audio.

Audio/Audio set 5-7
& Type C audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
position.
5-10
refer to page 5-20
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio (if equipped): refer to
page 5-36
. Hands-free system (if equipped): refer
to page 5-39
– CONTINUED –

5-8 Audio/Audio set
& Type D audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
position.
5-10
refer to page 5-20
refer to page 5-28
. Bluetooth® audio (if equipped): refer to
page 5-36
. Hands-free system (if equipped): refer
to page 5-39

Audio/Audio set 5-9
& Type E audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
position.
5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-19
refer to page 5-20
refer to page 5-28
NOTE
HD Radio Technology is included as a
feature in the type E audio.

5-10 Audio/Power and audio controls
Power and audio controls ! Tone and balance control The control function returns to the tune/
Sound control dial: track control mode after approximately 8
& Power switch and volume seconds.
control NOTE
Type A, B, C and D
audio . VIRTUAL BASS compensates for
low pitch.
Power and volume . SND RESTORER compensates for
control dial
high pitch.
Type E audio . VOCAL IMAGE controls the sound
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) image localization.
and volume control. The radio is turned ! Other settings
ON and OFF by pressing the dial, and the Each brief press of the sound control dial
volume is controlled by turning the dial. changes the control modes in the follow-
ing sequence.
& Sound controls and audio “MENU” button
settings
NOTE
Each brief press of the “MENU” button
For models with the multi function changes the control modes in the follow-
display, this feature can be set via the ing sequence.
multi function display unit. For details,
refer to “Sound setting” F3-85. Type A audio:
*: Type B audio only

Choose the preferred level for each mode
by turning the sound control dial.

Audio/Power and audio controls 5-11
Type B audio: The control function returns to the tune/

track control mode after approximately 8
seconds.
! SVC setting (type A, B and C
audio)
SVC (Speed Volume Control) is a function
that automatically adjusts the volume
according to the vehicle speed. As the
Type C audio: vehicle speed increases, the audio vo-
lume automatically increases to match the
vehicle speed, in order to create a
pleasant listening environment even as
the driving noise increases. The amount of
this automatic volume change can be set
in the range from OFF to 2. The initial
Type D audio: setting is OFF.
! BEEP setting
A beep sound (operation sound) that
occurs when the audio system is operated
can be set ON/OFF. The initial setting is
ON.
Type E audio: ! HD Radio setting (type B and E
audio)
You can select the HD Radio ON mode
(hybrid mode) or OFF mode (analog
mode). The initial setting is ON.
Choose the preferred settings for each

mode by turning the sound control dial.
– CONTINUED –

5-12 Audio/Power and audio controls
! Adjustable level of each mode
Mode Range of levels Default Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

(displayed) setting
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Virtual Bass control (type B and OFF to ON ON OFF ON
C audio)
Sound Restorer (SND Re- OFF to ON ON OFF ON
storer) (type B and C audio)
Vocal image control (type B and L9 to R9 0 Right attenuated Left attenuated
C audio)
Other settings SPEED VOLUME (type A, B OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
and C audio)
BEEP OFF to ON ON OFF ON
HD ON/OFF (Type B and E OFF to ON ON ON OFF
audio)

Audio/FM/AM radio operation 5-13
FM/AM radio operation following sequence starting from the last & AM selection (except type E
radio band that you selected. audio)
NOTE
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit “AM” button
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate a radio Press the “AM” button when the radio is off
malfunction. & FM selection (except type E to turn on the radio.
. For models with the multi function audio)
display, the selected reception mode Each time the “AM” button is briefly
and frequency will be displayed when pressed, the radio will change in the
either the “FM/AM” button (type E) or “FM” button following sequence starting from the last
the “FM” button/“AM” button (except radio band that you selected.
type E) is pressed. When receiving a Press the “FM” button when the radio is off
broadcast, the station name may be to turn on the radio.
displayed. For details, refer to “Audio
screen” F3-46. Press the “FM” button when the radio is on
to select the preferred reception mode.
& FM/AM selection (type E Each time the “FM” button is briefly
audio) pressed, the radio will change in the
following sequence starting from the last
radio band that you selected.
“FM/AM” button
Press the “FM/AM” button when the radio

is off to turn on the radio.
Press the “FM/AM” button when the radio
is on to select the preferred reception
mode.
Each time the “FM/AM” button is briefly
pressed, the radio will change in the
– CONTINUED –

5-14 Audio/FM/AM radio operation
& Tuning ! Seek tuning (SEEK) ! Scan tuning (SCAN)

! Manual tuning “SCAN” button:
“TUNE” dial:
Seek up Type A, C and D
audio
Type A, B, C and D
audio Type B and E audio
Seek down
Type E audio If you press the “SCAN” button briefly, the

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the radio will switch to the scan mode. In this
“SEEK” button briefly, the radio will auto- mode, the radio scans through the radio
matically search for a receivable station band until a receivable station is found.
Turn the “TUNE” dial clockwise to in- and stop at the first one it finds. The radio will briefly stop at the station
crease the tuning frequency and turn the while displaying the frequency, after which
“TUNE” dial counterclockwise to decrease This function may not be available when
scanning will continue until the entire band
it. radio signals are weak. When this hap-
has been scanned.
Each time the dial is turned, the frequency pens, perform manual tuning to select the
preferred station. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
interval can be changed between 10 kHz the SCAN mode and to stop at any
in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM displayed channel.
mode.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
! Stereo indicator erly if the station reception is weakened by
The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate distance from the station or proximity to
when an FM stereo broadcast is received. tall buildings and hills.

! PTY (Program type) group tuning This operation only changes the display. It & HD RadioTM Technology (Di-
(only FM reception) (type A, B and E does not change the station that is gital AM and FM Radio) (type
audio) currently being received. B and E audio)
“PTY” button: ! Seek in PTY (Program type)
group
Type A audio
Seek up
Type B audio
Seek down
Type E audio
Press the “PTY” button to change to the In the PTY selection mode, when the
PTY selection mode. At this time, the PTY preferred PTY group has been selected, HD Radio Technology is fueling the digital
group that you are currently listening to pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” radio revolution in the United States and
will be displayed for 8 seconds. In the PTY seeks within that PTY group. around the world.
selection mode, “PTY SEL” will be dis- The control function returns to the normal The digital technology enables broadcas-
played on the screen. mode after approximately 8 seconds. ters to offer new and unique FM content
via HD2 / HD3 channels, crystal-clear
! PTY (Program type) group selec-
sound and data services on both AM
tion
and FM bands - all free, with no subscrip-
In the PTY selection mode, press the tion fee.
following button to change the PTY group HD Radio Technology manufactured un-
by one step at a time. der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD
PTY group up by
one step RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of
PTY group down by
one step iBiquity Digital Corp.
– CONTINUED –

For more information, visit www.hdradio. 2. Turn the “TUNE” dial and select the ! About HD Radio Technology
com. HD Radio ON mode (hybrid mode) or OFF NOTE
mode (analog mode). . HD Radio Technology is a hybrid
broadcasting system that employs di-
“HD/TAG” button ! iTunes tagging
®
gital and analog signals.
To tag the received song, press and hold . When the vehicle moves outside the
the “HD/TAG” button. Connect an iPod® to digital broadcasting area (that is nar-
Press the “HD/TAG” button while receiving store the tagged song to the iPod®. When rower than the analog broadcasting
FM radio (except an analog broadcast). the iPod® is connected to iTunes®, you area due to the FCC output require-
The next channel of the station that is can purchase the tagged songs from the ments), the radio reception automati-
being received will play. Apple® iTunes Music Store. cally changes from the digital signal to
For the models of iPod® that support the analog signal. When the vehicle
! Mode selection iTunes® tagging, refer to the following reenters the digital broadcasting area,
website: www.hdradio.com/tagging.php? the radio reception automatically
id=itunes. changes from the analog signal to the
digital signal. When in a digital mode
“MENU” button ! HD Radio indicators
the Logo will be in orange on the
Each indicator illuminates under the fol- radio display.
lowing conditions. . Depending on the broadcasting sta-
1. Press the “MENU” button to select the . The “HD” indicator flashes while a tion, a condition such as a sound delay,
HD Radio setting mode. digital broadcast is received during the echo effect or skipping sound may
HD Radio ON mode. occur. However, this does not indicate
“TUNE” dial:
. The “TAG” indicator illuminates when a malfunction.
you can operate the iTunes® tagging. . Depending on the broadcasting
. The “LIVE” indicator illuminates when area, the digital signal may not be
Type B audio received in an area where the analog
receiving a live broadcast, such as a ball
game. signal can be properly received, or the
. The “ST” indicator illuminates when an system frequently switches the chan-
FM stereo broadcast is received. nels between the digital and analog
signals. However, this does not indi-
Type E audio . The “PTY” indicator illuminates during
cate a malfunction. If this frequent
the PTY selection mode.
switching between digital and analog

causes annoyance, set the radio to the ! Type B and E audio NOTE
analog mode (HD Radio off mode) that Press the “TEXT” button to show the next . Up to six stations for each reception
provides the same radio broadcasting page when the text is not fully displayed mode may be preset.
quality as a conventional radio. while the PSD (Program Service Data) or . If the connection between the radio
RT (Radio Text) service is received. and battery is broken for any reason
& Displaying radio PS (Pro- such as vehicle maintenance or radio
gram Service Name) and RT NOTE removal, all stations stored in the
(Radio Text) (type A, B and E . When the HD Radio function is preset buttons are cleared. If this
audio) turned on, PSD provides additional occurs, it is necessary to reset the
information about the broadcast. Text preset buttons.
data such as “Title” and “Artist” is
“TEXT” button ! Selecting preset stations
displayed on the screen.
. When the HD Radio function is 1. Select the preferred reception mode.
turned off (HD Radio off mode), the 2. Press the preferred preset button
! Type A audio radio text is displayed on the screen (from to ) briefly.
If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or while receiving the broadcasting sta-
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing tion with RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data ! Auto-store
the “TEXT” button changes the display System). Auto-store button:
among PS, RT and frequency. The default
setting is “PS”.
& Station preset Type A, C and D
NOTE audio
! How to preset stations
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for PS is 8. 1. Select the preferred reception mode. Type B and E audio
. The maximum number of characters 2. Select the preferred station.
that can be displayed for RT is 64. 3. Press and hold one of the preset
Using the Auto-store function, you can
. If RT is 13 characters or longer, buttons (from to ) to store the
automatically store 6 stations on the
press and hold the “TEXT” button in frequency. If the button is pressed briefly,
the preceding selection will remain in the current waveband (FM-AS or AM-AS) by
order to change the page.
memory. pressing and holding the auto-store but-
ton. Use Auto-store to quickly find the
strongest stations, for example when
traveling through different reception areas.
– CONTINUED –

NOTE dures.
. When the HD Radio function is “LIST” button – Turn the “TUNE” dial
turned on, Auto-store cannot be used – Briefly press the seek switch to the
while receiving a broadcasting station “ ” or “ ” side
with SPS (Supplemental Program Ser-
“TUNE” dial (type A, 3. Press the “TUNE” dial to select the
vice). B, C and D audio) displayed station.
. When you use Auto-store, the new
stations replace any stations pre-
viously stored.
. Interrupting Auto-store: If you acci- “TUNE” dial (type E
dentally press the auto-store button, audio)
you can cancel the Auto-store function
before it has been completed as fol-
lows.
– switching to the other source
mode
– pressing the auto-store button
– switching to the other band
– turning the “TUNE” dial
– pressing the “SCAN” button
(type A, C and D audio)
! Displaying and selecting preset
stations
NOTE
For models with the multi function Seek switch
display, the list of the preset broad- 1. Briefly press the “LIST” button during
casting stations will be displayed when AM/FM reception to display the radio
the “LIST” button is briefly pressed screen.
while receiving AM/FM. For details, 2. Display the preferred preset station by
refer to “Audio screen” F3-46. performing either of the following proce-

Audio/Satellite radio operation 5-19
Satellite radio operation (if selected as the source. ! Category selection

equipped) Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
the satellite radio channel.
“PTY/CAT” button
& Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
& Band selection
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In To activate the category search mode,
areas where there are tall buildings, trees, press the “PTY/CAT” button. To deactivate
“XM” button the category search mode, press the
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there “PTY/CAT” button again.
may be signal interruptions. Other circum- Push the “XM” button when the radio is off When in the category search mode, press
stances that may result in signal loss to turn on the radio. the following button to change the cate-
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill Push the “XM” button when the radio is on gory up or down.
or driving on the lower level of a multi- to select XM1, XM2 or XM3 reception
tiered road or inside of a parking garage. mode. Category up by one
step
To help reduce this condition, satellite
radio providers have installed ground- & Channel and category selec- Category down by
one step
based repeaters in heavily populated tion
areas. However, you may still experience When a category is selected, turning the
reception problems in some areas. ! Channel selection “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial selects channels
only within the selected category.
& Displaying satellite radio ID The control function returns to the normal
of tuner “CH” dial mode after approximately 8 seconds.
When you activate satellite radio, you ! Channel scan
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by Turn the “CH” dial clockwise to select the
its unique satellite radio tuner ID. next channel and turn the “CH” dial “SCAN” button
The satellite radio ID will be needed when counterclockwise to select the previous
you activate satellite radio and receive channel. Press the “SCAN” button to change the
satellite radio customer support.
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
The satellite radio ID can be found on the under the selected category, the radio
audio display when satellite radio is
– CONTINUED –

5-20 Audio/CD player operation
scans through the channel until a station preset buttons. CD player operation
is found. The radio will stop at the station
for 5 seconds while displaying the channel ! Selecting preset channels
NOTE
number, after which scanning will continue 1. Press the “XM” button to select the . Make sure to always insert a disc
until the entire channel has been scanned. preferred reception mode. with the label side up. If a disc is
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel 2. Press the preferred preset button inserted with the label side down, the
the SCAN mode and to stop on any (from to ) briefly. player displays “CHECK DISC”. Refer
displayed channel. to “When the following messages are
& Display selection displayed” F5-25.
& Channel preset . If a disc is inserted during a radio
! How to preset channels broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
“TEXT” button broadcast.
1. Press the “XM” button to select the . After the last song finishes, the disc
preferred reception mode. will automatically return to track 1 (the
Press the “TEXT” button while receiving
2. Select the desired channel. the satellite radio to change the display as first track on the disc) and will auto-
3. Press and hold one of the preset follows. matically play back.
buttons (from to ) for more . The player is designed to be able to
than 1.5 seconds to store the channel. If play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
the button is pressed and held for less but it may not be able to play certain
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection ones.
will remain in memory. . Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are
not supported, and if inserted, they will
NOTE be immediately ejected.
. CDs that can be played back are
. Up to six channels for each recep- accompanied by the following restric-
tion mode may be preset. tions.
. If the connection between the radio – Maximum number of folders: 255
and battery is broken for any reason
– Maximum number of files in a
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
folder: 255
removal, all channels stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this
occurs, it is necessary to reset the

Audio/CD player operation 5-21
– Maximum number of files on a & How to insert a CD playback of the CD, beginning with the
CD: 510 Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole first track.
while gripping the edge of the disc, then ! When CD is in the player (type A, B
& Play file insert it in to the slot (with the label side and E)
NOTE up) and the player will automatically pull Each brief press of the button
the disc into position. changes the modes in the following
. Copyright protected MP3/WMA/AAC
files will not be played by the system. sequence.
NOTE
The player will automatically skip to the DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
next file (track). DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THE SAME
. WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Profes- TIME.
sional and WMA9 voice cannot be
played. When the CD mode is selected, the player
& How to play back a CD will start playback.
MP3: NOTE
. Based on MPEG1, 2 and 2.5 Layer3 ! When CD is in the player (type C
For models with the multi function and D)
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, display, the following information will
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 When the button is pressed, the
be displayed while playing a CD.
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 player will start playback.
. Album name (except when playing
. Supports variable bit rates an MP3/WMA/AAC file)
. Folder name (when playing an MP3/
WMA: WMA/AAC file)
. Based on Windows Media Audio 9 . Artist name
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32 . Song title
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
For details, refer to “Audio screen” F3-
AAC: 46.
. Based on MPEG4 AAC
! When there is no CD inserted
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to
. Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 insert a CD” F5-21.
. Number of channels: 1 to 2ch When a CD is loaded, the player will start
– CONTINUED –

& To select a track from the . Turn the “TRACK” dial counterclock- NOTE
beginning wise. . If you fast-forward to the end of the
. Press the “ ” button briefly. last track, fast-forwarding will stop and
the player will start playback beginning
NOTE with the first track. For an MP3, WMA or
“TRACK” dial (type
A, B, C and D audio) With an MP3, WMA or AAC: AAC folder, the player will start play-
. Skipping past the last track will take back beginning with the first track of
you back to the first track in the folder. the next folder.
. Skipping past the first track will take . If you rewind to the beginning of the
“TRACK” dial (type you to the last track in the folder. first track, rewinding will stop and the
E audio)
player will start playback. For an MP3,
WMA or AAC folder, the player will start
& Fast-forwarding and rewind- playback beginning with the first track
Skip to the begin- ing of the current folder.
ning of the next
track
& Repeating
Fast-forwarding
Skip to the begin-
ning of the current “RPT” button
track
Use either of the following methods to skip

Rewinding To repeat a track, briefly press the “RPT”
to the beginning of the next track. Each button while the track is playing.
time, the indicated track number will Each time you briefly press the button, the
increase. Press and hold the “ ” button to fast- mode will change in the following se-
. Turn the “TRACK” dial clockwise. forward the track. Release the button to quences.
stop fast-forwarding.
. Press the “ ” button briefly.
Press and hold the “ ” button to rewind
Use either of the following methods to skip the track. Release the button to stop
to the beginning of the current track. Each rewinding.
time, the indicated track number will
decrease.

NOTE & Random playback To cancel the random playback mode,
. The “RPT” indication refers to the briefly press the “RDM” button again and
repeat playback of a single track. It select CANCEL.
repeats the track that is playing. “RDM” button The “RDM” indicator will turn off, and the
. The “F-RPT” indication refers to the normal playback mode will be resumed.
repeat playback of a folder. It repeats To playback tracks at random, briefly
the all of the tracks in the folder. It is NOTE
press the “RDM” button while a track is
possible to select the function when Random playback will be cancelled if
playing.
the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is you perform any of the following steps.
playing. Each time you briefly press the button, the . Briefly press the “RDM” button and
To cancel the track repeat-play mode, mode will change in the following se- select CANCEL.
briefly press the “RPT” button and select quences. . Press the “RPT” button.
CANCEL. The “RPT” indicator will turn off, . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
and the normal playback mode will be “FOLDER” button (only when an MP3/
resumed. WMA/AAC format track is playing).
. Press the button.
NOTE . Press the “SCAN” button (type A, C
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled and D audio).
if you perform any of the following . Press the “SCAN/A.S” button (type
NOTE B and E audio).
steps.
. The “RDM” indication refers to the
. Press the “RPT” button and select random playback of the tracks. It
CANCEL. randomly repeats the tracks on the & Scan
. Press the “RDM” button. CD. It is possible to select the function
. Press the button. when formats other than the MP3/WMA/
. Press the “SCAN” button (type A, C Type A, C and D
AAC format CD is playing. audio
and D audio). . The “F-RDM” indication refers to the
. Press the “SCAN/A.S” button (type random playback in the folder. It ran-
B and E audio). Type B and E audio
domly repeats the tracks in the folder. It
is possible to select the function when
an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is play- The scan mode lets you listen to the first
ing. 10 seconds of each track in succession.
Press the “SCAN” button to start scanning
– CONTINUED –

upward beginning with the track following the current folder. For iPod® (when playing music):
the currently selected one. . When the “SCAN” button (type A, C
After all tracks on the disc/in the folder and D audio)/“SCAN/A.S” button (type
have been scanned, normal playback will B and E audio) is pressed while data
be resumed. To cancel the scan mode, (except for the MP3, WMA or AAC
press the “SCAN” button again. formats) is played back, the system
scans the disc. For iPod® (when playing audiobook):
NOTE
. The scan mode will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps.
& Display selection
– Press the “RPT” button.
– Press the “RDM” button. “TEXT” button
– Turn the “TRACK” dial.
– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the For iPod® (when playing podcast):
“FOLDER” button (only when an If you press the “TEXT” button during
MP3/WMA/AAC track is playing). playback, the display will change as
shown in the following sequence.
– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of
the “TRACK/SEEK” button. For CD-DA:
– Press the “SCAN” button (type A,
C and D audio). ! Page (track/folder title) scroll
– Press the “SCAN/A.S” button If you press the “TEXT” button again and
(type B and E audio). hold it, the title will be scrolled so you can
– Select the radio or AUX mode. see all of it.
For MP3/WMA/AAC:
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment. NOTE
– Turn the ignition switch to the . The display is designed to show
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. titles of up to 24 characters.
. When the “SCAN” button (type A, C . If no operations are performed for 10
and D audio)/“SCAN/A.S” button (type seconds, the screen that was displayed
B and E audio) is pressed while the before pressing and holding the
MP3, WMA or AAC format data is “TEXT” button will be shown.
played back, the system scans within

& Folder selection & When the following mes- remains displayed, please contact your
sages are displayed SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If one of the following messages is
Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are recog-
displayed while operating the CD player,
nized when an attempt to select the
determine the cause based on the follow-
next or previous folder is made. If no
ing information. If you cannot clear those
appropriate folder exists on the disc,
messages, please contact your SUBARU
pressing the “ ” or “ ” side of the
dealer.
“FOLDER” button starts playback be-
ginning with the first track. ! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
Press the following buttons briefly. Press the button to eject the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deforma-
To select the next tion, and also check that the correct disc is
folder inserted. Do not try to eject the disc
To go back to the forcibly. Mini CDs (e.g., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
previous folder are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message
& How to eject a CD from the will be displayed. If the disc cannot be
player ejected or this message remains dis-
played, please contact your SUBARU
When a disc is being played back or when
dealer.
a disc is in the player, press the
button. The disc will be ejected. ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
Press the button to eject the disc.
NOTE Check that the disc is not damaged or
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD scratched, and also check that the disc is
sticking out. The CD may fall out due to inserted correctly. This message may
vibration. appear when using some CD-RW discs.
. If you do not remove the ejected Check that the disc type (e.g., 8 cm/3 inch
disc within approximately 15 seconds, CDs are not supported) and data format
a disc protection function will operate, are correct. This player can only play
automatically reloading the disc. In this MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If the
case, the disc is not played. disc cannot be ejected or this message

5-26 Audio/Auxiliary input jack
Auxiliary input jack AUX input selection button: cantly louder compared to the prior
device. To avoid a large volume differ-
Type A, B and E ence, turn down the volume when you
audio change between portable audio
players.
. In some cases, when the sound
Type C and D audio
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound quality may become
2. Press the AUX input selection button impaired when you turn up the volume
on the audio control panel to select the of the vehicle audio system. In this
AUX mode. For type A, B and E audio, case, adjust the sound volume of the
refer to “When CD is in the player (type A, portable audio player.
B and E)” F5-21. . In some cases, noise occurs be-
3. Play back the portable audio player. cause of a bad connection between the
Refer to the instruction manual for the portable player and the vehicle audio
portable audio player. system. Try cleaning the stereo jack
1) Models without Hands-free system
2) Models with Hands-free system
and audio plug.
. If the noise is not reduced, check for
You can connect an external audio device NOTE disconnection of the cord or a malfunc-
to the vehicle’s audio system and play . For models with the genuine tion of the portable player.
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers. SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is present in navigation system for details.
the center console. A stereo mini pin plug . The output sound of the portable
(3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack. The audio player is not loud, and the sound
connection cable is available at electrical via the vehicle’s speakers that are
appliance or similar stores. connected to the vehicle audio set
To use the AUX input jack: may be very low. If you turn up the
volume of the audio set, the volume
1. Connect a portable audio player to the
becomes louder. However, when you
AUX input jack.
change from one portable audio player
to another one, the volume levels via
the vehicle’s speakers may be signifi-

Audio/Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc 5-27
Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following. Also, some compact discs
cannot be played.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD

player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
– CONTINUED –

5-28 Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface USB storage device / iPod®
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
operations
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
NOTE
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use For models with the genuine SUBARU
any disc that has a non-standard shape navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions Manual supplement for the navigation
or problems might result. system.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct & Play file
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles Refer to “Play file” F5-21.
parked in the sun or on hot days.
& Connectable USB storage
device
Mass storage class USB memory can be
connected. USB storage devices that can
be played back are accompanied by the
following restrictions.
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers
(including the ROOT)
. Maximum number of files in a folder:
255
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (in-
cluding the ROOT)
. Maximum number of files on the
device: 130,560
. Maximum capacity: 16 GB or less

Audio/USB storage device / iPod® operations 5-29
NOTE & Connectable iPod® models depending on conditions, cause a
. HUB class USB memory cannot be fire.
played. Model Firmware version
. ATAPI subclass USB cannot be
with video 1.3 NOTE
played.
. For type A audio, High Speed USB classic 2.0.4 . iPod® is a registered trademark of
2.0 cannot be played. nano 1G 1.3.1 Apple Inc.
. A USB memory that is powered by a . You are only permitted to personally
nano 2G 1.1.3 copy and play copyright-free material
source other than the USB power
supply (for example, an AC power nano 3G 1.1.3 or material that is legally permitted to
adapter, etc.) cannot be operated. nano 4G 1.0.4 be copied and played by using an
. A USB memory that is connected to iPod® iPod® and iTunes. Copyright infringe-
nano 5G 1.0.2 ment is prohibited by law.
the memory card reader or multi card
reader cannot be operated. nano 6G 1.0 . To check the firmware version of an
. If the USB memory consists of two touch 1G 3.1.3 iPod®, connect it to a computer and
drives or more, the system will recog- check the device manager. For further
touch 2G 3.1.3 information, see the User’s Guide for
nize only one of the drives after con-
necting the USB memory. touch 3G 4.1 the iPod®.
. The contents stored on the USB touch 4G 4.1 . To update the firmware version of an
memory may not be played in the same iPod®, visit the Apple Inc. website.
1G 3.1.3 . Depending on the model and firm-
order as they appear on a personal
computer. 3G 3.1.3 ware version of an iPod®, it may not
. A personal computer cannot be iPhone® 3G S 3.1.3 work properly or not operate at all.
used even if it is connected to the
4 4.1
system using a USB cable.
. If the USB memory has a security 4S 5.0
function, the contents stored on the
USB memory cannot be played by the
system. CAUTION
. A USB memory and an iPod® cannot Do not connect an iPod® other than
be connected to the system at the the previously stated models. Doing
same time. so may result in a malfunction or,
– CONTINUED –

& Connecting USB storage de- . While an iPod® is connected, the . Depending on the model of iPod®
vice / iPod® iPod® cannot be operated using the connected, the “RPT” indicator may
click wheel on the iPod® (except some illuminate regardless of the user set-
WARNING models). tings. However, this is not a malfunc-
. When using an iPod® by connecting tion.
Do not operate an iPod ® while it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of
driving. Doing so may distract your the list items displayed on the in-
attention from driving and could vehicle equipment may be different
lead to an accident. from that on the iPod®. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
. An iPod® battery that is connected
CAUTION to in-vehicle equipment will be charged
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
. If the data stored in an iPod® is or “ACC” position. However, activation
deleted while it is connected to of the iPod® may be delayed if the
the in-vehicle system, the data battery charge of the iPod® is low.
cannot be recovered. . If an iPod® does not activate after
. Do not store an iPod® in the operation, disconnect the connection
vehicle. If an iPod® is left in the cable from the iPod® and reset it. For The USB connector is located in the
vehicle for a long period of time, the resetting procedure, see the User’s center console. Use the connector to
it may be deformed, discolored Guide of the iPod®. connect a USB storage device/iPod®.
or damaged by high temperature. . If an iPod® and the connection cable
are connected improperly, the iPod®
cannot be powered on or will not be
& How to play back
NOTE recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In NOTE
. Even if a USB storage device or this case, disconnect the connection For models with the multi function
iPod® is connected, it cannot be played cable from the iPod®, and then connect display, the following information will
unless the USB/iPod® mode is se- it again. be displayed while using a USB sto-
lected. rage device/iPod®.
. Movies stored on a USB storage . Folder name (when using a USB
device or an iPod® cannot be played storage device)
while the storage device or iPod® is . Album name (when using an iPod®)
connected to the system.

. Artist name Type C and D audio: described in “To select a track from the
. Song title (when using a USB sto- beginning” F5-22.
rage device or playing a music with an
iPod®) & Fast-forwarding and rewind-
. Audiobook name (when playing an ing
audiobook with an iPod®) *: If equipped Fast-forwarding and rewinding are oper-
. Date of Podcast (when playing a
ated in the same way as for a CD. For
podcast with an iPod®) ®
When the USB/iPod mode is selected,
details, refer to “Fast-forwarding and
the player will start playback of the USB
For details, refer to “Audio screen” F3- rewinding” F5-22.
storage device/iPod®.
46.
NOTE
1. Connect a USB storage device/iPod®. NOTE When connecting iPod®:
Playback button: . Depending on the number of files . When the end of a track is reached
stored on the iPod® and the firmware while fast-forwarding, fast-forwarding
Type A, B and E version, the iPod® may not activate will end and playback will begin from
audio smoothly after operation or not work the beginning of the next track.
properly. . When the beginning of a track is
Type C and D audio . Do not disconnect the connector reached while rewinding, rewinding will
from the iPod® during iPod® operation. end and playback will begin from the
beginning of the track.
2. Press the playback button. Each time & To select a track from the
you briefly press the button, the mode will beginning
change in the following sequence.
Select a track in the same way as for a
Type A, B and E audio: CD. For details, refer to “To select a track
from the beginning” F5-22.
& To select a chapter from the

beginning when connecting
iPod®
When playing podcasts or audiobooks,
select a chapter in the same way as
– CONTINUED –

& Repeating & Random playback of the tracks on the USB storage
device.
! When connecting USB storage de- . The “ALBUM RDM” indication refers
vice “RDM” button to the shuffle playback of the album. It
Repeating is operated in the same way as sequentially plays back all of the tracks
for a CD. For details, refer to “Repeating” on the album.
F5-22. . The “SONG RDM” indication refers
To playback tracks at random, briefly to the shuffle playback on the entire
! When connecting iPod® press the “RDM” button while a track is iPod®. It randomly repeats all of the
playing. tracks on the iPod®.
“RPT” button Each time you briefly press the button, the . When an iPod® is connected, the
mode will change in the following se- files are played back at random by the
quence. shuffle function of the iPod®. There-
Each time you briefly press the “RPT” fore, iPod® operation may be different
button, the mode will change in the When connecting USB storage device: depending on the model of the con-
following sequence. nected iPod®.
. When an audiobook or a podcast is
playing, the mode does not change
even if you briefly press the “RDM”
NOTE button.
When connecting iPod®:
. The “ALL RPT” indication refers to To cancel the random playback mode,
the repeat playback of all tracks on the briefly press the “RDM” button and select
entire iPod®. CANCEL. The “RDM” indicator will turn
. The “SONG RPT” indication refers off, and the normal playback mode will
to the repeat playback of a single track. NOTE resume.
It repeats the track that is playing.
. The “FOLDER RDM” indication re-
. When an audiobook is playing, the
fers to the random playback in the
mode does not change even if you
folders. It randomly repeats all of the
press the “RPT” button.
tracks in the folder.
. The “ALL RDM” indication refers to
the random playback on the entire USB
storage device. It randomly repeats all

& SCAN (only when connecting & Selecting category (only

USB storage device) when connecting iPod®)
“SCAN” button:
“LIST” button
Type A, C and D
audio
“TRACK” dial (type

Type B and E audio A, B, C and D audio)
Scan is operated in the same way as for a

CD. For details, refer to “Scan” F5-23. “TRACK” dial (type
E audio)
To select the category, press the dial. To
NOTE close the iPod® menu, press and hold the
When an iPod ® is connected, you “LIST” button. To return to the previous
cannot select the SCAN mode. When the “LIST” button is pressed briefly, screen, briefly press the “LIST” button.
the iPod® menu will be displayed.
& Display selection
Each time you turn the “TRACK” dial
Refer to “Display selection” F5-24.
clockwise, the displayed category will
change in the following sequence. Each ! Page scroll
time you turn the dial counterclockwise, Refer to “Page (track/folder title) scroll”
the displayed category will change in the F5-24.
opposite sequence.
& Folder selection (only when
connecting USB storage de-
vice)
Refer to “Folder selection” F5-25.
– CONTINUED –

5-34 Audio/Audio control buttons
NOTE Audio control buttons driver to control audio functions without

When an iPod ® is connected, you taking his/her hands off the steering
cannot select a folder. wheel.
& When “CHECK DEVICE” is & MODE button

displayed
This message is displayed under the
following conditions.
. When there is a short in the USB bus
. When an unsupported device (for ex-
ample a USB mouse) is connected
. When an unsupported iPod® is con-
nected
. When a connected iPod® is frozen
Models without Hands-free system
. When a transmission malfunction oc-
curs
. When an iPod® confirmation malfunc-
tion occurs The “MODE” button is used to select the
preferred audio mode. Each time it is
. When a HUB class USB storage
pressed, the mode will change to the next
device is connected
one in the following sequence:
Disconnect the USB storage device/iPod® Type A, B, C and D audio:
and check it.
Models with Hands-free system
These buttons are located on the spokes

of the steering wheel. They allow the *1: The frequency last received in the selected

Audio/Audio control buttons 5-35
waveband will be displayed. & “ ” and “ ” switch playing, press and hold the switch to the
*2: Only when a CD is in the player. “ ” side to select the next folder. Press
*3: Only when the device is connected
and hold the switch to the “ ” side to go
back to the previous folder.
Type E audio: ! With USB/iPod®/Bluetooth® audio
mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” side briefly to
skip forward in the track order. Press the
switch to the “ ” side briefly to skip
backward in the track order. The track
number will be shown on the audio
display.
When the USB/Bluetooth® audio mode is
*1: The frequency last received in the selected selected, press and hold the switch to the
! With radio mode selected “ ” side to select the next folder. Press
waveband will be displayed.
Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side and hold the switch to the “ ” side to go
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
briefly to skip to a preset channel. Press back to the previous folder.
*3: Only when the device is connected. and hold the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
! Models with Hands-free system to seek the next receivable station and
stop at it.
Press and hold this button if you wish to
immediately cut the volume to zero. That station’s frequency will be indicated
on the audio display.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press and hold the button again, the ! With CD mode selected
original sound volume will return and Press the switch to the “ ” side briefly to
“MUTE” turns off. skip forward in the track order. Press the
switch to the “ ” side briefly to skip
backward in the track order.
The track number will be shown on the
audio display.
When the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
– CONTINUED –

5-36 Audio/Bluetooth® audio
& Volume control switch & MUTE button (models with- Bluetooth® audio
out Hands-free system)
NOTE
For models with the genuine SUBARU
navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
Press the switch to the “+” side to increase

the volume. Press the switch to the “−” Press this button if you wish to immedi-
side to reduce the volume. ately cut the volume to zero.
A number indicating the volume will be The audio display will show “MUTE”.
shown on the audio display. If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and “MUTE” will
turn off.
NOTE
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
This function enables you to play back
audio sources from Bluetooth® audio
devices. You need to register the Blue-
tooth® audio device in the system before
using it.

Audio/Bluetooth® audio 5-37
NOTE . AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control NOTE
. The Bluetooth® audio function may Profile) You cannot set Bluetooth® audio while
not operate properly under the follow- driving.
ing conditions. & Setting Bluetooth® audio
– The device is turned off. ! Registering (pairing) device
NOTE
– The battery of the device has run NOTE
For models with the multi function
down. Only one device can be registered. If
display, Bluetooth® audio can be set
– The device is not connected to via the multi function display. For you want to register another device,
the system. details, refer to “Bluetooth® audio delete the previously registered device
– The device is behind the seat or setting” F3-83. and then perform the registering pro-
in the glove box. cedure. For details about deleting a
– A metal material is covering or device, refer to “Deleting device” F5-
touching the device. 38.
. Depending on the type of device that “MENU” button
1. Select the “PAIR AUDIO” menu.
is used, operation and sound volume – If a device is already registered,
may be different from normal use of “MEMORY FULL” will be displayed
those devices. and the mode will change to the
. The sound quality may degrade due “TRACK” dial (type
A, B, C and D audio) Bluetooth® audio setting mode.
to the influence of the device that is 2. After the passkey is shown on the
connected to the system or the circum- display, input the passkey into the device.
stances of the Bluetooth network.
– If you input the correct passkey,
. When another Bluetooth® device is “TRACK” dial (type “PAIRED” will be displayed and the
simultaneously connected, noise may E audio)
registration procedure will be finished.
be heard.
– If you input an incorrect passkey,
1. Select the “BT-A SETUP” menu by “FAILED” will be displayed, the regis-
& Media format pressing the “MENU” button. For details, tration procedure was not successful
® and the mode will change to the
Bluetooth audio devices cannot be refer to “Other settings” F5-10.
connected if they are not compatible with 2. Perform the following procedure by Bluetooth® audio setting mode.
the following Bluetooth® profiles. operating the “TRACK” dial while “BT-A” is
. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution displayed.
Profile)
– CONTINUED –

5-38 Audio/Bluetooth® audio
NOTE – The new passkey will be displayed, For details, refer to “Audio screen” F3-
After the ignition switch is turned to the the passkey will be changed and the 46.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the registered mode will change to the Bluetooth® Perform any of the following procedures
device will not be automatically con- audio setting mode. and select the “BT-A” mode.
nected to the system even if the
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” ! Deleting device
or “ON” position. 1. Select the “DELETE AUDIO” menu.
! Selecting device – If no devices are registered,
“EMPTY” will be displayed and the
1. Select the “SELECT AUDIO” menu. mode will change to the Bluetooth®
– If no devices are registered, audio setting mode.
“EMPTY” will be displayed and the 2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
mode will change to the Bluetooth® – “DELETED” will be displayed and
audio setting mode. the mode will change to the Blue-
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. tooth® audio setting mode.
– If the device is connected, “SE-
LECTED” will be displayed and the & Bluetooth® audio operation
selection procedure will be finished. . Press the “MODE” button on the spoke
– If the device cannot be connected, NOTE of the steering wheel. For details, refer to
“FAILED” will be displayed and the Depending on the connected device, it “MODE button” F5-34.
selection procedure will not be suc- may not activate as per the following . Press the “CD/AUX” button (type A, B
cessful. items or not work smoothly. and E audio).
! How to play back . Press the “AUX/USB” button (type C
! Setting passkey and D audio).
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu. NOTE ! To select a track from its beginning
– After the currently set passkey is For models with the multi function
display, the following information will Select a track in the same way as for a
displayed, a new passkey can be CD. Refer to “To select a track from the
entered. be displayed while playing Bluetooth®
audio. beginning” F5-22.
2. Input the new passkey by operating
the “TRACK” dial. . Album name
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. . Artist name
. Song title

Audio/Hands–free system 5-39
! Repeating Hands-free system (if

Repeating is operated in the same way as equipped)
for a CD. Refer to “Repeating” F5-22.
Each time you briefly press the “RPT” NOTE
button, the mode will change in the . For models with the genuine
following sequence. ! Folder selection SUBARU navigation system, refer to
Select a folder in the same way as for a the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
CD. Refer to “Folder selection” F5-25. navigation system.
. When selling your vehicle, make
sure that you initialize the Hands-free
system to prevent personal data from
being improperly accessed.
! Random playback The Hands-free system operates while the
Random playback is operated in the same ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
way as for a CD. Refer to “Random position.
playback” F5-23. Each time you briefly You can use your cell phone without
press the “RDM” button, the mode will touching it by using the Hands-free sys-
change in the following sequence. tem. To use the Hands-free system,
connect a cell phone as follows.
When no cell phones are registered:
Register a cell phone to the in-vehicle
equipment. For details, refer to “When no
cell phones are registered” F5-51. After
! Display selection
registering a phone, the phone will be
Select an item to be displayed using the automatically connected to the in-vehicle
same way as for a CD. Refer to “Display equipment.
selection” F5-24. Each time you briefly
press the button, the indication will When a cell phone is already regis-
change in the following sequence. tered:
The registered cell phone will be auto-
matically connected to the in-vehicle
– CONTINUED –

5-40 Audio/Hands–free system
equipment when the ignition switch is . When using a cell phone, be

Item Page
turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position while careful not to get it close to the
carrying the cell phone. Security setting 5-56 in-vehicle equipment. Getting it
Phone setting 5-57 too close to the in-vehicle equip-
When two cell phones or more are
ment may result in deterioration
already registered: System setting 5-58
in tone quality or a poor connect-
If the system detects a cell phone in the ing condition.
passenger compartment which was pre-
viously connected to the in-vehicle equip- & Safety precautions . In the frequency band used by
ment when the ignition switch was last this equipment, along with indus-
turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the WARNING trial, scientific and medical
system connects the cell phone automa- equipment such as a microwave
. For safety reasons, avoid operat- oven, radio stations (a license is
tically to the in-vehicle equipment. You
ing a cell phone while driving. required) to be used by the
can select the phone to be connected to
the in-vehicle equipment. For details, refer . Do not make a phone call while production line in the factory to
to “Selecting a cell phone” F5-51. driving. When you have an in- identify movable bodies, specific
coming call, stop the vehicle in a small power radio stations (a
After connecting a cell phone, you can use safe location before taking the license is not required) and ama-
the following functions. incoming phone call. When you teur radio stations (a license is
have to absolutely take a phone required) are being operated.
Function Page
call, tell the caller “I’ll call you (These three types of radio sta-
Making a phone call 5-52 back”. And then call the caller tions are hereinafter referred to
Taking/declining an incoming back after stopping the vehicle in as “other radio stations.”) Before
call 5-52 a safe location. using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio
Registering phonebook data 5-53
stations” are being operated in
Using and setting phonebook 5-55 CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental
data radio interference from this
Deleting data 5-56 . Do not leave a cell phone in the equipment to “other radio sta-
vehicle. The temperature in the tions,” move the equipment to
Even when no cell phones are connected, vehicle may become extremely another location as soon as
you may be able to set the following items. high and cause a malfunction of possible to avoid radio interfer-
the cell phone. ence. The frequency band used

by this equipment is in the 2.4 Hands-free mode, press the ON hook

GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation switch .
is employed as a modulation ! Menu list of the Hands-free system
method. The expected inflicting (when not using the voice com-
interference distance is less than mand system)
33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses
a full band and can avoid a band “TUNE/TRACK” dial:
used by a movable body identifi-
cation device.
Type A, B, C and D
audio
& Using the Hands-free system

! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
Type E audio
1. Press the OFF hook switch to turn

on the Hands-free mode.
2. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK” dial to select
a menu, and then press the dial to enter
the selected menu.
1) OFF hook switch

2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch
To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
OFF hook switch . To turn off the
– CONTINUED –

First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page

PHONE BOOK* ADD ENTRY BY VOICE Adding a new number by voice 5-53
BY PHONE Adding a new number by cell phone 5-53
MANUAL INPUT Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-54
CALL HISTORY Adding a new number from the call history 5-54
GO BACK
LIST NAMES — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-55
CHANGE NAME — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-55
SET SPD DIAL — Registering a speed dial 5-55
DELETE ENTRY — Deleting phonebook data 5-56
DEL SPD DIAL — Deleting a registered speed dial 5-56
GO BACK —
REDIAL DIAL — Redialing 5-52
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history 5-54
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-56
GO BACK —
CALL BACK DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-52
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history 5-54
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-56
GO BACK —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.


SETUP SECURITY SET PIN Setting a PIN code 5-56
PHBK LOCK Locking the phonebook 5-56
PHBK UNLOCK Unlocking the phonebook 5-57
GO BACK
PHONE SETUP PAIR PHONE Registering a new cell phone 5-51
SELECT PHONE Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-51
CHANGE NAME Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-57
LIST PHONES Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-57
SET PASSKEY Changing the pass key 5-58
DELETE Deleting the registered cell phone 5-58
GO BACK
SYSTEM SETUP GUIDANCE VOL Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-58
INITIALIZE Initialization 5-58
SEL LANGUAGE Selecting the language (using Hands-free system) 5-58
GO BACK
GO BACK —
– CONTINUED –

! Menu list of the Hands-free system The commands available for the voice
(when using voice command sys- command system are listed in the follow-
tem) (type A, B and E audio) ing chart.
NOTE
. Press the talk switch and say
“Help” to listen to the help guidance.
. For models with the multi function
display, a list of enabled voice com-
mands can be shown on the multi
function display.
1) OFF hook switch

2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch
To turn on the voice command system,
press the talk switch briefly. To turn off
the voice command system, wait for 5
seconds without using the voice command
system.

English:
Phone book* Add entry By voice Adding a new number by voice 5-53
By phone Adding a new number by cell phone 5-53
Call history Adding a new number from call history 5-54
Go back
List names Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-55
Change name Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-55
Set speed dial Registering a speed dial 5-55
Delete entry Deleting phonebook data 5-56
Delete speed dial Deleting a registered speed dial 5-56
Go back
Redial Dial Redialing 5-52
Store Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-54
Delete Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-56
Go back
Callback Dial Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-52
Store Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-54
Delete Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-56
Go back
*: If a cell phone is not registered, you cannot use this command.
– CONTINUED –


Setup Security Set PIN Setting a PIN code 5-56
Phone book lock*1 Locking the phonebook 5-56
Phone book unlock*1 Unlocking the phonebook 5-57
Go back
Phone setup Pair phone Registering a new cell phone*2 5-51
Select phone Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-51
Change name Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-57
List phones Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-57
Set passkey Changing the pass key 5-58
Delete Deleting the registered cell phone 5-58
Go back
Dial by name Making a phone call by saying a name 5-52
Dial by number Making a phone call by saying a number 5-52
Outgoing*3 Selecting an outgoing call history when adding a new number 5-54
from the call history
Incoming*3 Selecting an incoming call history when adding a new number 5-54
from the call history
*1: If a PIN code is not registered, you cannot use these commands.
*2: Up to 5 cell phones can be registered.
*3: Select the “Phone book” menu then select the “Add entry” menu. Only after then selecting the “Call history” menu will these menus become available
for use.

Français:
Premier menu Deuxième menu Troisième menu Détails Page
Registre* Ajouter l’entrée Vocalement Ajout d’un nouveau numéro par la voix 5-53
Par téléphone Ajout d’un nouveau numéro par le téléphone cellulaire 5-53
Historique d’appels Ajout d’un nouveau numéro à partir de l’historique des appels 5-54
Retourner
Lister les noms Affichage de la liste des noms enregistrés dans le répertoire 5-55
Modifier le nom Changement du nom enregistré dans le répertoire 5-55
Configurer composition abrégée Enregistrement d’un appel rapide 5-55
Supprimer l’entrée Effacement de données du répertoire 5-56
Supprimer composition abrégée Effacement d’une composition rapide enregistrée 5-56
Retourner
Recomposer Composer Rappel du dernier numéro 5-52
Enregistrer Ajout d’un nouveau numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des 5-54
historiques des appels sortants
Supprimer Suppression d’un numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des 5-56

historiques des appels sortants
Retourner
Rappel Appel du numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des historiques
Composer des appels entrants 5-52
Enregistrer Ajout d’un nouveau numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des 5-54
historiques des appels entrants
Supprimer Suppression d’un numéro enregistré dans la mémoire des 5-56

historiques des appels entrants
Retourner
*: Si un téléphone cellulaire n’est pas enregistré, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette commande.
– CONTINUED –

Premier menu Deuxième menu Troisième menu Détails Page

Réglages Sécurité Configurer NIP Réglage du code PIN 5-56
Verrouiller le registre*1 Verrouillage du répertoire 5-56
1
Déverrouiller le registre* Déverrouillage du répertoire 5-57
Retourner
Réglages du téléphone Jumeler le téléphone Enregistrement d’un nouveau téléphone cellulaire*2 5-51
Sélectionner le téléphone Sélection du téléphone cellulaire à utiliser 5-51
Modifier le nom Changement du nom enregistré du téléphone cellulaire 5-57
Lister les téléphones Affichage de la liste des téléphones cellulaires enregistrés 5-57
Configurer le passe-partout Changement du mot de passe 5-58
Supprimer Effacement d’un téléphone cellulaire enregistré 5-58
Retourner
Composer par nom Passer un appel en dictant le nom 5-52
Composer par numéro Passer un appel en dictant le numéro 5-52
Sortant*3 Sélectionner un historique d’appels sortants lors de l’ajout 5-54
d’un nouveau numéro à partir de l’historique des appels
Entrant*3 Sélectionner un historique d’appels entrants lors de l’ajout 5-54
d’un nouveau numéro à partir de l’historique des appels
*1: Si un code PIN n’est pas enregistré, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces commandes.
*2: Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu’à 5 téléphones.
*3: Vous ne pouvez sélectionner ces menus qu’après avoir sélectionné, dans l’ordre, les menus “Registre”, “Ajouter l’entrée” puis “Historique d’appels”.

The other commands available for the voice command system are listed in the following chart.
Command
Details
English Français
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro) —
2 1 (one) 1 (un) —
3 2 (two) 2 (deux) —
4 3 (three) 3 (trois) —
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre) —
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq) —
7 6 (six) 6 (six) —
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept) —
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit) —
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf) —
11 * (star) * (étoile) —
12 # (pound) # (carré, dièse) —
13 + (plus) + (plus) —
14 cancel annuler Turning off the Hands-free system
15 help aide Listening to the help guidance
16 repeat répéter Repeat the help guidance that you listened to before speaking the “repeat”
command.
17 previous précédent
18 confirm confirmer
19 PHONE BOOK add entry ajouter l’entrée dans le re- Adding a new number
gistre
– CONTINUED –

Command
Details
English Français
20 PHONE BOOK change modifier le nom dans le Changing a name registered in the phonebook
name registre
21 PHONE BOOK delete entry supprimer

tre
l’entrée du regis- Deleting phonebook data
22 PHONE BOOK list names lister les noms du registre Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook
23 PHONE BOOK set speed configurer composition Registering a speed dial

dial abrégée pour le registre
24 PHONE BOOK delete supprimer composition Deleting a registered speed dial

speed dial abrégée pour le registre

! Preparation for using the Hands- name. – Select the “RECORD NAME”
free system – Go to your phone’s setting menu menu.
and access the Bluetooth device – Press the talk switch .
! When no cell phones are regis- menu. 5. Say the name (voice tag) to be
tered – Scan for available Bluetooth de- registered.
Before using the Hands-free system, it is vices. 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
necessary to register a cell phone in the – “CAR M_MEDIA” should be dis- – After “CAR M_MEDIA” is displayed,
system. Perform the following procedure played on your phone as an available a pass key will be displayed.
to register a cell phone. device. Select this device. 7. Input the displayed pass key into the
1. Press the OFF hook switch . – After “CAR M_MEDIA” is selected, cell phone while “PKY: ****” is displayed.
a pass key will be displayed. – If you input the correct pass key,
2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS” by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. 8. Input the displayed pass key from the “PAIRED” will be displayed and the
radio into the cell phone while “PKY: ****” registration procedure will be finished.
3. Press the “TUNE/TRACK” dial when
is displayed on the radio. – If you input an incorrect pass key,
the language of your choice is displayed.
– If you input the correct pass key, “FAILED” will be displayed and the
– “WELCOME!” will be displayed.
“PAIRED” will be displayed and the registration procedure will not be
– Voice prompts will now begin to registration procedure will be finished.
help guide you through the pairing successful.
– If you input an incorrect pass key,
process.
“FAILED” will be displayed and the ! Selecting a cell phone
4. Press the “TUNE/TRACK” dial or the registration procedure will not be
talk switch to begin the pairing To select the registered cell phone for
successful. connecting to the in-vehicle equipment,
process.
perform the following procedure.
5. Perform either of the following proce- ! Registering a cell phone
dures. To register a cell phone to the in-vehicle 1. Select the “SETUP” menu.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu equipment, perform the following proce- 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu.
by using the “TUNE/TRACK” dial or dure. 3. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu.
– Press the talk switch located on – If no cell phones are registered,
the steering wheel. 1. Select the “SETUP” menu.
“EMPTY” will be displayed and the
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu. mode will change to the “PHONE
registered. 3. Select the “PAIR PHONE” menu. SETUP” mode.
7. Press the talk switch and say the 4. Perform either of the following proce- 4. Select the cell phone by performing
word “Confirm” to confirm the recorded dures.
– CONTINUED –

either of the following procedures. ! Making a phone call by saying 2. Select the preferred number by oper-
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. number ating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
– Press the talk switch and say 3. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
the voice tag. OFF hook switch .
2. Press the talk switch .
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
3. Say “DIAL BY NUMBER”. ! Callback
– “SELECTED” will be displayed, the
selected cell phone will be connected 4. Press the talk switch again.
1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
to the in-vehicle equipment and the 5. Say the preferred phone number to be
called. 2. Select the preferred number by oper-
mode will change to the “PHONE ating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
SETUP” mode. 6. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
3. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
– If the selected cell phone cannot be OFF hook switch .
OFF hook switch .
connected, “FAILED” will be displayed
and the mode will change to the ! Making a phone call from speed
! Making a phone call from list
“PHONE SETUP” mode. dial
name
It is possible to select a phone number
! Making a phone call from speed dial registered with the in- It is possible to select a phone number
vehicle equipment to make a phone call. from the list name registered with the in-
! Making a phone call by saying vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
name 1. Press the preset button (from to For details, refer to “List names function”
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). ) to which the preferred number is F5-55.
registered.
2. Press the talk switch . ! Top redial
2. Press the OFF hook switch .
3. Say “DIAL BY NAME”. 1. Press the OFF hook switch and
4. Press the talk switch again. load the outgoing call history.
5. Say the preferred name (voice tag) to NOTE
2. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
be called. When a preset button for which num- OFF hook switch .
– Then the called name (voice tag) or bers are not registered is pressed, an
the corresponding phone number will error message will be indicated on the ! Taking a phone call and declining
be displayed. audio screen. an incoming call
6. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the ! Redial To take a phone call: Press the OFF
OFF hook switch . hook switch .
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.

To put an incoming call on hold (only if Press the speech volume control switch to 7. Perform either of the following proce-
the cell phone has this function): Press the the “ ” side to increase the speech dures.
ON hook switch briefly. volume. Press the switch to the “ ” side – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
to decrease the volume. by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
To decline an incoming call (only if the
cell phone has this function): Press and During a call, press the talk switch to – Press the talk switch .
hold the ON hook switch . turn the microphone off. Press the talk 8. Say the name (voice tag) to be
switch once again to turn the micro- registered.
! Ending a call
phone on. 9. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
Press the ON hook switch . – Then “STORED” will be displayed
! Volume control ! Adjustable level of each volume and the mode will change to the
registering speed dial mode. Refer to
Volume Range Initial setting “Registering speed dial” F5-55.
Phone call 0 to 14 7
! Registering by phone
Voice 0 to 14 7
Voice guidance 0 to 6 3 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu.
! Registering phonebook data 3. Select the “BY PHONE” menu.
NOTE – Then “TRANSFER” will be dis-
The maximum number of phonebook played.
entries that can be registered in the
5. Transfer the data from the cell phone.
phonebook is 50.
For details about transferring the data,
1) Volume control switch ! Registering by voice refer to the instruction manual of the cell
2) Speech volume control switch phone.
3) Talk switch
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu. 7. Perform either of the following proce-
Press the volume control switch to the “+” 3. Select the “BY VOICE” menu.
side to increase the phone call volume, dures.
4. Press the talk switch . – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
voice volume and voice guidance volume.
Press the switch to the “−” side to 5. Say the phone number to be regis- by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
decrease the volume. tered. – Press the talk switch .
– CONTINUED –

8. Say the name (voice tag) to be NOTE the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.

registered. While inputting the phone numbers, if 3. Select the “STORE” menu.
9. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. “GO BACK” is chosen using the 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– Then “STORED” will be displayed “TUNE/TRACK” dial, the character that 5. Perform either of the following proce-
and the mode will change to the was input last will be deleted. dures.
registering speed dial mode. Refer to – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
“Registering speed dial” F5-55. ! Registering from call history
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. – Press the talk switch .
! Registering by inputting manu- 2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu.
ally 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
3. Select the “CALL HISTORY” menu. registered.
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. 4. Select the “OUTGOING” or “INCOM- 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu. ING” menu. – Then “STORED” will be displayed
3. Select the “MANUAL INPUT” menu by 5. Select the phone number by operating and the mode will change to the
operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. registering speed dial mode. Refer to
4. Input the phone number to be regis- 6. Perform either of the following proce- “Registering speed dial” F5-55.
tered. dures.
5. Perform either of the following proce- – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu ! Registering from call back
dures. by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. 1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu – Press the talk switch . 2. Select the phone number by operating
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. 7. Say the name (voice tag) to be the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
– Press the talk switch . registered. 3. Select the “STORE” menu.
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be 8. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
registered. – Then “STORED” will be displayed 5. Perform either of the following proce-
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. and the mode will change to the dures.
– Then “STORED” will be displayed registering speed dial mode. Refer to – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
and the mode will change to the “Registering speed dial” F5-55. by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
registering speed dial mode. Refer to – Press the talk switch .
“Registering speed dial” F5-55. ! Registering from redial
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu. registered.
2. Select the phone number by operating 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.

– Then “STORED” will be displayed can select the following menus. the voice tag.
and the mode will change to the 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only
registering speed dial mode. Refer to . “DIAL” to make a phone call
after saying the voice tag).
“Registering speed dial” F5-55. . “CHANGE NAME” to change the name – Then the selected phone number/
(voice tag) name will be displayed.
! Registering speed dial . “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET SPEED DIAL” 5. Perform either of the following proce-
1. After registering phonebook data, se- to set the speed dial dures.
lect the “SPEED DIAL” menu. . “DELETE ENTRY” to delete the name – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
2. Press the preset button (from to (voice tag) from the phonebook by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
) to which you want to register the . “GO BACK” to go back to the menu – Press the talk switch .
phone number. mode
6. Say the new voice tag.
NOTE 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
NOTE . After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if – Then “CHANGED” will be dis-
If the number to be used is already the OFF hook switch is pushed, the played.
registered in speed dial, “OVER- selected number will be called.
WRITE?” will be displayed. . After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if ! Set speed dial
no operation is performed, the mem- 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
! Using and setting phonebook data ories will be displayed and voice tags 2. Select the “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET
! List names function will be spoken. After all memories/ SPEED DIAL” menu.
voice tags are displayed/spoken, 3. Select the phone number by perform-
The voice tags registered in the phone- “END OF LIST” will be displayed and
book are spoken by using the list names ing either of the following procedures.
the mode will change to the “PHONE
function. To use the list names function, – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
BOOK” menu mode.
perform the following procedure. – Press the talk switch and say
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. ! Changing voice tag the voice tag.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only
2. Select the “LIST NAMES” menu. 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
after saying the voice tag).
3. Select the registered data by perform- 2. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu.
5. Press the preset button (from to
ing either of the following procedures. 3. Select the phone number by perform- ) to which you want to register the
– Press the talk switch . ing either of the following procedures. phone number.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
4. After “SELECTED” is displayed, you – Press the talk switch and say
– CONTINUED –

NOTE ! Deleting the redial data 1. Select the “SET PIN” menu.
If the number to be used is already 1. Select the “REDIAL” menu. – Then “CURRENT PIN?” will be
registered in speed dial, “OVER- displayed.
2. Select the phone number by operating
WRITE?” will be displayed. 2. Input the current PIN code by perform-
the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
ing either of the following procedures.
! Deleting data 3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
! Deleting the phonebook data – Press the talk switch and say
– Then “DELETED” will be displayed the number.
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. and the selected redial data will be
2. Select the “DELETE ENTRY” menu. deleted.
4. Input the new PIN code by performing
3. Select the phone number by perform- either of the following procedures.
ing either of the following procedures. ! Deleting the callback data
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. 1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu.
– Press the talk switch and say
– Press the talk switch and say 2. Select the phone number by operating the number.
the voice tag. the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
– Then “DELETED” will be displayed 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. ! Locking the phonebook
and the selected phonebook data will – Then “DELETED” will be displayed
be deleted. and the selected callback data will be CAUTION
deleted.
! Deleting the speed dial After locking the phonebook, you
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. & Bluetooth® settings cannot unlock the phonebook with-
2. Select the “DEL SPD DIAL”/“DELETE out inputting the PIN code. Do not
! Security setting forget the PIN code after locking the
SPEED DIAL” menu.
3. Press the preset button (from to 1. Select the “SETUP” menu. phonebook.
) to which you want to delete the 2. Select the “SECURITY” menu.
speed dial. 3. Perform the following procedures. 1. Select the “PHBK LOCK”/“PHONE-
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. BOOK LOCK” menu.
– Then “DELETED” will be displayed ! Setting PIN code – Then “CURRENT PIN?” will be
and the selected speed dial will be displayed.
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is
deleted. used when locking the phonebook. 2. Input the PIN code by performing

either of the following procedures. displayed. “EMPTY” will be displayed and the
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. mode will change to the “PHONE
– Press the talk switch and say NOTE SETUP” mode.
the number. If the phonebook is not locked, “UN- 2. Select the cell phone by performing
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. LOCK” will be displayed and the mode either of the following procedures.
will change to the security mode. – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
– If the inputted PIN code is correct,
“LOCKED” will be displayed and the 2. Input the PIN code by performing – Press the talk switch and say
phonebook will be locked. either of the following procedures. the voice tag.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. 3. Perform either of the following proce-
NOTE – Press the talk switch and say dures.
While the phonebook is locked, if the the number. – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
operation restricted menu is selected, 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
“PHBK LOCK” will be displayed. – If the inputted PIN code is correct, – Press the talk switch .
“UNLOCKED” will be displayed and 4. Say the new voice tag to be registered.
! Unlocking the phonebook the phonebook will be unlocked. 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– “CHANGED” will be displayed and
NOTE ! Phone setup the mode will change to the “PHONE
If you have forgotten your PIN code 1. Select the “SETUP” menu. SETUP” mode.
and/or are somehow unable to unlock 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu.
the phonebook, the phonebook lock ! List phones function
3. Perform the following procedures.
can be released by initializing the The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell
registered data and re-setting the PIN phone list are spoken by using the list
code. However, initializing the data will ! Setting pair phone
phones function.
cause all data registered in the hands- Refer to “Registering a cell phone” F5-51.
free system, such as the registration 1. Select the “LIST PHONES” menu.
! Selecting phone – If no cell phones are registered,
devices and phonebook data, to be
erased. For initialization, refer to “In- Refer to “Selecting a cell phone” F5-51. “EMPTY” will be displayed and the
itializing the registered data” F5-58. ! Changing the voice tag of the cell mode will change to the “PHONE
SETUP” mode.
1. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK”/“PHONE- phone
BOOK UNLOCK” menu. 2. Registered cell phones will be dis-
1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu. played in the saved order. While dis-
– Then “CURRENT PIN?” will be – If no cell phones are registered, played, if the “TUNE/TRACK” dial is
– CONTINUED –

turned, the next registered cell phone will the passkey will be changed and the the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
be displayed. Press the ON hook button mode will change to the “PHONE
to close the Hands-free menu. SETUP” mode. ! Initializing the registered data
3. Select a cell phone by performing To initialize the registered data, perform
either of the following procedures. ! Deleting registered cell phone the following procedure.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. from the list
– Press the talk switch . 1. Select the “DELETE” menu. 1. Select the “INITIALIZE” menu by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
4. After “SELECTED” is displayed, you 2. Select a cell phone to be deleted by
can select the following menus. performing either of the following proce- 2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu by oper-
dures. ating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
. “SELECT PHONE” to connect the – First “PLEASE WAIT”, then “INITI-
selected cell phone ALIZED” will be displayed. The regis-
– Press the talk switch and say
. “CHANGE NAME” to change the voice the voice tag.
tered data will be initialized and the
tag mode will change to the last mode.
. “DELETE” to delete the selected cell
– “DELETED” will be displayed, the ! Selecting language
phone from the list
data will be deleted and the mode will
. “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE change to the “PHONE SETUP”
To select the language, perform the
SETUP” mode following procedure.
mode.
1. Select the “SEL LANGUAGE” menu
! Setting passkey ! System setup by operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu. 1. Select the “SETUP” menu. 2. Select the preferred language by
– After the currently set passkey is 2. Select the “SYSTEM SETUP” menu. operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial.
displayed, a new passkey can be
3. Perform the following procedures.
entered. & Tips for the Hands-free sys-
2. Input the new passkey by performing tem
! Setting guidance volume
either of the following procedures.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. To set the guidance volume, perform the ! Bluetooth®
– Press the talk switch and say following procedure. It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
the passkey. 1. Select the “GUIDANCE VOL” menu by in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. operating the “TUNE/TRACK” dial. tooth® format (wireless) to make a phone
– The new passkey will be displayed, 2. Set the guidance volume by operating call from the in-vehicle equipment or take

an incoming phone call. activated after making a call. Deacti- – Driving with a window open
Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless, a vate the automatic dial lock function of – When air from the ventilator
connection between the in-vehicle equip- the cell phone before using the Hands- blows directly towards the micro-
ment and the cell phone can be made free system. phone
without placing them in close proximity of . Depending on the type of cell phone – When the sound coming from the
each other. The cell phone can be used that is used, operation and the sound ventilator is loud
with it left in the breast pocket or bag. volume may be different from those of – When the cell phone is too close
cell phones currently used. to the microphone
NOTE . When the ignition switch is turned to . The sound quality may degrade due
. The Hands-free system may not the “LOCK”/“OFF” position during a to the influence of the cell phone that is
operate properly under the following call, the call may be disconnected or connected to the system or the circum-
conditions. continued on the cell phone depending stances of the Bluetooth network.
– The cell phone is turned off. on the type of cell phone that is used. . When another Bluetooth® device is
– The cell phone is not in the Note that operation of the cell phone simultaneously connected, noise may
phone call area. may be necessary if the call is con- be heard in the voice coming from the
– The battery of the cell phone has tinued on the cell phone. hands-free phone.
run down. . Do not speak at the same time as the
– The cell phone is not connected other party during a call. If you and the ! Corresponding profiles for the cell
to the Hands-free system. other party speak at the same time, it phone
– The cell phone is behind the seat may be difficult for the other party to . HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0
or in the glove box. hear your voice and vice versa. This is . OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
– A metal material covers or normal.
touches the cell phone. . The receiver sound volume should
. Depending on the type of cell phone be set as low as possible. Otherwise,
that is used, the screen on the cell the party you are calling may notice an
phone may remain illuminated while undesirable echo sound.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” . Speak clearly and loudly.
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi- . It may be difficult for the other party
nation off by adjusting the cell phone to hear your voice under the following
settings. conditions.
. Depending on the setting of the cell – Driving on a rough road
phone, the dial lock function may be – Driving at a high speed
– CONTINUED –

& Certification for the Hands- même si le brouillage est susceptible cet équipement doit être installé et
free system d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. utilisé en gardant une distance de 20
cm ou plus entre le dispositive rayon-
CAUTION NOTE nant et le corps (à l’exception des
This equipment complies with FCC/IC extrémités: mains, poignets, pieds et
FCC CAUTION radiation exposure limits set forth for chevilles).
Changes or modifications not ex- an uncontrolled environment and This transmitter must not be co-located
pressly approved by the party re- meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) or operated in conjunction with any
sponsible for compliance could void Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C other antenna or transmitter.
the user’s authority to operate the to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This ! Mexico models
equipment.
equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply with-
NOTE out maximum permissive exposure
This device complies with Part 15 of evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
FCC Rules and Industry Canada li- that it should be installed and operated
cence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera- keeping the radiator at least 20cm or
tion is subject to the following two more away from person’s body (ex-
conditions: (1) this device may not cluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
cause interference, and (2) this device and ankles).
must accept any interference, includ- Cet équipement est conforme aux
ing interference that may cause unde- limites d’exposition aux rayonnements
sired operation of this device. énoncées pour un environnement non
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la contrôlé et respecte les règles les
partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux directrices d’exposition dans le Sup-
appareils radio exempts de licence. plément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne 102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) énergie RF très faible qui est considér-
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter ée conforme sans évaluation de l’expo-
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, sition maximale autorisée. Cependant,


————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

Interior equipment
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2 Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-11

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-12
Cargo area light .................................................. 6-2 Shopping bag hook ........................................... 6-12
Map lights ........................................................... 6-3 Convenient hook................................................ 6-13
OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3 Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-13
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4 Using the cover ................................................. 6-13
Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4 To install the front cover .................................... 6-14
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-5 To remove the front cover .................................. 6-14
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5 To remove the cover housing ............................. 6-14
Glove box ........................................................... 6-6 Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-15
Center console.................................................... 6-6 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-15 6
Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-7 Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................... 6-16
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-7 Under-floor storage compartment (if
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-7 equipped) ........................................................ 6-16
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) ........... 6-8 Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-17
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-8 How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-18
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-9 Viewing range on the screen .............................. 6-18
Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped) ............. 6-10 Help line............................................................ 6-20

6-2 Interior equipment/Interior lights
Interior lights DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- & Cargo area light
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
CAUTION opened.
. The doors or the rear gate are un-
When leaving your vehicle, make locked using the keyless access function
sure the lights are turned off to (if equipped). Refer to “Locking and
avoid battery discharge. unlocking with “keyless access” entry
function” F2-11.
. The doors or the rear gate are un-
& Dome light locked using the remote keyless entry
system. Refer to “Remote keyless entry
system” F2-17.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- 1) ON
tion. 2) OFF
ON: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
three positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.

Interior equipment/Interior lights 6-3
& Map lights ! Door interlock switch illuminate when only the rear gate is
opened.)
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry function” F2-11.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
& OFF delay timer

1) Map light switch (lens) 1) Door interlock switch
The following lights have an automatic
To turn on the map light, push the lens. Although the map light switches (lenses) illumination function.
To turn it off, push the lens again. are in the OFF position (manually off), the . dome light
map lights can be set to illuminate auto- . map light
matically in conjunction with a door open- . cargo area light
ing, etc. by use of the door interlock
switch. The door interlock switch has the After being illuminated automatically,
following positions. these lights remain on for several seconds
and then gradually turn off under the
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate following conditions.
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. However, the lights can be . after all doors and the rear gate are
turned on manually by pushing the map closed (dome light)
light switches (lenses). . after all doors are closed (map light)
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto- . after the rear gate is closed (cargo area
matically in the following cases. light)
. Any of the doors other than the rear While the lights are illuminated, if any of
gate is opened. (The map lights do not the following operations are performed,
– CONTINUED –

6-4 Interior equipment/Sun visors
the lights turn off immediately. Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the keyless access function (if
equipped).
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry system.
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for details. For
models with multi function display, the
With the sun visor positioned over the side
setting can be changed by operating the
To block out glare, swing down the visors. window, you can use the sun visor
multi function display. For details, refer to
To use the sun visor at a side window, extension plate to prevent glare through
“Interior light off delay timer setting” F3-
swing it down and move it sideways. the gap between the sun visor and center
75.
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.

Interior equipment/Storage compartment 6-5
& Vanity mirror Storage compartment

CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid . Always keep the storage com-
being temporarily blinded by the partment closed while driving to
glare of bright light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
CAUTION ment.
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
– CONTINUED –

6-6 Interior equipment/Storage compartment
& Glove box & Center console

The center console box provides a sto-
rage space.
1) Paper holder (if equipped)

2) Pen holder
1) Lock
2) Unlock The top of the console can be used as an
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To 1) Coin tray armrest.
close it, push the lid firmly upward. 2) Accessory tray
3) Card holder
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
The lid located inside the center console
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
can be used as a coin tray or an
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
accessory tray for small items. There is a
card holder on the reverse side of the lid.
When the lid inside the center console is
removed, you can use a pen holder.
For some models, the armrest is adjus-

table. Slide the armrest to the desired

Interior equipment/Cup holders 6-7
position. Cup holders

& Overhead console (if
equipped) CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,

if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built into the console.
CAUTION
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
To open the console, push on the console while you are driving, as this may
lid lightly and the lid will automatically distract you and lead to an accident.
open.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is in the sun or
on a warm day, the inside of the
overhead console heats up. Avoid
storing plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles such as a The divider in the cup holder can be pulled
lighter in the overhead console. out.
– CONTINUED –

6-8 Interior equipment/Bottle holders
NOTE Bottle holders

. The shape of the front passenger’s
cup holder may be slightly different
depending on the model. CAUTION
. With the divider taken out, the cup
holder can be used as a storage box. . Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
& Rear passenger’s cup holder this may distract you and lead to
(if equipped) an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
CAUTION bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
When a cup in the rear passenger’s
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest. could spill when opening/closing
cup holder contains a beverage, do
the door or while driving and, if
not fold down the rear seatback.
the beverage is hot, it could burn
Otherwise, the beverage could spill
you and/or your passengers.
and, if the beverage is hot, it could
burn you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets 6-9
trim can be used to hold a beverage bottle Accessory power outlets

and other items.
Power outlet in the cargo area
Accessory power outlets are provided

Power outlet below the climate control below the climate control dials, in the
center console and in the cargo area.
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery
is available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
Power outlet in the center console power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
– CONTINUED –

6-10 Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
CAUTION tight for the accessory power knob and wait a few moments. It will
outlet, this can result in a poor automatically spring up when ready for
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette contact or cause the plug to get use.
lighter in the accessory power stuck. Only use plugs that fit
outlets. properly. WARNING
. Do not place any foreign objects, . Use of an electric appliance in the To avoid being burned, never grasp
especially metal ones such as accessory power outlet for a long the lighter by the end with the
coins or aluminum foil, into the period of time while the engine is heating element. Doing so could
accessory power outlet. That not running can cause battery result in injury and could also
could cause a short circuit. Al- discharge. damage the heating element.
ways put the cap on the acces- . Before driving your vehicle, make
sory power outlet when it is not sure that the plug and the cord
in use. on your electrical appliance will CAUTION
. Use only electrical appliances not interfere with your shifting
which are designed for 12V DC. gears and operating the accel- . Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
erator and brake pedals. If they because it will overheat.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected do, do not use the electrical . The electrical power socket is
is 120W. Do not use an appliance appliance while driving. originally designed to use a gen-
which exceeds the indicated wat- uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
tage for each outlet. plug. Do not use a non-genuine
& Use with a cigarette lighter (if cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
When using appliances con- equipped) et. Doing so may cause a short-
nected to two or more outlets circuit and overheating, resulting
simultaneously, the total power To use the accessory power outlet as a
cigarette lighter socket, purchase the in a fire.
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Overloading the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional . If the socket is ever used for a
accessory power outlet can accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is plug-in accessory such as a cell
cause a short circuit. Do not use available from your SUBARU dealer. phone, that may damage the
double adapters or more than The cigarette lighter operates only when portion of the socket’s internal
one electrical appliance. the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” mechanism that causes a cigar-
position. ette lighter plug to “pop out”
. If the plug on your electric appli- after its lighter element is heated.
ance is either too loose or too To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
Therefore, do not place a cigar-

Interior equipment/Ashtray 6-11
ette lighter plug in a socket that Ashtray (if equipped)

has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
so may cause the plug to stick CAUTION
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard. . Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
cigarette butt and start a fire. locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
. Do not put flammable material in holders” F6-7. For the locations of the
the ashtray. bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-
8.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray. When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.

6-12 Interior equipment/Floor mat
Floor mat (if equipped) . Do not use more than one floor Shopping bag hook
mat.
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
CAUTION Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.
If the floor mat slips forward and The floor mat should be properly secured
interferes with the movement of the using the built-in grommets, by placing the
pedals during driving, it could cause grommets over the pins and pushing them
an accident. Observe the following downward.
precautions to prevent the floor mat A shopping bag hook is attached to each
from slipping forward. side of the cargo area.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.

Interior equipment/Convenient hook 6-13
Convenient hook Cargo area cover (if

equipped)
CAUTION
The cargo area cover is provided for
. Do not hang items on the con- covering the cargo area and to protect its
venient hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
kg) or more. Depending on the detachable to make room for additional
conditions of use (for example, in cargo.
low temperatures, etc.), the rear
gate may lower even with lighter & Using the cover
loads. However, this is not a
malfunction. Be careful not to
hit your head or other body parts. A convenient hook is attached to the rear
. When using the convenient hook, gate trim. When the rear gate is open, you
do not try to close the rear gate. can hang a candle lantern, wet suit, etc.
Doing so may cause the item on on the hook.
the hook to be jammed in the rear
gate and damaged. Remove the
item from the hook before clos-
ing the rear gate.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
– CONTINUED –

6-14 Interior equipment/Cargo area cover
WARNING & To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
1. Align the right side of the front cover
gate stays while extending and
with the triangle mark before fixing the
rewinding the cover. Scratches on
cover in place.
the stays could cause leakage of 2. Push the cover housing to the right
gas from the stays, which may 2. Push the front cover to the right side
side and shorten it.
result in their inability to hold the and shorten the bar.
3. Take it off the retainer.
rear gate open. 3. Align the left side of the front cover
with the triangle mark before fixing the
cover in place.
& To install the front cover
& To remove the front cover
CAUTION 1. Push the front cover to the right side
and shorten the bar.
For models with a rear seat reclining
2. Remove the front cover.
mechanism, when reclining the rear
seatback, move the front cover
backward so that the cover is not
damaged.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover 6-15
& Stowage of the cargo area & To install the cover housing
cover
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
3. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end. 1. Insert the protrusion located on the
right end of the sleeve into the recess of
the retainer.
1. Pull the strap to open the center part of
the cargo floor lid, and then remove the lid.
2. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
2. Push the cover housing to the right
– CONTINUED –

6-16 Interior equipment/Cargo tie–down hooks
side and shorten the bar. Cargo tie-down hooks Under-floor storage compart-
3. Insert the other protrusion into the ment (if equipped)
recess of the other retainer.
NOTE
The shape of the storage compartment
may be different depending on the
model.
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION The storage compartment is located under

the floor of the cargo area and can be
The cargo tie-down hooks are de- used to store small items. Pull the strap to
signed only for securing light cargo. open the center part of the cargo floor lid,
Never try to secure cargo that and then remove the lid.
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 44 CAUTION
lbs (20 kg) per hook.
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden

Interior equipment/Rear view camera 6-17
stop or an accident. Rear view camera (if limited, you should always check
. Do not store spray cans, contain- equipped) the rear view and the surround-
ers with flammable or corrosive ing area with your eyes and
liquids or any other dangerous mirrors, and move backward at
items in the storage compart- a slow speed. Moving backward
ment. only by checking the rear view
image from the camera could
cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
A rear view camera is attached to the rear
gate. When the ignition switch is “ON” and
the shift lever (MT models) or select lever CAUTION
(CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear . If your vehicle is washed with a
view image behind the vehicle on the multi high-pressure washer, do not
function display. allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water into the
WARNING camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
. Since the rear view camera uses
electric shock.
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the . Since the camera is a precision
actual view in terms of distance. device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
. Since the range and field of view
fire or electric shock may occur.
of the image on the monitor is
– CONTINUED –

6-18 Interior equipment/Rear view camera
. If mud or snow sticks to or is not to apply the wax to the camera. If it 2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.
frozen on the camera, you must comes in contact with the camera,
be very careful when removing it. moisten a clean cloth with a diluted NOTE
Otherwise, damage to the camera neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has a hard coating . The image of the rear view camera
may cause a fire or electric
to help prevent scratches. However, has priority over other screen displays.
shock. Pour water or lukewarm
when washing the vehicle or cleaning . The image of the rear view camera is
water over the camera to remove
the camera lens, be careful not to horizontally reversed as is the case
mud and ice, and wipe it with a
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
soft, dry cloth.
washing brush directly on the camera side view mirror.
. Do not put a flame close to the . It may be difficult to see the image of
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- lens. The image quality of the rear view
camera may deteriorate. the rear view camera in the following
mage or fire may occur. cases. This is not a malfunction of the
. Strong light shined on the camera
. When replacing the fuse, be sure lens may develop vertical lines around camera.
to use a fuse with the specified the light source. This is not a malfunc- – The vehicle is in a dark place (at
rating. Use of a fuse with a tion. night, in a tunnel, etc.).
different rating may result in a . Under fluorescent light, the display – The vehicle is in an extremely hot
malfunction. may flicker. However, this is not a or cold place.
. If the rear view camera is used for malfunction. – An object (such as raindrops,
a long time while the engine is . The image of the rear view camera snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
not operated, the battery may may be slightly different from the view of the rear view camera sticks
become completely discharged. actual color of the objects. to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
NOTE & How to use the rear view the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
camera
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, When the shift lever/select lever is set to & Viewing range on the screen
discoloration may occur. To remove “R”, the rear view camera automatically
contamination, wipe the camera with a displays the rear view image from the CAUTION
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral vehicle. When the lever is set to other
detergent and then wipe it with a soft, positions, the image before setting to “R” The range that can be viewed with
dry cloth. is displayed. the rear view camera is limited.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful 1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”. Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly.
Image from camera Range of view

The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
Range of view bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
Range of view wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
– CONTINUED –

6-20 Interior equipment/Rear view camera
tion cannot be seen on the screen. CAUTION ! When there is an upward slope at
the back
& Help line . When moving backward, always
The help line (distance marker and vehicle check the back with your eyes
width line) is a guide to help you realize without relying on the help lines.
the actual distance from the screen image. . The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi- 1) 3 feet (1 m)
tion.
The distance on the screen looks farther
! Difference between screen image than the actual distance.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) and actual road
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper The distance markers show the distance
(green horizontal line) for a level road when the vehicle is not
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line) loaded. It may be different from the actual
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper distance depending on the loading condi-
(yellow horizontal line) tions or road conditions.
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
position “R”, the monitor screen displays
the help lines together with the rear view
image.

! When there is a downward slope ! Feature of distance marker

at the back
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

Starting and operating
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3 Remote transmitter program (models without

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3 “keyless access with push-button start
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5 system”).......................................................... 7-19
System maintenance.......................................... 7-19
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7
Manual transmission ......................................... 7-21
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8
Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-22
Starting and stopping the engine (models Driving tips........................................................ 7-23
without push-button ignition switch) .............. 7-9
Continuously variable transmission................. 7-23
Starting engine.................................................... 7-9
Select lever ....................................................... 7-24
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11
Selection of manual mode (if equipped).............. 7-25
Starting and stopping engine (models with Selection of “L” (if equipped) ............................. 7-27
push-button start system) .............................. 7-11
Shift lock function ............................................. 7-28
Safety precautions ............................................. 7-11
Driving tips........................................................ 7-29
Operating range for push-button start 7
system............................................................. 7-11 SI-DRIVE (if equipped)....................................... 7-29
Starting engine................................................... 7-11 Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-29
Stopping engine ................................................. 7-13 Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-29
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-13 Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-30
Remote engine start system (dealer SI-DRIVE switches ............................................. 7-30
option).............................................................. 7-14 Power steering................................................... 7-31
Models with “keyless access with push-button Braking ............................................................... 7-32
start system” ................................................... 7-14 Braking tips....................................................... 7-32
Models without “keyless access with push-button Brake system .................................................... 7-32
start system” ................................................... 7-15 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-33
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-33
start................................................................. 7-18 ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-34
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start ABS warning light.............................................. 7-34
shutdown......................................................... 7-18
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
vehicle ............................................................. 7-18 system ............................................................. 7-34
Service mode (models without “keyless access Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-35
with push-button start system”)........................ 7-18 Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-36
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-37

Starting and operating
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-37 Hill start assist system...................................... 7-45
X-mode (if equipped).......................................... 7-39 To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist
To activate/deactivate the X-mode....................... 7-40 system ............................................................ 7-46
Hill descent control function ............................... 7-41 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light .................................................. 7-48
(U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-41 Cruise control (if equipped) .............................. 7-48
Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-43 To set cruise control .......................................... 7-49
Parking brake..................................................... 7-43 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-50
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-43 To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-50
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-50
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-52
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-52

Starting and operating/Fuel 7-3
Fuel gasoline will not be detrimental to engine ! Unleaded gasoline

durability, nor will it affect your warranty The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
coverage. However, depending on your to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
CAUTION driving habits and conditions, you may nozzle. Under no circumstances should
notice a decrease in maximum engine leaded gasoline be used because it will
Use of a fuel which is low in quality performance, fuel economy or slight en- damage the emission control system and
or use of an inappropriate fuel gine vibration or knocking. If you experi- may impair driveability and fuel economy.
additive may cause engine damage. ence any of these conditions while using a
lower octane rated fuel, you may want to ! Gasoline for California-certified
return to using 91 AKI (95 RON) octane LEV
& Fuel requirements rated fuel as soon as possible. Addition- If your vehicle was certified to California’s
ally, if your vehicle knocks heavily or low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
! Non-turbo models persistently, or if you are driving with indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
The engine is designed to operate using heavy loads such as when towing a trailer, it is designed to optimize engine and
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating the use of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher emission performance with gasoline that
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. grade unleaded gasoline is required. meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
! Turbo models ! Fuel octane rating fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
The engine is designed to operate at This octane rating is the average of the vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
maximum performance using unleaded Research Octane and Motor Octane Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI numbers and is commonly referred to as side California is permitted to have higher
(98 RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) the Anti Knock Index (AKI). sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
fuel is not readily available, unleaded Using a gasoline with a lower octane mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI rating can cause persistent and heavy and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
(95 RON) or higher may be used with no knocking, which can damage the engine. smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
detriment to engine durability or driveabil- Do not be concerned if your vehicle a different brand of unleaded gasoline
ity. However, you may notice a slight sometimes knocks lightly when you drive having lower sulfur to determine if the
decrease in maximum engine perfor- up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact problem is fuel related before returning
mance while using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel. your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
the specified octane rating and your service.
Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher may
also be used. Using regular unleaded
– CONTINUED –

7-4 Starting and operating/Fuel
! MMT your vehicle, but should contain no more sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
Some gasoline contains an octane-en- than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- proper operation of your SUBARU. prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
Do not use any gasoline that contains under these conditions.
you use such fuels, your emission control more than 10% ethanol, including from
system performance may deteriorate and any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 . If undesirable driveability problems are
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- (which are only some examples of fuel experienced and you suspect they may be
function indicator light may turn on. If this containing more than 10% ethanol). fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
happens, return to your authorized line before seeking service at your
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
determined that the condition is caused now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of
be covered by your warranty. emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
Your use of gasoline with detergent If you are not sure what the fuel contains, CAUTION
additives will help prevent deposits from you should ask your service station
forming in your engine and fuel system. operators if their gasolines contain deter- Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
This helps keep your engine in tune and gents and oxygenates and if they have surfaces of the vehicle. Because
your emission control system working been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- fuel may damage the paint, be sure
properly, and is a way of doing your part sions. to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a As additional guidance, only use fuels Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
high quality fuel with the proper detergent suited for your vehicle as explained in the is not covered under the SUBARU
and other additives, you should never following description. Limited Warranty.
need to add any fuel system cleaning
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
agents to your fuel tank.
octane rating no lower than that specified
Many gasolines are now blended with in this manual.
materials called oxygenates. Use of these . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE Methanol can be used in your vehicle
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in mixture AND if it is accompanied by

Starting and operating/Fuel 7-5
& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid 1) Open

release lever up. The lever is on the floor 2) Close
at the left of the driver’s seat. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING
first touch the vehicle body or a . Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
metal portion of the fuel pump or mable. Before refueling, always
similar object to discharge any first stop the engine and close all
static electricity that may be present vehicle doors and windows.
on your body. If your body is carry- Make sure that there are no
ing an electrostatic charge, there is lighted cigarettes, open flames
a possibility that an electric spark or electrical sparks in the adja-
could ignite the fuel, which could cent area. Only handle fuel out-
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new doors. Quickly wipe up any
static electric charge, do not get spilled fuel.
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress. . When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
– CONTINUED –

7-6 Starting and operating/Fuel
left. Do not remove the cap ping mechanism may not func- warning light/malfunction indicator
quickly. Fuel may be under pres- tion, causing fuel to overflow the light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
sure and spray out of the fuel tank and creating a fire hazard. ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
filler neck, especially in hot . Stop refueling when the auto- dicator light” F3-14.
weather. If you hear a hissing matic stop mechanism on the
sound while you are removing fuel nozzle activates. If you con- CAUTION
the cap, wait for the sound to tinue to add fuel, temperature
stop and then slowly open the changes or other conditions . Never add any cleaning agents to
cap to prevent fuel from spraying may cause fuel to overflow from the fuel tank. The addition of a
out and creating a fire hazard. the tank and create a fire hazard. cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler . After refueling, turn the cap to the
pump automatically stops. Do not add any right until it clicks to ensure that
more fuel. it is fully tightened. If the cap is
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise not securely tightened, fuel may
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain leak out while the vehicle is being
not to catch the tether under the cap while driven or fuel spillage could
tightening. occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the surfaces of the vehicle. Because
painted surface could be damaged. fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder NOTE spilled fuel is not covered under
inside the fuel filler lid. . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . Always use a genuine SUBARU
WARNING door (lid) is located on the right side of fuel filler cap. If you use the
the vehicle.
. When refueling, insert the fuel wrong cap, it may not fit or have
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened proper venting and your fuel tank
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
until it clicks or if the tether is caught and emission control system
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE may be damaged. It could also
fully inserted, its automatic stop-

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7
lead to fuel spillage and a fire. State emission testing (U.S. have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
. Immediately put fuel in the tank inspect your vehicle’s emission control
only) system. If your vehicle does not pass this
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires test, some states may deny renewal of
as a result of an empty tank WARNING your vehicle’s registration.
could cause damage to the en- Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
gine. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model that monitors the performance of the
must NEVER be performed on a engine’s emission control system. Certi-
single two-wheel dynamometer. At- fied emission inspectors will inspect the
tempting to do so will result in On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
uncontrolled vehicle movement and part of the state emission inspection
may cause an accident or injuries to process. The OBDII system is designed
persons nearby. to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
CAUTION inspections apply to all 1996 model year
. At state inspection time, remem- and newer passenger cars and trucks.
ber to tell your inspection or Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
service station in advance not to bia have implemented emission inspec-
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle tion of the OBDII system.
on a two-wheel dynamometer. . The inspection of the OBDII system
Otherwise, serious transmission consists of a visual operational check of
damage will result. the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an
. Resultant vehicle damage due to examination of the OBDII system with an
improper testing is not covered electronic scan tool.
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of . A vehicle passes the OBDII system
the state inspection program or inspection if proper operation of the
its contractors or licensees. “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
California and a number of federal states trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
– CONTINUED –

7-8 Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if The U.S. Environmental Protection Preparing to drive
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
properly operating (light is illuminated or is dynamometers in their emission testing
You should perform the following checks
not working due to a burned out bulb) or program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
and adjustments every day before you
there is one or more diagnostic trouble AWD vehicles from the portion of the
start driving.
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer. testing program that involves a two-wheel
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
. A state emission inspection may reject dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their lights are clean and unobstructed.
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT testing program. When properly used, this 2. Check the appearance and condition
READY” is greater than one. If the equipment should not damage a SUBARU of the tires. Also check tires for proper
vehicle’s battery has been recently re- AWD vehicle. inflation.
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
Under no circumstances should the rear leaks and check that no small animal is
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
not ready for the emission test. Under this under the vehicle.
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
condition, the vehicle driver should be 4. Check that no small animal enters the
state emission testing.
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few engine compartment.
days to reset the readiness monitors and 5. Check that the hood and rear gate are
return for an emission re-inspection. fully closed.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles 6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for 7. Check the adjustment of the inside
service. and outside mirrors.
Some states still use dynamometers in 8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
their emission inspection program. A passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like 9. Check the operation of the warning
testing device that allows your vehicle’s and indicator lights when the ignition
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in switch is turned to the “ON” position.
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put 10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
on a dynamometer, tell your emission ing lights after starting the engine.
inspector not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch) 7-9
CAUTION Starting and stopping the foliage, paper, or other flam-

engine (models without mable substances. The exhaust
Trapping small animals in the cool- pipe and exhaust emissions can
ing fan and belts of the engine may
push-button ignition switch) create a fire hazard at high
result in a malfunction. Check that temperatures.
no small animal enters the engine
& Starting engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine. CAUTION CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor . If the engine is stopped during
NOTE continuously for more than 10 sec- driving, the catalyst may over-
onds. If the engine fails to start after heat and burn.
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
operating the starter for 5 to 10
washer fluid and other fluid levels . When starting the engine, be sure
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
should be checked daily, weekly or at to sit in the driver’s seat (except
more before trying again.
fuel stops. when using the remote engine
start system).
! General precautions when starting
engine
NOTE
WARNING . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
eration immediately after the engine
. Never start the engine from out- has started.
side the vehicle. It may result in . For a short time after the engine has
an accident. started, the engine speed is kept high.
. Do not leave the engine running When the warm-up is completed, the
in locations with poor ventilation, engine speed lowers automatically.
such as a garage and indoors. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult
The exhaust gas may enter the to start the engine depending on the
vehicle or indoors, and it may fuel and the usage condition (repeated
result in carbon monoxide poi- driving of a distance in which the
soning. engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
. Do not start the engine near dry In such a case, it is recommended that
you change to a different brand of fuel.
– CONTINUED –

7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button ignition switch)
. On rare occasions, transient knock- following. ! CVT models

ing may be heard from the engine when (1) Turn the ignition switch to the 1. Apply the parking brake.
the accelerator is operated rapidly “OFF” position and wait for at least 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid 10 seconds. After checking that the cessories.
acceleration. This is not a malfunction. parking brake is firmly set, turn the 3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
. The engine starts more easily when ignition switch to the “START” position position (preferably the “P” position).
the headlights, air conditioner and rear while depressing the accelerator pedal The starter motor will only operate when
window defogger are turned off. slightly (approximately a quarter of the the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
. After the engine starts, the engine full stroke). Release the accelerator
speed will be kept high until the engine 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
has warmed up sufficiently. position and check the operation of the
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn warning and indicator lights. Refer to
the ignition switch back to the “OFF” “Warning and indicator lights” F3-11.
! MT models
position and wait for at least 10
1. Apply the parking brake. seconds. Then fully depress the accel- 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
erator pedal and turn the ignition position without depressing the accelera-
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
switch to the “START” position. If the tor pedal. Release the key immediately
cessories.
engine starts, quickly release the after the engine has started.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold accelerator pedal. If the engine does not start, try the
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn following.
the engine. the ignition switch again to the “OFF” (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds “OFF” position and wait for at least
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the or longer, turn the ignition switch to the 10 seconds. After checking that the
floor. “START” position without depressing parking brake is firmly set, turn the
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” the accelerator pedal. ignition switch to the “START” position
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start, while depressing the accelerator pedal
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer slightly (approximately a quarter of the
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-11. for assistance. full stroke). Release the accelerator
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator pedal as soon as the engine starts.
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto- the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the position and wait for at least 10
engine warms up. seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
If the engine does not start, try the

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system) 7-11
erator pedal and turn the ignition & Stopping the engine Starting and stopping engine
switch to the “START” position. If the The ignition switch should be turned off
engine starts, quickly release the
(models with push-button
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
accelerator pedal. engine is idling. start system)
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “OFF” WARNING & Safety precautions
position. After waiting for 10 seconds Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-8.
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the Do not stop the engine when the
“START” position without depressing vehicle is moving. This will cause & Operating range for push-
the accelerator pedal. loss of power to the power steering button start system
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It Refer to “Operating range for push-button
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer start system” F3-5.
for assistance. could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK” position on the
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator ignition switch, causing the steering & Starting engine
lights have turned off after the engine has wheel to lock.
started. The fuel injection system auto- WARNING
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up. . There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
While the engine is warming up, make
Carefully read the precautions
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
described in “General precau-
“N” position and that the parking brake is
tions when starting engine” F7-
applied.
9.
CAUTION . If the indicator on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in
If you restart the engine while the green after the engine has
vehicle is moving, shift the select started, never drive the vehicle.
lever into the “N” position. Do not The steering is still locked, and it
attempt to place the select lever of a may result in an accident.
moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
tion.
– CONTINUED –

7-12 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)
CAUTION the brake pedal, the engine starter

operates for a maximum of 10 seconds
. When the operation indicator on and after starting the engine, the starter
the push-button ignition switch is stops automatically.
flashing in orange, there may be . When the push-button ignition
a malfunction with the vehicle. switch is pressed while depressing
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- the brake pedal, the engine can be
diately. started regardless of the status of the
. If the indicator on the push- push-button ignition switch.
button ignition switch is flashing . If the security indicator light illumi-
in green after the engine has nates when you attempt to start the
started, it means that the steering engine but the engine does not start,
is still locked. Depress the brake press the push-button ignition switch
pedal while moving the steering to switch the power to “OFF” and then 1) Operation indicator
wheel to the right and left, and try to start the engine again. 2) Push-button ignition switch
press the push-button ignition . If the engine does not start, press When the push-button ignition switch is
the push-button ignition switch without pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
switch.
depressing the brake pedal to switch the engine will start. The starting proce-
. Do not continue pushing the the power to “OFF”. Then, while de- dure for the engine is as follows.
push-button ignition switch for pressing the brake pedal more force-
more than 10 seconds. Doing so fully, press the push-button ignition 1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
could cause a malfunction. If the switch. driver’s seat.
engine does not start, stop push- . The engine start procedures may 2. Apply the parking brake.
ing the push-button ignition not function depending on the radio 3. Shift the select lever into the “P”
switch and turn off the engine. wave conditions around the vehicle. In position. The engine can also start when
Wait 10 seconds, and then push such a case, refer to “Starting engine” the select lever is in the “N” position,
the push-button ignition switch F9-18. however, for safety reasons, start in the
to start the engine. . If the vehicle battery is discharged, “P” position.
the steering cannot be unlocked. 4. Depress the brake pedal until the
Charge the battery. operation indicator on the push-button
NOTE
ignition switch turns green. When starting
. When the push-button ignition
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
switch is pressed while depressing

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system) 7-13
indicator does not turn green. & Stopping engine doors until the vehicle is stopped
5. While depressing the brake pedal, in a safe location. It is dangerous
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
press the push-button ignition switch. because the steering lock may be
2. Move the select lever to the “P” activated. Stop the vehicle in a
position. safe place, and contact a
NOTE 3. Press the push-button ignition switch. SUBARU dealer immediately.
. While pressing the select lever but- The engine will stop, and the power will be
ton in, the indicator on the push-button switched off.
ignition switch will not turn green even CAUTION
when the select lever is in the “P”
position. WARNING . Do not stop the engine while the
. In case the engine does not start by select lever is in a position other
. Do not touch the push-button
the normal engine start procedure,
ignition switch during driving. than the “P” position.
move the select lever to the “P” posi- . If the engine is stopped while the
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”. When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows, select lever is in a position other
Depress the brake pedal, and press the than the “P” position, the power
push-button ignition switch for at least the engine will stop.
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only – The switch is pressed and held left in this condition, the battery
use this engine start procedure in case for 3 seconds or longer. may be discharged.
of emergency. – The switch is pressed briefly 3
. When the engine is not started, the times or more in succession.
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a NOTE
case, depress the brake pedal more When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great- Although you can stop the engine by
forcefully than usual. Check that the operating the push-button ignition
operation indicator on the push-button er foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal. switch, do not stop the engine during
ignition switch turns green, and press driving except in an emergency.
the push-button ignition switch to start The power steering system will
the engine. not operate either. A greater & When access key does not
force will be required to steer, operate properly
and it may result in an accident.
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
. If the engine stops during driving, not operate properly” F9-17.
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the

7-14 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
Remote engine start system you to start the engine from outside the follows.
vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
(dealer option) start system can activate the heater or air
! Before starting the engine
conditioner, providing you with a comfor- Before using the remote engine start
table cabin upon entry. system to start the engine, confirm the
WARNING
following conditions.
. There are some general precau- & Models with “keyless access . The select lever is in the “P” position.
tions when starting the engine. with push-button start sys- . All doors including the rear gate are
Carefully read the precautions tem” closed.
described in “General precau- . The engine hood is closed.
tions when starting engine” F7- NOTE . The push-button ignition switch is in the
9. For more details, refer to the Owner’s “OFF” position.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system. ! Starting the engine
an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera- To start the engine with remote engine
tion of a motor vehicle in an start system, briefly press the lock button
enclosed environment can cause twice within 2 seconds, then press and
a harmful build-up of Carbon hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is 1. Press the lock button briefly. The
harmful to your health. Exposure hazard warning flashers then flash once.
to high levels of Carbon Monox- 2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock
ide can cause headaches, dizzi- button briefly again. The hazard warning
ness or in extreme cases uncon- flashers then flash once again.
sciousness and/or death.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
. Before performing any servicing hold the lock button. The hazard warning
of the vehicle, temporarily place flashers then flash once.
the remote engine start system in 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
service mode to prevent the Access key
1) Lock button release the lock button. The engine will
system from unexpectedly start- then start successfully.
ing the engine. An access key can be used as the remote
engine start transmitter. Operate the lock
The remote engine start system allows button to start or stop the engine as

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-15
! Stopping the engine & Models without “keyless ac- operating range of the system and the
Press and hold the lock button to stop the cess with push-button start start request is received, the following
engine with remote engine start system. system” phenomena will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
! Automatic engine shutdown
. The horn sounds once.
The remote engine start system will . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
automatically shut down or will not start parking lights flash once.
the engine under the following conditions.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20 If the fob is not within range (the user is
minutes. too far away from the vehicle), the fob will
. Any door or the rear gate is opened. indicate two long flashes without beeping.
. The select lever is moved to any The system will check certain safety
position other than “P”. preconditions before starting, and if all
. The engine hood is opened. conditions are met, the engine will start
. The push-button ignition switch is within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
pressed. the following phenomena will occur.
. The brake pedal is depressed. Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) . The fob flashes and beeps twice.
1) Fob button
. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or . The horn sounds once.
more. ! Starting the engine . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
The time setting until the engine auto- NOTE
matically stops can be changed. To All vehicle doors (including rear gate) While the engine is idling via the remote
change it, please contact your SUBARU and the engine hood must be closed engine start system, the following phe-
dealer. Note that some settings may prior to activating the remote engine nomena will occur.
violate state, provincial, or local laws and start system. Any open entry point will . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
regulations. Check the laws in your area to prevent starting or cause the engine to parking lights remain illuminated.
determine which setting is permitted. stop. . The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
The remote engine start system is acti- . The power windows are disabled.
vated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob) If the engine turns over but does not start
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within (or starts and stalls) the remote engine
– CONTINUED –

start system will power off and then RPM ! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
attempt to start the engine 3 additional . The security alarm is triggered
times. The system will not attempt to . The select lever is not in the “P” Your remote engine starter fob is a
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle position bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
malfunction is preventing starting. If the system operation with several different
engine does not start after 3 additional If the system detects any door (including visual and audible indications. The fob’s
attempts, the remote engine start request the rear gate) open during operation, it will LED-backlit button and internal piezo
will be aborted. prevent starting or stop the engine, and buzzer will indicate status of the system
sound the horn and flash side marker using the following flash and beep se-
! Stopping the engine
lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 quences, provided the fob is within opera-
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2 times. tional range of the system.
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the In addition to the items above, if the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is vehicle’s engine management system
not received (for example, if the user is too determines there is a safety risk due to a
far away from the vehicle), the fob will vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds. power down and the horn will sound 3
The system will automatically stop the times.
engine after 15 minutes.
NOTE
! Remote start safety features
. If the alarm system is armed at the
For safety and security reasons, the time of remote engine starter activation
remote engine start system will prevent (the security indicator light on the
starting (or stop the engine if running) and combination meter is flashing), the
sound the horn twice if any of the following alarm system will remain armed
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob throughout the remote start run cycle.
will flash and beep 3 times. . If the alarm system is disarmed at
. The brake pedal is depressed the time of remote engine starter
. A key is in the ignition switch activation (the security indicator light
. The engine hood is open on the combination meter is not flash-
. The remote start system “Service ing), the alarm system will remain
mode” is engaged disarmed throughout the remote start
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 run cycle.

Fob Indication
Precondition Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is — The fob is transmitting an RF signal
held down
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob 1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
button twice within 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
3 flashes 3 beeps reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and 3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
holding fob button for at least 2 sec. 1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
– CONTINUED –

& Entering the vehicle while it button start system”, press the push- & Service mode (models with-
is running via remote start button ignition switch while depressing out “keyless access with
the brake pedal to restart the engine. push-button start system”)
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function (if equipped) or In service mode, the remote engine start
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
& Entering the vehicle follow- function is temporarily disabled to prevent
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using ing remote engine start shut- the system from unexpectedly starting the
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will down engine while being serviced.
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
to activating the remote engine start opened by the remote keyless entry To engage or disengage service mode:
system) and the engine will turn off. transmitter within a few seconds immedi- 1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle
Perform either of the following procedures ately following remote engine start shut- doors and the rear gate.
to disarm the alarm system. Refer to down. 2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”
“Alarm system” F2-20. position (CVT models)
. Insert the key into the ignition switch & Pre-heating or pre-cooling 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal
and turn it to the “ON” position (models the interior of the vehicle 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
without “keyless access with push- Models with automatic climate control position
button start system”) system: 5. Press and release the remote engine
. Turn the push-button ignition switch start transmitter “ ” button three times.
After the system starts the engine, the
to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models The system will honk the vehicle’s horn
automatic climate control system will
with “keyless access with push-button each time the button is pressed.
activate the “FULL AUTO” mode and heat
start system”) 6. The system will pause for 1 second
or cool the interior to the predetermined
. Press any button on the access key/ median (room) temperature. No pre- then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to
remote keyless entry transmitter. setting of controls is necessary. indicate that the service mode has been
2. Enter the vehicle. Models with manual climate control engaged or honk one time to indicate that
3. The engine will shut down when any system: the service mode has been disengaged.
door or rear gate is opened. Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
4. For models without “keyless access perature controls to the desired setting NOTE
with push-button start system”, insert the and operation. After the system starts the When taking your vehicle in for service,
key into the ignition switch and turn to the engine, the heater or air conditioning will it is recommended that you inform the
“START” position to restart the engine. For activate and heat or cool the interior to service personnel that your vehicle is
models with “keyless access with push- your setting. equipped with a remote engine start

system. lights, tail lights and parking lights and ! Changing the battery
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
& Remote transmitter program system has learned the transmitter. Upon CAUTION
(models without “keyless ac- successful programming, the remote start
cess with push-button start confirmation transmitter button will flash . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
system”) one time. or in the remote engine start
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitter when replacing the
New transmitters can be programmed to
transmitters (the system will accept up to battery.
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters). . Be careful not to damage the
damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter printed circuit board in the re-
desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the mote engine start transmitter
transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK” position, the door is closed or when replacing the battery.
transmitters can be programmed accord- after 2 minutes. . Be careful not to allow children to
ing to the following procedure. touch the battery and any re-
& System maintenance moved parts; children could
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
NOTE swallow them.
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process). For models without “keyless access . There is a danger of explosion if
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. with push-button start system”: an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
same or equivalent type of bat-
“LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, back replaced, discharged or disconnected,
tery.
to “ON” then “LOCK”, then back to “ON” it will be necessary to start the vehicle
again and leave the ignition “ON” through- a minimum of one time using the key . Batteries should not be exposed
out the programming process. prior to activating the remote engine to excessive heat such as sun-
4. The system will flash the side marker start system. This is required to allow shine, fire or the like.
lights, tail lights and parking lights and the vehicle electronic systems to re-
honk the horn three times, indicating that synchronize. For models with “keyless access with
the system has entered the transmitter push-button start system”:
learn mode. Perform the procedure described in “Re-
5. Press and release the “ ” button on placing access key battery” F11-45.
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
– CONTINUED –

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-
2032) supplied in your remote engine start
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the
battery begins to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start 3. Remove the circuit board from the
transmitter halves apart using a small flat- bottom half of the case and remove the
head screwdriver. battery and replace with a new one. Be
sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
battery before removing it to ensure that
the new battery is inserted properly
(battery “+” should be pointed away from
the transmitter circuit board on the bat-
tery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo- test the remote engine start system.
cated on the back side of the transmitter.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-

Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-21
ference, and (2) this device must Manual transmission

accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment and void warranty.
. To comply with the FCC RF expo-
sure compliance requirements, no
change to the antenna or the device is
permitted. Any change to the antenna
or the device could result in the device 1) Slider
exceeding the RF exposure require- You must raise the slider and hold it in that
ments and void user’s authority to position before you can move the shift
This manual transmission is a completely
operate the device. lever to the “R” position.
synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
The shift pattern is shown on the shift pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
lever knob. let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
– CONTINUED –

7-22 Starting and operating/Manual transmission
WARNING & Shifting speeds Gear mph (km/h)

. Do not drive the vehicle with the ! Recommended shifting speeds 1st 29 (48)
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the The best compromise between fuel econ- 2nd 54 (88)
clutch pedal is depressed) or omy and vehicle performance during
with the shift lever in the neutral normal driving is ensured by shifting up
position. Engine braking has no at the speeds listed in the following table. WARNING
effect in either of these condi-
Shift up mph (km/h) When shifting down a gear, ensure
tions and the risk of an accident
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
is consequently increased. 1st to 2nd 15 (24)
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e., 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) lowable Speed for the gear which is
release the clutch pedal) sud- 3rd to 4th 40 (64) about to be selected. Failure to
denly when starting the vehicle. observe this precaution can lead to
By doing so the vehicle might 4th to 5th 45 (72)
engine over-revving and this in turn
unexpectedly accelerate or the 5th to 6th 50 (80) can result in engine damage.
transmission could malfunction.
In addition, sudden application of
! Maximum allowable speeds engine brakes when the vehicle is
CAUTION The following table shows the maximum travelling on a slippery surface can
speeds that are possible with each differ- lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
Shift into reverse ONLY when the ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will quence, control of the vehicle may
vehicle has completely stopped. It enter the red area if these speeds are be lost and the risk of an accident
may cause damage to the transmis- exceeded. increased.
sion to try shifting into reverse when With the exception of cases where sudden
the vehicle is moving. acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometer’s
NOTE
needle inside the red area. Failure to Never exceed the posted speed limit.
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-23
& Driving tips Continuously variable trans- . Avoid shifting from one of the
Do not drive with your foot resting on the mission forward driving positions into the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to “R” position or vice versa until
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an the vehicle has completely
The continuously variable transmission is stopped. Such shifting may
upgrade. Either of those actions may electronically controlled and provides an
cause clutch damage. cause damage to the transmis-
infinite number of forward speeds and 1 sion.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the reverse speed. For some models, it also
shift lever. This may cause wear on the has a manual mode or an “L” position. . When parking the vehicle, first
transmission components. securely apply the parking brake
WARNING and then place the select lever in
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle the “P” position. Avoid parking
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, Do not shift from the “P” or “N” for a long time with the select
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a position into the “D” or “R” position lever in any other position as
lower gear before the engine starts to while depressing the accelerator doing so could result in a dead
labor. pedal. This may cause the vehicle battery.
On steep downgrades, downshift the to jump forward or backward.
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear NOTE
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life. CAUTION . Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
In this way, the engine provides a braking . Shift into the “P” or “R” position transmission operation is somewhat
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) only after the vehicle is comple- unusual. This results from invalidation
the brakes while descending a hill, they tely stopped. Shifting while the of data which the on-board computer
may overheat and not work properly. vehicle is moving may cause has collected and stored in memory to
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock damage to the transmission. allow the transmission to shift at the
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or . Do not race the engine for more most appropriate times for the current
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This than 5 seconds in any position condition of your vehicle. Optimized
phenomenon is not an indication of a except the “N” or “P” position shifting will be restored as the vehicle
problem in your vehicle. when the brake is applied or continues to be driven for a while.
when chocks are used in the . When driving a CVT model under
wheels. This may cause the continuous heavy load conditions such
transmission fluid to overheat. as when towing a camper or climbing a
– CONTINUED –

7-24 Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
long, steep hill, the engine speed or the & Select lever shift while pressing the select lever
vehicle speed may automatically be button in.
reduced. This is not a malfunction. This : Shift while pressing the select lever
phenomenon results from the engine button in.
control function maintaining the cool- : Shift without pressing the select
ing performance of the vehicle. The lever button.
engine and vehicle speed will return to The select lever has four positions, “P”,
a normal speed when the engine is able “R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”
to maintain the optimum cooling per- gate.
formance after the heavy load de-
creases. Driving under a heavy load ! P (Park)
must be performed with extreme care. This position is for parking the vehicle and
Do not try to pass a vehicle in front starting the engine. In this position, the
when driving on an uphill slope while transmission is mechanically locked to
towing. 1) Select lever button prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that When you park the vehicle, first apply the
provides superior transmission effi- parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
times, depending on varying driving the mechanical friction of the transmis-
conditions, a chain operating sound sion.
may be heard that is characteristic of To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
this type of system. other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
1) Models with “L” position shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
2) Models with manual mode vehicle completely then move the lever to
: With the brake pedal depressed, the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned NOTE switch to the manual mode. In this mode,
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement If the select lever is in the “N” position you can shift into any gear position using
of the select lever from the “N” to “R” when you stop the engine for parking, the shift paddles. For details about the
position is possible for a limited time you may not subsequently be able to manual mode, refer to “Selection of
period by depressing the brake pedal, move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If manual mode” F7-25. Once the vehicle
and then it becomes impossible. For this happens, turn the ignition switch to speed stabilizes, the transmission will
details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-28. the “ON” position. You will then be able switch from the manual mode back to
! N (Neutral) to move the select lever to the “P” the “D” position for normal driving.
position.
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
& Selection of manual mode (if
! D (Drive) equipped)
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
transmission shifts automatically and con-
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
slightest incline unless the parking brake
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
or foot brake is applied.
you require. Also, while driving up and
Avoid coasting with the transmission in down a hill, the transmission assists and
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in controls the driving performance and
this condition. engine braking while corresponding to
the road grade.
WARNING
When more acceleration is required in the
Do not drive the vehicle with the “D” position, depress the accelerator
select lever in the “N” (neutral) pedal fully to the floor and hold that
position. Engine braking has no position. The transmission will automati-
effect in this condition and the risk cally downshift. When you release the With the vehicle either moving or station-
of an accident is consequently in- pedal, the transmission will return to the ary, move the select lever from the “D”
creased. original gear position. position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
For models with manual mode, if one of
the shift paddles behind the steering
wheel is operated while driving in the “D”
position, the transmission will temporarily
– CONTINUED –

indicator “ ” illuminates, downshifting is

possible. When both indicators illuminate,
upshifting and downshifting are both pos-
sible. When the vehicle stops (for exam-
ple, at traffic signals), the downshift
indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
Type A Type B
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate.
The gear position indicator shows the To upshift to the next higher gear position,
currently selected gear in the following pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
range. on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
. 1st-to-8th-gear (when the Sport Sharp position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
(S#) mode is selected (if equipped)) indicated on it.
. 1st-to-6th-gear (in other situations) To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
The upshift and downshift indicators show
position.
when a gear shift is possible. When the
upshift indicator “ ” illuminates, upshift-
ing is possible. When the downshift

CAUTION and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.
Do not place or hang anything on . For models with SI-DRIVE, by select-
the shift paddles. Doing so may ing Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting
result in accidental gear shifting. will not occur automatically. According
to the road conditions, shift change
manually so that the tachometer needle
NOTE does not enter the red zone. Also, if the
Please read the following points care- engine revolutions reach the specified
fully and bear them in mind when using number, the fuel supply will be cut. In
the manual mode. this case, perform shift up operation.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when & Selection of “L” (if equipped) Type A
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis- “L” is for using engine braking when going Type B
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move
the select lever from the “D” position to the When selected, the indicator “L” will
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi- illuminate on the combination meter.
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi- “L” position.
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location To deselect “L”, move the select lever to
the “D” position.
– CONTINUED –

& Shift lock function pressed and brake pedal depressed. engine.
The shift lock function helps prevent the If the select lever does not move after
improper operation of the select lever. performing the above procedure, perform
. The select lever cannot be operated the following steps.
unless the ignition switch is turned to the . When the select lever cannot be
“ON” position and the brake pedal is shifted from “P” to “N”:
depressed. Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
. The select lever cannot be moved from lock release button” F7-28.
the “P” position to any other position . When the select lever cannot be
before the brake pedal is depressed. shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Depress the brake pedal first, and then Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
operate the select lever. tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn select lever to the “P” position with the
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position select lever button pressed and brake 2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove pedal depressed. with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
the key from the ignition switch.
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
. If the ignition switch is turned to the If you must perform the above procedure,
release button is located under the shift
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
lock cover.
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
may not be moved to the “P” position after SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
a period of time. Therefore, move the as possible.
select lever to the “P” position with the If the select lever does not move after
brake pedal depressed soon after the performing the above procedure, refer to
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/ “Shift lock release using the shift lock
“OFF” position. release button” F7-28.
! Shift lock release ! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON” Perform the following procedure to release
position then move the select lever to the the shift lock.
“P” position with the select lever button 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE 7-29
3. While depressing the brake pedal, SI-DRIVE (if equipped) efficiency and smooth driveability without
insert a screwdriver into the hole, press stress. Power delivery is moderate during
the shift lock release button using a acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)
screwdriver, and then move the select This is ideal for around-town driving and
works to maximize engine performance,
lever. situations that do not require full power
control and efficiency.
output. It provides better control in difficult
If the select lever does not move after This system consists of three modes:
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
performing the above procedure, the shift Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con- (S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches,
response.
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection the character of the power unit changes.
as soon as possible.
& Intelligent (I) mode & Sport (S) mode
& Driving tips
! For all-around performance driving
. Always apply the foot or parking brake ! For smooth, efficient performance
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or driving
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the mechanical friction
of the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a The Sport (S) mode provides the engine
malfunction. power desired by those who want to make
The linear acceleration characteristic of the driving experience their own personal
the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal adventure.
driving usage.
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
– CONTINUED –

7-30 Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE
& Sport Sharp (S#) mode When selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode, & SI-DRIVE switches
the following controls will be applied.
! For maximum performance driving
Uphill control: Prevents unnecessary
shift-up/shift-down during ascent.
Cornering control: While turning, if there
is a large centrifugal force, shift-up will not
occur: during re-acceleration.
Braking control: At the beginning of
corners etc., heavy application of the
brake pedal will cause automatic down-
shift and gently re-accelerate.
Sudden acceleration return control:
During acceleration, if acceleration pedal SI-DRIVE switches
is returned suddenly (for example, at To select the Intelligent (I) mode, perform
For sports-minded drivers, the Sport corners etc.), shift-up will not be applied. either of the following procedures.
Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
level of engine performance and control. . Press the “S/I” switch when the Sport
The throttle becomes more responsive (S) mode is selected
regardless of the engine speed. Delivering . Press the “S#/I” switch when the Sport
maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is Sharp (S#) mode is selected
ideal for tackling twisting roads and for To select the Sport (S) mode, press the “S/
merging or overtaking other vehicles on I” switch when any mode other than Sport
the freeway with confidence. (S) mode is selected.
When you select the Sport Sharp (S#) To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
mode while the select lever is in the “D” press the “S#/I” switch when any mode
position, the transmission gear ratio will other than Sport Sharp (S#) mode is
shift from variable speed to eight-speed. selected.
The select lever/gear position indicator
display will change from “D” to the gear
position.

Starting and operating/Power steering 7-31
NOTE Power steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
. The next time you turn on the the nearest SUBARU dealer and
engine, after you turned off the engine have the vehicle inspected immedi-
in the Sport (S) mode or Sport Sharp ately.
(S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes
to the Intelligent (I) mode.
. While the engine is running, if the NOTE
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc- If the steering wheel is operated in the
tion indicator light illuminates, the SI- following ways, the power steering
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) control system may temporarily limit
mode. In this case, it is not possible to the power assist in order to prevent the
change to another mode. system components, such as the con-
. If there is a possibility that the trol computer and drive motor, from
engine could overheat because of a overheating.
temperature increase of the engine . The steering wheel is operated fre-
coolant, it is not possible to change to Power steering warning light quently and turned sharply while the
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, The vehicle is equipped with an electric speeds, such as while frequently turn-
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when power steering system. When the ignition ing the steering wheel during parallel
the engine coolant temperature in- switch is turned to the “ON” position, the parking.
creases. power steering warning light on the . The steering wheel remains in the
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators combination meter illuminates to inform fully turned position for a long period
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be the driver that the warning system is of time.
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU functioning properly. Then, if the engine
dealer. started, the warning light turns off to inform At this time, there will be more resis-
the driver that the steering power assist is tance when steering. However this is
operational. not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
When the power steering warning
an opportunity to cool down. However,
light is illuminated, there may be
if the power steering is operated in a
more resistance when the steering
non-standard way which causes power
– CONTINUED –

7-32 Starting and operating/Braking
assist limitation to occur too fre- Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
quently, this may result in a malfunc- driving straight ahead while gradually
tion of the power steering control & Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
system. road to a safe place.
WARNING
& Brake system
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits
dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brakes and needless wear on the brake systems. Each circuit works diag-
brake pads and linings. onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
! When the brakes get wet of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle.
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Brake booster
! Use of engine braking The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
Remember to make use of engine braking turn off the engine while driving because
in addition to foot braking. When descend- that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, ing in poor braking power.
the brakes may start working improperly The brakes will continue to work even
because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops
caused by overheated brake pads. To functioning. If this happens, however, you
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to will have to depress the pedal much
get stronger engine braking. harder than normal and the braking dis-
! Braking when a tire is punctured tance will increase.
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause

Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System) 7-33
! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
assist system is operating properly.
tem)
WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force. The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear an ABS operating wheels which may occur during sudden
brings more braking ability to the noise from the engine compartment. braking or braking on slippery road sur-
vehicle beyond its braking capabil- faces. This helps prevent the loss of
ity. Always use the utmost care steering control and directional stability
when driving regarding vehicle & Disc brake pad wear warning caused by wheel lock-up.
speed and safe distance. indicators
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
CAUTION when the ABS operates.
When you need to brake suddenly, The ABS system will not operate when the
continue depressing the brake pedal vehicle speed is below approximately 6
strongly to bring the effect of the mph (10 km/h).
brake assist.
WARNING
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver Always use the utmost care in
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly driving – overconfidence because
and the brake power is insufficient. you are driving a vehicle with the
Brake assist generates the brake power ABS system could easily lead to a
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
according to the speed at which the driver serious accident.
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
depresses the brake pedal. noise when the brake pads are worn.
NOTE If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard CAUTION
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
When you depress the brake pedal
mediately have your vehicle checked by . The ABS system does not always
strongly or suddenly, the following
your SUBARU dealer. decrease stopping distance. You
phenomena occur. However, even
should always maintain a safe
though these occur, they do not indi-
– CONTINUED –

7-34 Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
following distance from other also hear the sound of the ABS working Electronic Brake Force Dis-
vehicles. from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
tribution (EBD) system
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or the ABS system being carried out and
does not indicate any abnormal condition. The EBD system maximizes the effective-
over deep newly fallen snow, ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS & ABS warning light brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
system than one without. When Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-18. the distribution of braking force to the rear
driving under these conditions, wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
therefore, reduce your speed and loading condition and speed.
leave ample distance from other
The EBD system is an integral part of the
vehicles.
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
. When tire chains are installed, system’s components to perform its func-
stopping distances may be long- tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
er for a vehicle with the ABS ing force. If any of the ABS components
system than one without. Be sure used by the EBD system malfunction, the
to reduce your speed and main- EBD system also stops working.
tain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
. When you feel the ABS system
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
operating, you should maintain
and does not indicate a malfunction.
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
& ABS system self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system 7-35
& Steps to take if EBD system system warning light and ABS warning 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
malfunctions light illuminate simultaneously. “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
the brake system warning light and ABS system inspected.
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
conventional braking system will still func- nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the WARNING
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control. . Driving with the brake system
If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminated is dan-
warning light illuminate simultaneously, gerous. This indicates your brake
Brake and ABS warning light (type A)
take the following steps. system may not be working
properly. If the light remains
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, illuminated, have the brakes in-
flat location. spected by a SUBARU dealer
2. Shut down the engine, apply the immediately.
parking brake, and then restart it.
. If at all in doubt about whether
3. Release the parking brake. If both the brakes are operating prop-
warning lights turn off, the EBD system erly, do not drive the vehicle.
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to Have your vehicle towed to the
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
system inspected. pair.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
Brake and ABS warning light (type B) again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
F11-19.
the system stops working and the brake

7-36 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Vehicle Dynamics Control namics Control is no guarantee of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
system that full vehicle control will be trol system is reduced and
maintained at all times and under this should be taken into ac-
all conditions, its activation count when driving the vehi-
WARNING should be seen as a sign that cle in such a condition.
the speed of the vehicle should . If non-matching tires are used,
Always use the utmost care in be reduced considerably. the Vehicle Dynamics Control
driving – overconfidence because . Whenever suspension compo- system may not operate cor-
you are driving a vehicle with the nents, steering components, or rectly.
Vehicle Dynamics Control system an axle are removed from a . The Vehicle Dynamics Control
could easily lead to a serious acci- vehicle, have an inspection of system helps prevent unstable
dent. that system performed by an vehicle motion such as skidding
authorized SUBARU dealer. using control of the brakes and
. The following precautions should engine power. Do not turn off the
CAUTION be observed in order to ensure Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
. Even if your vehicle is equipped that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- tem unless it is absolutely ne-
with Vehicle Dynamics Control trol system is operating properly: cessary. If you must turn off the
system, winter tires should be – All four wheels should be Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
used when driving on snow-cov- fitted with tires of the same tem, drive very carefully accord-
ered or icy roads; in addition, size, type, and brand. Further- ing to the road surface condition.
vehicle speed should be reduced more, the amount of wear
considerably. Simply having a should be the same for all In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- four tires. on a slippery road surface and/or during
tem does not guarantee that the cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
– Keep the tire pressure at the the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
vehicle will be able to avoid proper level as shown on the
accidents in any situation. adjusts the engine’s output and the
vehicle placard attached to wheels’ respective braking forces to help
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- the driver’s side door pillar. maintain traction and directional control.
namics Control system is an – Use only the specified tem-
indication that the road being porary spare tire to replace a . Traction Control Function
travelled on has a slippery sur- flat tire. With a temporary The traction control function is designed to
face; since having Vehicle Dy- spare tire, the effectiveness prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-37
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to following list, the vehicle may be less Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-
maintain traction and directional control. stable than it feels to the driver. The 23.
Activation of this function is shown by Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control therefore operate. Such operation does & Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light. not indicate a system malfunction. OFF switch
– on gravel-covered or rutted
. Skid Suppression Function roads
The skid suppression function is designed – on unfinished roads
to help maintain directional stability by – when the vehicle is towing a
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide trailer
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
– when the vehicle is fitted with
vation of this function is shown by flashing
snow tires or winter tires
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
indicator light.
Control system will cause operation of
NOTE the steering wheel to feel slightly
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- different compared to that for normal
tem may be considered normal when conditions.
the following conditions occur. . It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner, Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
– Slight twitching of the brake (models with power rear gate)
pedal is felt. even if your vehicle is equipped with
– The vehicle or steering wheel the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
shakes to a small degree. . Always turn off the engine before
– An operating sound from the replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
engine compartment is heard render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
briefly when starting the engine system unable to operate correctly.
and when driving off after starting
the engine. & Vehicle Dynamics Control
– The brake pedal seems to jolt system monitor
when driving off after starting the Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
engine. ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
. In the circumstances shown in the tion indicator light” F3-22 and “Vehicle
– CONTINUED –

7-38 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
. a standing start on a steeply sloping ignores any further pressing of the

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or switch. To make the switch usable
otherwise slippery surface again, turn the ignition switch to the
. extrication of the vehicle when its “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
When the switch is pressed during engine deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination formance is comparable with that of a
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Control system will be deactivated and the Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
vehicle will behave like a model not activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- system except when absolutely neces-
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch trol system. When the switch is pressed sary.
(models without power rear gate) again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, compo-
Control OFF indicator light turns off. nents of the brake control system may
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system still activate. When the brake control
deactivated, traction and stability en- system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics namics Control operation indicator
Control system is unavailable. Therefore light flashes.
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will be activated automatically
Indicator light when the engine is started.
Pressing the switch to deactivate the . If the switch is held down for 30
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can seconds or longer, the indicator light
facilitate the following operations. turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system

Starting and operating/X–mode 7-39
X-mode (if equipped) Simply having X-mode does not proper level as shown on the
guarantee that the vehicle will be label attached to the vehicle’s
able to avoid accidents in any door pillar.
WARNING situation. – Use only the special tempor-
. Always use the utmost care in . Activating the X-mode should be ary spare tire to replace a flat
driving – overconfidence be- done when you encounter a very tire. With a normal temporary
cause you are driving a vehicle slippery surface at low speed. spare tire, the effectiveness of
with X-mode could easily lead to However, having X-mode is no the X-mode is reduced and
a serious accident. guarantee that full vehicle con- this should be taken into ac-
trol will be maintained at all times count when driving the vehi-
. Always use the utmost care in and under all conditions. When cle in such a condition.
driving – overconfidence be- activating X-mode, the speed of
cause you are driving a vehicle . If the hill descent control function
the vehicle should be reduced has operated continuously for a
with hill descent control function considerably.
could easily lead to a serious long time, the temperature of the
accident. Be especially careful, . Whenever suspension compo- brake disc may increase and the
and depress the brake pedal if nents, steering components, or hill descent control function may
necessary when driving on ex- an axle are removed from a be temporarily disabled. In this
tremely steep downhill, frozen, vehicle, have the system in- case, the hill descent control
muddy or sandy roads. Failure spected by an authorized indicator light will turn off. When
to control the vehicle’s speed SUBARU dealer. the hill descent control indicator
may cause a loss of control and . The following precautions should light turns off, the hill descent
result in a serious accident. be observed in order to ensure control function is disabled.
that the X-mode is operating
properly: X-mode is the integrated control system of
CAUTION the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
– All four wheels should be Control system, etc. for driving with bad
fitted with tires of the same
. Even if your vehicle is equipped road conditions. Using X-mode, you can
size, type, and brand. Further- drive more comfortably even in slippery
with X-mode, winter tires or snow
more, the amount of wear road conditions including uphill and down-
chains should be used when
should be the same for all hill.
driving on snow-covered or icy
four tires.
roads; in addition, vehicle speed
– Keep the tire pressure at the X-mode has the following functions.
should be reduced considerably.
– CONTINUED –

7-40 Starting and operating/X–mode
. Hill descent control function: (40 km/h) or more while the X-mode is
Using the hill descent control function, you activated, a buzzer will sound once and
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed the X-mode will be deactivated.
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
likely to increase, the brake control system NOTE
will be activated to adjust the vehicle For models with SI-DRIVE:
speed. . The SI-DRIVE mode will change to
. Driving ability control: the Intelligent (I) mode when the X-
This mode increases the hill-climbing mode is deactivated.
ability and driving ability as well as . The SI-DRIVE mode cannot be chan-
enabling smooth application of torque for ged while the X-mode is activated. At
easier control of the steering wheel. this time, a buzzer will sound twice.
. While the engine is running, if the
X-mode indicator light
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-
& To activate/deactivate the X- tion indicator light illuminates, the X-
mode To activate:
mode is deactivated and the SI-DRIVE
Press the X-mode switch. While the X-
mode changes to the Sport (S) mode. In
mode is activated, the X-mode indicator
this case, it is not possible to change to
light illuminates.
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, Intelligent
To deactivate: (I) mode or X-mode.
Press the X-mode switch again. The X- . If there is a possibility that the
mode indicator light will turn off when the engine could overheat because of a
X-mode is deactivated. temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to change to
NOTE the X-mode. While the vehicle is in the
. Even if you try to activate the X- X-mode, it changes to the Sport (S)
mode by pressing the X-mode switch mode when the engine coolant tem-
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 perature increases.
km/h) or more, the X-mode will not be . It is not possible to activate the X-
X-mode switch activated. At this time, a buzzer will mode when the engine is not running,
sound twice. because the hill descent control func-
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph tion is not activated.

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models) 7-41
& Hill descent control function – The sensation of depressing the Tire pressure monitoring
brake pedal is different, (harder
The hill descent control function will be in
than usual etc.) when the brake
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
standby mode when the X-mode is acti- models)
vated and the vehicle speed is less than pedal is depressed during hill des-
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). cent control function operation.
The function will operate when the vehicle ! Hill descent control indicator light
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed by using the brake pedal Low tire pressure warning light (type A)
or accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent This light illuminates while the hill descent
control function, the brake system control function is in the standby mode. It
warning light will illuminate. flashes while the function is operating. It
. The hill descent control function is will turn off when the function is in the
operable regardless of the gradient of disabled mode. When this function is
the road. changed from operational to non-opera-
. The hill descent control function tional, it will turn off when the vehicle
may be considered normal when the speed reaches more than approximately
following conditions occur. 30 km/h (18 mph).
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating. Low tire pressure warning light (type B)
– CONTINUED –

7-42 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- accordingly. Be sure to let the tires SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
vides the driver with a warning message cool thoroughly before adjusting for tire and sensor replacement and/
by sending a signal from a sensor that is their pressures to the standard or system resetting.
installed in each wheel when tire pressure values shown on the tire placard. Do not inject any tire liquid or
is severely low. Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-25. aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
The tire pressure monitoring system will The tire pressure monitoring system as this may cause a malfunction of
activate only when the vehicle is driven at does not function when the vehicle the tire pressure sensors. If the light
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also, is stationary. After adjusting the tire illuminates steadily after blinking for
this system may not react immediately to a pressures, increase the vehicle approximately one minute, promptly
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, speed to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) contact a SUBARU dealer to have
a blow-out caused by running over a to start the TPMS re-checking of the the system inspected.
sharp object). tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire CAUTION
pressure warning light should turn
If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later. . Do not place metal film or any
illuminates while driving, never If this light still illuminates while metal parts in the cargo area.
brake suddenly and keep driving driving after adjusting the tire pres- This may cause poor reception of
straight ahead while gradually redu- sure, a tire may have significant the signals from the tire pressure
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the damage and a fast leak that causes sensors, and the tire pressure
road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have monitoring system will not func-
accident involving serious vehicle a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire tion properly.
damage and serious personal injury as soon as possible. . FCC WARNING
could occur. When a spare tire is mounted or a Changes or modifications not
Check the pressure for all four tires wheel rim is replaced without the expressly approved by the party
and adjust the pressure to the COLD original pressure sensor/transmitter responsible for compliance
tire pressure shown on the tire being transferred, the low tire pres- could void the user’s authority
placard on the door pillar on the sure warning light will illuminate to operate the equipment.
driver’s side. steadily after blinking for approxi-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mately one minute. This indicates
very short distance, the tires get the TPMS is unable to monitor all
warm and their pressures increase four road wheels. Contact your

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-43
NOTE Parking your vehicle CAUTION
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC & Parking brake Never drive while the parking brake
Rules. Operation is subject to the To set the parking brake, depress the is set because this will cause un-
following two conditions: (1) this de- brake pedal firmly and hold it down until necessary wear on the brake lin-
vice may not cause harmful interfer- the parking brake lever is fully pulled up. ings. Before starting to drive, always
ence, and (2) this device must accept make sure that the parking brake
any interference received, including has been fully released.
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a
downgrade.
. For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position.
To release the parking brake, perform the Never rely on the mechanical friction of
following procedure. the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
1. Pull the lever up slightly.
2. Press the release button.
3. Lower the lever while keeping the
button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Parking brake warning” F3-19.
– CONTINUED –

7-44 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
WARNING and other obstructions on the

ground when parking. The under-
. Never leave unattended children spoilers could be damaged by con-
or pets in the vehicle. They could tact with them.
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
When facing downhill, the front wheels spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
should be turned into the curb. optional), pay attention to blocks

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-45
Hill start assist system ditions.

. when the clutch pedal is depressed
while the brake pedal is also depressed
CAUTION (MT models)
. when the vehicle has stopped with the
The Hill start assist system is a brake pedal depressed (CVT models)
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill Braking power is maintained temporarily
grade. To prevent accidents when (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be start assist system after the brake pedal is
sure to firmly set the parking brake. released. The driver is therefore able to
When setting the parking brake, start the vehicle in the same way as on a
make sure that the vehicle remains level grade, just using the clutch pedal
stationary when the clutch pedal (MT models only) and accelerator pedal
(MT models) and brake pedal (both (all models).
MT and CVT models) are released. If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
The Hill start assist system is a device to
is released, apply more braking power by
make the following vehicle operations
depressing the brake pedal again.
easier.
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-
– CONTINUED –

7-46 Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is place the ignition switch in the
illuminated “LOCK”/“OFF” position once and then
start over again.
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the ! To deactivate
brake pedal has been released. However,
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
this braking effect should disappear once
location and apply the parking brake.
the clutch pedal is released.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
NOTE “OFF” position.
A slight jolt may be felt when the 3. Restart the engine.
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
& To activate/deactivate the Hill

start assist system
CAUTION
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
maintained if the brake pedal is
released. Start on an uphill grade
Type A
by using the parking brake.
. when starting backward facing uphill You can activate/deactivate the Hill start
. when starting forward facing downhill assist system according to the following
. while the parking brake is applied procedure.
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” NOTE
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position
If you make an error when performing
. while the Hill start assist warning light/
any steps in the following procedure,

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-47
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “ ”

on the combination meter illuminates for
several seconds and then turns off.
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF switch.
Type B Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(models with power rear gate)
4. Confirm the following items.
(1) The Brake system warning light
illuminates.
(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light turns off.
(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
Hill start assist OFF indicator light
OFF indicator light turns off.
(4) The ABS warning light turns off. 7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch,
press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch once again. Then the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light illuminates.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch “OFF” position. The hill start assist system
(models without power rear gate) has now been deactivated.
5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle
– CONTINUED –

7-48 Starting and operating/Cruise control
NOTE Cruise control (if equipped) . If the cruise control indicator light
While the Hill start assist system is does not illuminate even after pressing
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF NOTE the cruise control main button, it is
indicator light illuminates continuously. possible that there is a malfunction in
For models with the EyeSight system: the system. We recommend that you
! To activate Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple- contact your SUBARU dealer for an
When the procedure to deactivate the Hill ment for the EyeSight system. inspection.
start assist system is performed again, the Cruise control enables you to maintain a . Make sure the cruise control system
system is activated. When the Hill start constant vehicle speed without holding is turned off when the cruise control is
assist system is activated, the Hill start your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is not in use to avoid unintentionally
assist OFF indicator light turns off. operative when the vehicle speed is 25 setting the cruise control.
& Hill start assist warning light/ mph (40 km/h) or more.
Hill start assist OFF indicator WARNING
light
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill Do not use the cruise control under
start assist OFF indicator light” F3-20. any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
NOTE
. On uphill and downhill slopes, de-
pending on the degree of the slope and
the load of the vehicle, there may be
cases when a constant speed cannot
be guaranteed.

Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-49
& To set cruise control combination meter will illuminate.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
Cruise control set indicator light

Cruise control main button At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
1. Press the cruise control main button.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the meter.
“SET” side and release it. Then release The vehicle will maintain the desired
the accelerator pedal. speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
NOTE
For turbo models, when you set the
Cruise control indicator light desired speed while the Sport Sharp
The cruise control indicator light on the (S#) mode is selected, the select lever/
gear position indicator will change
– CONTINUED –

from the current gear position indica- do not shift the lever into the “N” & To turn off the cruise control
tion to the “D” indication. position while driving except in case There are two ways to turn off the cruise
of emergency. If the select lever is control:
& To temporarily cancel the shifted into the “N” position, the
cruise control . Press the cruise control main button
engine brake will no longer work.
again.
The cruise control can be temporarily This could result in an accident.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
canceled in the following ways. “LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter turns off when the vehicle is completely stopped).
cruise control is canceled.
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Press the X-mode switch to activate
the X-mode (models with X-mode).
To resume the cruise control after it has
. Depress the brake pedal.
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
only). km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side to return to the Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
WARNING original cruising speed automatically. side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
For CVT models, you can cancel the The cruise control set indicator light in the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
cruise control by shifting the select combination meter will automatically illu- will be memorized and treated as the new
lever into the “N” position. However, minate at this time. set speed.

Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-51
U.S.-spec. models set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the ! To decrease the speed (by the
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph “RES/SET” switch)
vehicle speed and the set speed is less (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can cruise control system regards this
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time operation as that intended to decrease
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the the vehicle speed.
“RES” side quickly. . Except U.S. spec. models
If the difference between the actual
Except U.S.-spec. models vehicle speed when the switch is
When the difference between the actual pressed and the speed last time you
vehicle speed and the set speed is less set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This
increased 1 km/h each time by pressing occurs because the cruise control
the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side system regards this operation as that
quickly. intended to decrease the vehicle
! To increase the speed (by accel- speed. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
erator pedal) . Turbo models side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to If you depress the accelerator pedal the desired speed. Then, release the
accelerate the vehicle to the desired while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
speed. selected, the select lever/gear position will be memorized and treated as the new
indicator may change from the “D” set speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
indication to the current gear position
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed U.S.-spec. models
indication.
is set and the vehicle will keep running at When the difference between the actual
that speed without depressing the accel- vehicle speed and the set speed is less
erator pedal. than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
NOTE pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
. U.S.-spec. models “SET” side quickly.
If the difference between the actual Except U.S.-spec. models
vehicle speed when the switch is When the difference between the actual
pressed and the speed last time you vehicle speed and the set speed is less
– CONTINUED –

than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be

lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control indicator light

Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
F3-30.
& Cruise control set indicator

light
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-30.

Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-14
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................ 8-14
Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped) ............ 8-15
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5 When not towing a trailer ................................... 8-18
On-road and off-road driving.............................. 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-18
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-19
Driving on snowy and icy roads ......................... 8-10 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-21
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-11 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11 8
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-12

8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
km) The following suggestions will help to save
fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not maintain that speed for as long as gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
possible.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm . Always properly maintain the en-
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
. Avoid remaining in a parked
tire wear and fuel consumption.
The same break-in procedures should be vehicle for a lengthy time while
. Use the air conditioner only when the engine is running. If that is
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary.
mounted engine or when brake pads or unavoidable, then use the venti-
. Keep the front and rear wheels in lation fan to force fresh air into
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

Driving tips/Catalytic converter 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
vehicle, have the problem gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
checked and corrected as soon
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
as possible. If you must drive
ter:
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
. Keep the rear gate closed while catalytic converter.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
. Never start the engine by pushing or
from entering the vehicle.
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
NOTE . Never turn off the ignition switch while
Due to the expansion and contraction the vehicle is moving.
of the metals used in the manufacture . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
of the exhaust system, you may hear a the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
crackling sound coming from the ex- Non-turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have
haust system for a short time after the your vehicle checked and repaired by an
engine has been shut off. This sound is authorized SUBARU dealer.
normal. . Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
Turbo models near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
– CONTINUED –

8-4 Driving tips/Periodic inspections
operates at very high tempera- Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries

tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
materials away from the exhaust at all times, always have the recom- another country:
pipe while the engine is running. mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
The exhaust gas is very hot. the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and re-
formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country.
intervals.

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models 8-5
Driving tips for AWD models printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
bottom of driver’s door pillar.
WARNING If all of four tires are not the same
. Always maintain a safe driving for items (a) to (h), there is a
speed according to the road and possibility that serious mechan-
weather conditions in order to ical damage could occur to the
avoid having an accident on a drive train of your car, and affect
sharp turn, during sudden brak- the following.
ing or under other similar condi- — Ride
tions. — Handling
. Always use the utmost care in — Braking
driving – overconfidence be- — Speedometer/Odometer All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
cause you are driving an All- calibration power to all four wheels. AWD models
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily provide better traction when driving on
lead to a serious accident. — Clearance between the body slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
and tires when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
. When you replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the It also may be dangerous and By shifting power between the front and
same for following items. lead to loss of vehicle control, rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
and it can lead to an accident. provide added traction during acceleration
(a) Size
and added engine braking force during
(b) Circumference deceleration.
(c) Speed symbol CAUTION
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
(d) Load index If you use a temporary spare tire to may handle differently than an ordinary
(e) Construction replace a flat tire, be sure to use the two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
(f) Manufacturer original temporary spare tire stored some features unique to AWD. For safety
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may purposes as well as to avoid damaging
(g) Brand (tread pattern) result in severe mechanical damage the AWD system, you should keep the
(h) Degrees of wear to the drive train of your vehicle. following tips in mind.
For the items (a) to (d), you must . An AWD model is better able to climb
obey the specification that is steeper roads under snowy or slippery
– CONTINUED –

8-6 Driving tips/On–road and off–road driving
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. On-road and off-road driving of gravity, is more likely to be
There is little difference in handling, affected by crosswinds than or-
however, during extremely sharp turns or dinary passenger cars.
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING . Always use the utmost care in
down a slope or turning corners, be sure driving – overconfidence be-
to reduce your speed and maintain an . In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more cause you are driving an All-
ample distance from other vehicles. Wheel Drive model could easily
. Always check the cold tire pressure likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seatbelt. You the driver and lead to a serious accident.
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the all your passengers should fas-
ten the seatbelts before starting Your vehicle is classified as a utility
tire placard, which is located under the vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher
door latch on the driver’s side. to drive in order to minimize the
chance of serious injury or death. ground clearance which enables them to
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle be used for wide applications including off-
under hard-driving conditions such as . Do not make sharp turns and road driving. But please keep in mind that
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate quick maneuvers unless abso- your vehicle is neither a conventional off-
more frequent replacement of the follow- lutely unavoidable. Such actions road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A
ing items than that specified in the are dangerous as you may lose higher center of gravity in relation to the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. control, possibly resulting in a tread width as compared with ordinary
– Engine oil rollover which could cause death passenger cars makes vehicles of this
– Brake fluid or serious injury. type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility
– Rear differential gear oil . Always maintain a safe driving vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod- speed according to the road and over rate than other types of vehicles. The
els) weather conditions in order to high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
– Continuously variable transmission avoid having an accident on a real advantage, giving you a better view of
fluid (CVT models) sharp turn, during sudden brak- the road and allowing you to anticipate
– Front differential gear oil (CVT ing or under other similar condi- problems earlier. However, remember that
models) tions. your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
. Whenever strong crosswinds are speed cornering comparable to ordinary
. There are some precautions that you
present, slow down sufficiently passenger cars and that your vehicle
must observe when towing your vehicle.
could roll over if you make a sharp turn
For detailed information, refer to “Towing” to maintain control of your vehi-
at high speed.
F9-13. cle. Remember that your vehicle,
with its higher profile and center If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain

Driving tips/On–road and off–road driving 8-7
common sense precautions such as those depth of the water and the bottom of the the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
in the following list should be taken. stream bed for firmness and ensure that these materials trapped or adhering to the
. Make certain that you and all of your the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
passengers are wearing seatbelts. and cross the stream without stopping. fire could occur.
. Carry some emergency equipment, The water should be shallow enough that . Secure all cargo carried inside the
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, it does not reach the vehicle’s under- vehicle and make certain that it is not
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or carriage. Water entering the engine air piled higher than the seatbacks. During
citizens band radio. intake or the exhaust pipe or water sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- splashing onto electrical parts may da- could be thrown around in the vehicle and
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or mage your vehicle and may cause it to cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
over rough terrain. stall. Never attempt to drive through the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
rushing water; regardless of its depth, it center of gravity and make it more prone
. Slow down and employ extra caution at can wash away the ground from under
all times. When driving off-road, you will to tip over.
your tires, resulting in possible loss of . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
not have the benefit of marked traffic traction and even vehicle rollover.
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
the like. . Always check your brakes for effec- pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, select lever back and forth between “1”/
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat engine. For the best possible traction,
down the slopes. A vehicle can much that process several times to dry out the
more easily tip over sideways than it can avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
brake discs and brake pads. free the vehicle.
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep. . Do not drive or park over or near . When the road surface is extremely
flammable materials such as dry grass or slippery, you can obtain better traction by
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
cially at higher speeds. starting the vehicle with the transmission
exhaust system is very hot while the in 2nd than 1st. For CVT models with
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the engine is running and right after engine manual mode, refer to “Selection of
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the stops. This could create a fire hazard. manual mode” F7-25.
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive . After driving through tall grass, mud,
with your fingers and thumbs on the . Never equip your vehicle with tires
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there larger than those specified in this manual.
outside of the rim. is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
. If driving through water, such as when . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the road driving. Suspension components are
crossing shallow streams, first check the underbody. Clear off any such matter from particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
– CONTINUED –

8-8 Driving tips/Winter driving
need to be washed thoroughly. Winter driving SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
. Frequent driving of an AWD model tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
under hard-driving conditions such as & Operation during cold surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
rough roads or off roads will necessitate weather perature varies according to how much it
more frequent replacement of the follow- is diluted, as indicated in the following
Carry some emergency equipment, such table.
ing items than that specified in the
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
maintenance schedule described in the
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. Washer Fluid Con-
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. centration Freezing Temperature
– Engine oil Check the battery and cables. Cold
– Brake fluid temperatures reduce battery capacity. 30% 10.48F (−128C)
– Rear differential gear oil The battery must be in good condition to 50% −48F (−208C)
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod- provide enough power for cold winter
starts. 100% −498F (−458C)
els)
– Continuously variable transmission It normally takes longer to start the engine In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid (CVT models) in very cold weather conditions. Use an fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
– Front differential gear oil (CVT engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity the table above when adjusting the fluid
models) for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil concentration to the outside temperature.
will make it harder to start the engine. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
Remember that damage done to your
Keep the door locks from freezing by a different concentration from the one
SUBARU while operating it off-road and
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from
not using common sense precautions
the piping between the reservoir tank and
such as those listed above is not eligible Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer
for warranty coverage. or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the
Use a windshield washer fluid that con- nozzles.
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes CAUTION
because they may damage the paint of
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
the vehicle.
tration appropriately for the out-

Driving tips/Winter driving 8-9
side temperature. If the concen- winter driving, stop when and where it is WARNING
tration is inappropriate, sprayed safe to do so and check under the fenders
washer fluid may freeze on the periodically. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
windshield and obstruct your ! Parking in cold weather gases under your vehicle. Keep
view, and the fluid may freeze in snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
Do not use the parking brake when
the reservoir tank. from around your vehicle if you park
parking for long periods in cold weather
. State or local regulations on the vehicle in snow with the engine
since it could freeze in that position.
volatile organic compounds may running.
Instead, you should observe the following
restrict the use of methanol, a tips.
common windshield washer anti- 1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT ! Refueling in cold weather
freeze additive. Washer fluids models, or the select lever in “P” for CVT To help prevent moisture from forming in
containing non-methanol anti- models. the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
freeze agents should be used use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
only if they provide cold weather tank is recommended during cold weather.
prevent the vehicle from moving.
protection without damaging
Use only additives that are specifically
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades When the vehicle is parked in snow or designed for this purpose. When an
or washer system. when it snows, raise the wiper blades off antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
the glass to prevent damage to them. longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
! Before driving your vehicle When the vehicle has been left parked fuel level reaches half empty.
Before entering the vehicle, remove any after use on roads heavily covered with If your SUBARU is not going to be used
snow or ice from your shoes because that snow, or has been left parked during a for an extended period, it is best to have
could make the pedals slippery and snowstorm, icing may develop on the the fuel tank filled to capacity.
driving dangerous. brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice ! Opening rear gate (models with
While warming up the vehicle before power rear gate)
driving, check that the accelerator pedal, buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
brake pedal, and all other controls operate and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, CAUTION
smoothly.
being careful not to damage the disc
Clear away ice and snow that has Before operating the power rear
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-
accumulated under the fenders to avoid gate, check that there is no frost or
ness.
making steering difficult. During severe snow between the power rear gate
and the vehicle body. If you notice
– CONTINUED –

8-10 Driving tips/Winter driving
frost or snow etc. on the power rear WARNING deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
gate, remove it. If you forcibly windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-
operate the power rear gate with Do not use the cruise control on ger and deicer” F3-106.
frost or snow, it may cause a mal- slippery roads such as snowy or icy . To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the
function. roads. This may cause loss of rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger
vehicle control. and deicer” F3-106.
& Driving on snowy and icy When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
roads CAUTION to stick on the surface of the windshield
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid despite wiper operation, use the defroster
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- Avoid prolonged continuous driving with the airflow selection in “ ” and the
speed driving, and sharp turning when in snowstorms. Snow will enter the temperature set for maximum warmth.
driving on snowy or icy roads. engine’s intake system and may After the windshield gets warmed enough
Always maintain ample distance between hinder the airflow, which could re- to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you sult in engine shutdown or even using the windshield washer. Refer to
to avoid the need for sudden braking. breakdown. “Windshield washer” F3-95.
To supplement the foot brake, use the Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
engine brake effectively to control the ! Wiper operation when snowing wiper from working effectively. If snow is
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear Before driving in cold weather, make sure stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
when necessary.) the wiper blades are not frozen to the a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- windshield or rear window. the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly warning flasher to alert other drivers.
leading to loss of vehicle control. If the wiper blades are frozen to the Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-7.
windshield or rear window, perform the
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- following procedure. We recommend use of non-freezing type
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- . To thaw the windshield wiper blades, wiper blades (winter blades) during the
mance on snowy and icy roads. For use the defroster with the airflow selection seasons you could have snow and freez-
information on braking on slippery sur- in “ ” and the temperature set for ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake maximum warmth until the wiper blades superior wiping performance in snowy
System)” F7-33 and “Vehicle Dynamics are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate conditions. Be sure to use blades that
Control system” F7-36. control” F4-1. are suitable for your vehicle.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

Driving tips/Winter driving 8-11
CAUTION (g) Brand (tread pattern) tires” as original equipment, which are
(h) Degrees of wear designed to provide an adequate measure
During high-speed driving, non- of traction, handling and braking perfor-
For the items (a) to (d), you must mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
freezing type wiper blades may not
obey the specification that is may be possible to enhance performance
perform as well as standard wiper
printed on the tire placard. The through use of tires designed specifically
blades. If this happens, reduce the
tire placard is located on the for winter driving conditions.
vehicle speed.
bottom of driver’s door pillar.
When you choose to install winter tires on
If all of four tires are not the same your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
NOTE for items (a) to (h), there is a size and type. You must install four winter
When the season requiring non-freez- possibility that serious mechan- tires that are of the same size, construc-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace ical damage could occur to the tion, brand and load range and you should
them with standard wiper blades. drive train of your car, and affect never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
the following. since this may result in dangerous hand-
& Corrosion protection — Ride ling characteristics. When you choose a
— Handling tire, make sure that there is enough
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4. clearance between the tire and vehicle
— Braking body.
& Snow tires — Speedometer/Odometer
calibration Remember to drive with care at all times
WARNING regardless of the type of tires on your
— Clearance between the body vehicle.
and tires
. When you replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the It also may be dangerous and & Tire chains
same for following items. lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident. CAUTION
(a) Size
. Do not use a combination of
(b) Circumference Tire chains cannot be used on your
radial, belted bias or bias tires
(c) Speed symbol since it may cause dangerous vehicle because of the lack of
(d) Load index handling characteristics and lead clearance between the tires and
to an accident. vehicle body.
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
– CONTINUED –

8-12 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
NOTE engine. For the best possible traction, Loading your vehicle
When tire chains cannot be used, use avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
of another type of traction device (such free the vehicle.
as spring chains) may be acceptable if When the road surface is extremely WARNING
use on your vehicle is recommended slippery, you can obtain better traction by
by the device manufacturer, taking into starting the vehicle with the transmission . Never allow passengers to ride
account tire size and road conditions. in 2nd than in 1st (MT models and CVT on a folded rear seatback or in
Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models with manual mode). the cargo area. Doing so may
structions, especially regarding max- result in serious injury.
imum vehicle speed. If your vehicle is a CVT model with manual . Never stack luggage or other
mode, for information about holding the cargo higher than the top of the
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, transmission in the 2nd position, refer to
drive slowly, readjust or remove the seatback because it could tumble
“Selection of manual mode” F7-25. forward and injure passengers in
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage the event of a sudden stop or
caused to your vehicle by use of a accident. Keep luggage or cargo
traction device is not covered under low, as close to the floor as
warranty. possible.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-13
WARNING CAUTION & Vehicle capacity weight
. When you carry something inside . Do not carry spray cans, contain-
the vehicle, secure it whenever ers with flammable or corrosive
you can to prevent it from being liquids or any other dangerous
thrown around inside the vehicle items inside the vehicle.
during sudden stops, sharp turns . Do not close the rear gate with
or in an accident. cargo protruding from the cargo
. Do not pile heavy loads on the area. The cargo may be da-
roof. These loads raise the vehi- maged. In models with power
cle’s center of gravity and make it rear gate, the rear gate may open
more prone to tip over. via reverse function.
. Secure lengthy items properly to . In models with power rear gate,
prevent them from shooting for- be careful not to allow collision
ward and causing serious injury between the rear gate and the
during a sudden stop. cargo when you are loading
cargo on the roof. Otherwise,
. Never exceed the maximum load
the rear gate will hit the cargo
limit. If you do, some parts on
when opening and may cause
your vehicle can break, or it can
damage to both the cargo and
change the way your vehicle
the rear gate.
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can NOTE
shorten the life of your vehicle. For better fuel economy, do not carry
. Do not place anything on the unneeded cargo.
extended cargo area cover (if
equipped). Such items could Vehicle placard
tumble forward in the event of a The load capacity of your vehicle is
sudden stop or a collision. This determined by weight, not by available
could cause serious injury. cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
– CONTINUED –

8-14 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any range than the originals do not increase
side door pillar. It includes the total weight optional equipment and trailer tongue the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
of the driver and all passengers and their load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
belongings, any optional equipment such pending on the situation. The GVWR & Roof rail (if equipped)
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
Vehicle Weight Rating and weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of 1) Roof rack
the luggage. Luggage can be carried on the roof after
When possible, the load should be evenly securing the roof rack to the roof rails.
distributed throughout the vehicle. When installing the roof rack on the roof
rails, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you tions. The roof rails are designed to carry
Certification label should confirm that GVW and front and loads (luggage and roof rack) of not more
The certification label attached to the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and than 150 lbs (68 kg).
driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR vehicle scale, found at a commercial CAUTION
(Gross Axle Weight Rating). weighing station.
. When using the roof rack, make
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower sure that the total carrying load
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they of the roof rack and luggage does
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-15
loading may cause damage to & Roof molding and crossbar the vehicle and create a safety
the vehicle. (if equipped) hazard.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together Cargo can be carried after securing the
with the roof rack and any appro- roof crossbar kit to the roof moldings and
priate carrying attachment that installing the appropriate carrying attach-
may be needed. The roof rails ment. When installing the roof crossbar
must never be used alone to kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage When you carry cargo on the roof using
to the roof or paint, or a danger- the roof crossbar kit and a carrying
ous road hazard due to loss of attachment, never exceed the maximum
cargo could result. load limit as explained below. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
NOTE exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Remember that the vehicle’s center of Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
gravity is altered with the weight of the CAUTION about loading cargo into or onto your
load on the roof, thus affecting driving vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
characteristics. . For cargo carrying purposes, the F8-12. The maximum load limit of the
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard roof molding must be used to- cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind gether with a roof crossbar kit must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place
effects will be increased. and the appropriate carrying at- the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest
tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.
the roof or paint or a dangerous Always properly secure all cargo.
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
– CONTINUED –

8-16 Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)
! Installing carrying attachments on ! Removal and installation of the Trailer hitch (dealer option)
the crossbars crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak WARNING
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross- . Never exceed the maximum
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc- weight specified for the trailer
tions and make sure that the attachment is hitch. Exceeding the maximum
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only weight could cause an accident
attachments designed specifically for the resulting in serious personal in-
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is juries. Permissible trailer weight
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach- changes depending on the situa-
ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg). tion. For possible recommenda-
Before operating the vehicle, make sure tions and limitations, refer to
that the cargo is properly secured on the “Trailer towing” F8-18.
attachment.
Each of the two roof moldings has two . Trailer brakes are required when
NOTE mounting points for crossbars. Each the towing load exceeds 1,000
Remember that the vehicle’s center of mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
gravity is altered with the weight of the a screwdriver to remove the covers. When has safety chains and that each
load on the roof, thus affecting the installing the crossbars on the roof mold- chain will hold the trailer’s max-
driving characteristics. ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. imum gross weight. Towing trai-
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard lers without safety chains could
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind create a traffic safety hazard if
effects will be increased. the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could get loose and create a

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option) 8-17
traffic safety hazard. & Connecting a trailer receiver tube.

. Use only the ball mount supplied 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
with this hitch. Use the hitch only hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not through the ball mount.
use with any type of weight 3. Insert the safety pin onto the hitch pin
distributing hitch. securely.
. The standard bumper beam must 4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
be installed after you remove the does not come off the hitch receiver.
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased
and there is increased risk of
injury to passengers in the case
of an accident if the trailer hitch
or a standard bumper beam is
not installed. One of them must
always be installed on the vehi-
cle.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is 1) Hitch ball installation point
not possible to install the rear 2) Hooks for safety chains
towing hook.
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer for the ball mount and your trailer. The
towing” F8-18. hitch ball must be securely installed on the
1) Ball mount ball mount.
2) Hitch pin 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
3) Safety pin 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
A) Hitch receiver tube safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch maximum gross weight. The chains
– CONTINUED –

8-18 Driving tips/Trailer towing
should cross under the trailer tongue to wire harness by individually activating the Trailer towing
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
ground in case it should disconnect from trailer.
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
chains taking tight turn situations into NOTE vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
account; however, be careful not to let
Always disconnect the trailer wire har- loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
them drag on the ground.
ness before launching or retrieving a brakes, tires and suspension and has an
WARNING watercraft. adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
Do not connect safety chains to part & When not towing a trailer and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of the vehicle other than the safety . Remove the ball mount from the hitch of correct equipment and cautious opera-
chain hooks. receiver tube. tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
connector of the hitch wire harness to purchasing a hitch and other necessary
protect against possible damage. towing equipment appropriate for your
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
four-pin connector using terminal grease. instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Hitch harness connector & Warranties and maintenance
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black SUBARU warranties do not apply to
four-pin wire connector to the towing vehicle damage or malfunction caused
trailer’s wire harness. by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance

Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-19
will be required due to the additional load. vehicle and trailer are accepta- ! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under ble. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty (GVWR)
and Maintenance Booklet”.) ! Total trailer weight
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (en-
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits

WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following. Gross Vehicle Weight
Exceeding the maximum load limits Total trailer weight The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
could cause personal injury and/or never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
vehicle damage. The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the Rating (GVWR).
maximum weight in the following table. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
CAUTION combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
Conditions Maximum total trailer driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
weight
. Adequate size trailer brakes are trailer tongue load and any other optional
required when the trailer and its When towing a trailer 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
equipment installed on your vehicle.
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) with brakes. Therefore, the GVW changes depending
total weight. on the situation. Determine the GVW each
. Before towing a trailer, check the time before going on a trip by putting your
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
– CONTINUED –

! Tongue load
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification label
Tongue load
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door of your Gross Axle Weight Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
vehicle. 8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
The total weight applied to each axle
and does not exceed the maximum value
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
of 175 lbs (80 kg).
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating NOTE
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also trailer tongue load exceeds 175 lbs (80
shown on the certification label. kg) when calculated at 8% of the
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to maximum total trailer weight.
confirm that the total weight and weight Even in this case, the maximum value
distribution are within safe driving limits, is 175 lbs (80 kg).
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer hitches

WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
1) Jack F: Front of your vehicle to install a commer-
2) Bathroom scale cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
The tongue load can be adjusted by
The tongue load can be weighed with a proper distribution of the load in the trailer. ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration Never load the trailer with more weight in enter the passenger compartment
above. When weighing the tongue load, the back than in the front; approximately through the drilled hole. Exhaust
be sure to position the towing coupler at 60 percent of the trailer load should be in gas contains carbon monoxide, a
the height at which it would be during the front and approximately 40 percent in colorless and odorless gas which is
actual towing, using a jack as shown. the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
as possible on both the left and right Also, drilling the frame or under-
sides. body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to vehicle and cause corrosion around
prevent a change in weight distribution the drilled hole.
while driving.
WARNING CAUTION
If the trailer is loaded with more . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
weight in the back of trailer’s axle haust system, brake system, or
than in the front, the load is taken off other systems when installing a
– CONTINUED –

! Trailer safety chains

hitch or other trailer towing & Connecting a trailer
equipment.
! Trailer brakes WARNING
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the Always use safety chains between
axle housing, wheel bearings,
WARNING
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
wheels or tires. . Adequate size trailer brakes are trailer without safety chains could
required when the trailer and its create a traffic safety hazard if the
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) trailer separates from the hitch due
trailer. The use of a genuine SUBARU total weight. to coupling damage or hitch ball
trailer hitch is recommended. A genuine damage.
SUBARU hitch is available from your . Do not directly connect your
SUBARU dealer. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
to the hydraulic brake system in
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- ball should break or become discon-
your vehicle. Direct connection
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your nected, the trailer could get loose and
would cause the vehicle’s brake
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- create a traffic safety hazard.
performance to deteriorate and
sional hitch supplier to assist you in For safety, always connect the towing
could lead to an accident.
choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight chains. Pass the chains crossing each
manufacturer’s instructions for installation plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs other under the trailer tongue to prevent
and use. (453 kg), the trailer is required to be the trailer from dropping onto the ground
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the equipped with its own brake system. in case the trailer tongue should discon-
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed Electric brakes or surge brakes are nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
to handle that type of load. recommended, and must be installed slack in the chains taking tight turn
For all types of hitches, regularly check properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes situations into account; however, be care-
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are conform with Federal, state/province and/ ful not to let them drag on the ground.
tight. or other applicable regulations. Your For more information about the safety
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed chain connection, refer to the instructions
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic for your hitch and trailer.
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.

! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
cle’s electrical system requires modifica- vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
increase its capacity and accommodate tire is firmly secured.
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult & Trailer towing tips
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the brake CAUTION
lights each time you hitch up.
! Tires . Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly
WARNING country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
Never tow a trailer when the tem- stability, stopping distance and
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, porary spare tire is used. The tem- braking performance will be dif-
check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is not designed to ferent from normal operation. For
provide a good rearward field of view sustain the towing load. Use of the safety’s sake, you should employ
without significant blind spots. If significant temporary spare tire when towing extra caution when towing a
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- can result in failure of the spare tire trailer and you should never
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that and/or less stability of the vehicle. drive at excessive speeds. You
conform with Federal, state/province and/ should also keep the following
or other applicable regulations. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle tips in mind:
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
! Trailer lights 9. ! Before starting out on a trip
CAUTION Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
proper inflation pressure should be in hitch mounting are in good condition. If
Direct splicing or other improper accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s any problems are apparent, do not tow the
connection of trailer lights may specifications. trailer.
damage your vehicle’s electrical . Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
system and cause a malfunction of In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
your vehicle’s lighting system. tipped sharply up at the front and down at
road service to repair the flat tire.
– CONTINUED –

the rear, check the total trailer weight, ! Driving with a trailer
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then . You should allow for considerably more
confirm that the load and its distribution stopping distance when towing a trailer.
are acceptable. Avoid sudden braking because it may
. Check that the tire pressures are result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
correct. control.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
connected properly. Confirm that erations. If your vehicle has a manual
– the trailer tongue is connected transmission, always start out in first gear
properly to the hitch ball. and release the clutch at moderate engine
– the trailer lights connector is con- revolution.
nected properly and trailer’s brake . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s rapid lane changes. 1) Left turn
brake pedal is pressed, and that the . Slow down before turning. Make a 2) Right turn
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when longer than normal turning radius because
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- the trailer wheels will be closer than the . Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
ated. vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In takes practice. When backing up with a
– the safety chains are connected a tight turn, the trailer could hit your trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
properly. vehicle. When turning back, grip the bottom of the
– all cargo in the trailer is secured . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
safety in position. the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
– the side mirrors provide a good for a right turn.
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
rearward field of view without a sig- weather conditions or the passing of large . If the ABS warning light illuminates
nificant blind spot. trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn grip the steering wheel and slow down the trailer and have repairs performed
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination immediately but gradually. immediately by the nearest SUBARU
before starting out on a trip. In an area free dealer.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and erable distance is required because of the ! Driving on grades
backing up. added weight and length caused by . Before going down a steep hill, slow
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over- . For CVT models, avoid using the
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
make sudden downshifts. an uphill slope instead of using the
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the parking brake or foot brake. That may
air conditioner may turn off automatically cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
to protect the engine from overheating. ! Parking on a grade
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay Always block the wheels under both
attention to the following indicators be- vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
cause the engine and transmission are the parking brake firmly. You should not
relatively prone to overheating. park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
: Coolant temperature high warning light hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
: AT OIL TEMP warning light should take the following steps:
(CVT models) 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
If the coolant temperature high warning 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
illuminates, immediately turn off the air
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
release the regular brakes slowly until the
nearest safe location. For further instruc-
blocks absorb the load.
tions and additional information, refer to
the following sections. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
– “If you park your vehicle in case of
the regular brakes.
an emergency” F9-2
– “Engine overheating” F9-12 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” position (CVT models)
– “Coolant temperature low indicator
and shut off the engine.
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light” F3-15
– “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
models)” F3-17

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an Towing ................................................................ 9-13

emergency ........................................................ 9-2 Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-13
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-15
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-16
Screwdriver and wheel nut wrench ...................... 9-4 Access key – if access key does not
Under the rear floor............................................. 9-4 operate properly ............................................. 9-17
Flat tires............................................................... 9-5 Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-17
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-5 Switching power ................................................ 9-17
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Starting engine .................................................. 9-18
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-8 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9 opened............................................................. 9-18
How to jump start............................................... 9-10 Power rear gate - if power rear gate does
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12 not operate properly....................................... 9-19
If steam is coming from the engine When the power rear gate is deactivated ............ 9-19
compartment.................................................... 9-12 When the rear gate cannot be unlocked ............. 9-20
If no steam is coming from the engine When the rear gate cannot be closed ................. 9-20
compartment.................................................... 9-12 If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-21
9

9-2 In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
If you park your vehicle in NOTE Temporary spare tire

case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
The hazard warning flasher should be mitter being transferred, the low
used in day or night to warn other drivers tire pressure warning light will
when you have to park your vehicle under illuminate steadily after blinking
emergency conditions. for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
vated regardless of the ignition switch
dealer as soon as possible for
position.
tire and sensor replacement and/
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing or system resetting.
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again.

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools 9-3
CAUTION . Do not drive over obstacles. This tire Maintenance tools

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
Never use any temporary spare tire is reduced.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
other than the original. Using other maintenance tools.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your . Jack
vehicle. . Jack handle
. Screwdriver
The temporary spare tire is smaller and . Towing hook (eye bolt)
lighter than a conventional tire and is
. Wheel nut wrench
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
porary spare tire periodically to keep the 2) Indicator location mark
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
as follows. . When the wear indicator appears on
Latin American models: 42 psi (290 the tread, replace the tire.
kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm2) . The temporary spare tire must be used
Other models: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
kgf/cm2) gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
When using the temporary spare tire, note tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
– CONTINUED –

9-4 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
& Screwdriver and wheel nut

wrench
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
1) Screwdriver 4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
2) Wheel nut wrench
The screwdriver, wheel nut wrench, etc. NOTE
are stored in your vehicle. . For how to use the jack, refer to
The tools can also be stored in the tool “Flat tires” F9-5.
bucket. . The following items may be different
depending on the model.
& Under the rear floor – The shape of the storage com-
The jack, jack handle and towing hook are partment
stored as shown in the following illustra- 1) Under-floor storage compartment (if – The locations of some mainte-
tions. equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage nance tools
compartment” F6-16.)
2) Jack handle
3) Spare tire
4) Tool bucket

In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-5
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out “Maintenance tools” F9-3.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe NOTE
place.
accident. Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
& Changing a flat tire
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
WARNING
2. Set the parking brake securely and
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
incline or a loose road surface. or the select lever to the “P” (Park)
The jack can come out of the position (CVT models).
jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support- 6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
ing the vehicle with this jack. attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear strictly follow the instructions.
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
– CONTINUED –

9-6 In case of emergency/Flat tires
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
Jack-up points 10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on 9. Place the jack under the side sill at the screw, and turn the handle until the tire
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
the wheel cover to remove it. tire. higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.

In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-7
WARNING torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.
16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Be sure to place the spacer
in the manner shown in the illustration,
and then tighten the bolt in the front side of
the bracket.
15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean illustration.
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
with a cloth. to “Tires” F12-9. Never use your foot on
13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
– CONTINUED –

9-8 In case of emergency/Flat tires
& Tire pressure monitoring vides the driver with a warning message
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. by sending a signal from a sensor that is
models) installed in each wheel when a tire
pressure is severely low relative to the
selected TPMS mode.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
17. When storing the spare tire after WARNING

repairing a flat tire, be sure to place the
If the low tire pressure warning light
spacer in the manner shown in the
illuminates while driving, never
illustration, and then tighten the bolt in Type A brake suddenly and keep driving
the rear side of the bracket.
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
WARNING road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
Never place a tire or tire changing damage and serious personal injury
tools in the passenger compartment could occur.
after changing wheels. In a sudden
Check the pressure for all four tires
stop or collision, loose equipment
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
could strike occupants and cause
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
placard on the door pillar on the
the proper place.
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
Type B significant damage and a fast leak
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-9
that causes the tire to lose air dealer to have the system inspected. Jump starting
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
wheel rim is replaced without the Do not let it come in contact with
original pressure sensor/transmitter the eyes, skin, clothing or the
being transferred, the low tire pres- vehicle.
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi- If battery fluid gets on you,
mately one minute. This indicates thoroughly flush the exposed
the TPMS is unable to monitor all area with water immediately. Get
four road wheels. Contact your medical help if the fluid has
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible entered your eyes.
for tire and sensor replacement and/ If battery fluid is accidentally
or system resetting. swallowed, immediately drink a
When a tire is repaired with liquid large amount of milk or water,
sealant, the tire pressure warning and obtain immediate medical
valve and transmitter may not oper- help.
ate properly. If a liquid sealant is Keep everyone including chil-
used, contact your nearest SUBARU dren away from the battery.
dealer or other qualified service . The gas generated by a battery
shop as soon as possible. Make explodes if a flame or spark is
sure to replace the tire pressure brought near it. Do not smoke or
warning valve and transmitter when light a match while jump starting.
replacing the tire. You may reuse the
wheel if there is no damage to it and . Never attempt jump starting if the
if the sealant residue is properly discharged battery is frozen. It
cleaned off. could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min- . Whenever working on or around
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU a battery, always wear suitable
– CONTINUED –

9-10 In case of emergency/Jump starting
eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start

objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
. A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.

In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut

9-12 In case of emergency/Engine overheating
Engine overheating engine compartment. Refer to “Engine until it stops. Release the pressure from
hood” F11-7. the radiator. After the pressure has been
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If fully released, remove the cap by pressing
WARNING the fan is not turning, immediately turn off down and turning it.
the engine and contact an authorized
Never attempt to remove the radia- SUBARU dealer for repair.
tor cap until the engine has been 3. After the coolant temperature high
shut off and has fully cooled down. warning light that has blinked or illumi-
When the engine is hot, the coolant nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
is under pressure. Removing the For details about the warning light, refer to
cap while the engine is still hot “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
could release a spray of boiling hot Coolant temperature high warning light”
coolant, which could burn you very F3-15.
seriously. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the tank. If the coolant level is below the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe “LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
location. mark.
& If steam is coming from the NOTE
engine compartment For details about how to check the
. Turn off the engine and get everyone coolant level or how to add coolant,
away from the vehicle until it cools down. refer to “Engine coolant” F11-14.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
er. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
& If no steam is coming from radiator with coolant.
the engine compartment If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
1. Keep the engine running at idling radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
speed. radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the clockwise slowly without pressing down

In case of emergency/Towing 9-13
Towing Front towing hook:

WARNING
1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and
If towing is necessary, it is best done by Never tow AWD models (both CVT jack handle out of the cargo area.
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial and MT models) with the front
towing service. Observe the following wheels raised off the ground while
procedures for safety. the rear wheels are on the ground,
or with the rear wheels raised off the
ground while the front wheels are on
the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to the
operation or deterioration of the
center differential.
& Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
from mud, sand or snow). with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
CAUTION screwdriver into the cutout of the cover
and pry open the cover.
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing
hook, do not apply excessive
lateral load to the towing hook.
– CONTINUED –

9-14 In case of emergency/Towing
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. threaded hole for attaching the towing
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. hook.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. Rear towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
jack handle out of the cargo area. hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely

using the jack handle.
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
After towing, remove the towing hook from using a screwdriver, and you will find a using the jack handle.

In case of emergency/Towing 9-15
After towing, remove the towing hook from Rear tie-down holes: the plugs. After using the rear tie-down
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. holes, return the plugs to their original
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. places.
WARNING WARNING
Do not use the towing hook except Use the rear tie-down holes only for
when towing your vehicle. downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
Front tie-down hooks: other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
1) Rear tie-down hole
This is the best way to transport your
The rear tie-down holes are located near vehicle. Use the following procedures to
each of the jack-up reinforcements. ensure safe transportation.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole. 1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove position for CVT models. Shift the shift
– CONTINUED –

9-16 In case of emergency/Towing
lever into the “1st” position for MT models. & Towing with all wheels on the . Remember that the brake booster
2. Apply the parking brake firmly. ground and power steering do not func-
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier tion when the engine is not
properly with safety chains. Each safety running. Because the engine is
chain should be equally tightened and turned off, it will take greater
care must be taken not to pull the chains effort to operate the brake pedal
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. and steering wheel.
CAUTION CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under- . If transmission failure occurs,
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both transport your vehicle on a flat-
optional), be careful not to scrape bed truck.
them when placing the vehicle on . For CVT models, the traveling
the carrier and when removing the speed must be limited to less
vehicle from the carrier. 1. Release the parking brake and put the than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
transmission in the “N”/neutral position. traveling distance to less than 31
2. The ignition switch should be in the miles (50 km). For greater speeds
“ACC” position while the vehicle is being and distances, transport your
towed. vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.

In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly 9-17
Access key – if access key & Locking and unlocking 3. Depress the brake pedal.
does not operate properly
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
1) Release button 4. Hold the access key with the buttons
If the locking/unlocking procedures, power 2) Mechanical key facing you, and touch the push-button
switch procedures or engine start proce- ignition switch with it.
While pressing the release button of the
dures cannot be operated because of When the communication between the
access key, take out the mechanical key.
strong radio signals in the surrounding access key and the vehicle is completed,
area or a low battery condition of the Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
access key, perform the following proce- mechanical key.
time, the status of the push-button ignition
dure. When the battery of the access key NOTE switch changes to either of the following.
is discharged, replace it with a new one. . When the keyless access with push-
Refer to “Replacing access key battery” After locking or unlocking, be sure to
reinsert the mechanical key into the button start system is deactivated:
F11-45. “ACC”
access key.
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
& Switching power button start system is deactivated, press
1. Apply the parking brake. the push-button ignition switch with the
2. Shift the select lever into the “P” brake pedal released. The status of the
position. push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
– CONTINUED –

9-18 In case of emergency/Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened
NOTE to the “ACC” or “ON” position. Rear gate – if the rear gate
If the power does not switch even 5. After the push-button ignition switch cannot be opened
though the above procedure was fol- turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU depressing the brake pedal, press the
dealer. push-button ignition switch. In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by operating the rear gate opener
& Starting engine NOTE
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
1. Apply the parking brake. If the engine does not start even
2. Shift the select lever into the “P” though the above procedure was fol-
position. lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
3. Depress the brake pedal. dealer.
1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button CAUTION
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the Never operate the rear gate open
access key and the vehicle is completed, lever with fingers because doing so
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same may cause an injury. Always use a
time, the push-button ignition switch turns flat-head screwdriver or a similar
tool.

In case of emergency/Power rear gate – if power rear gate does not operate properly 9-19
Power rear gate - if power In order for the rear gate to open and close
automatically, carry out the following
rear gate does not operate operation. If the rear gate does not open
properly and close automatically after carrying out
this operation, we recommend that you
& When the power rear gate is have the vehicle checked at a SUBARU
deactivated dealer.
NOTE ! When the rear gate is closed
. After deactivating automatic open-
ing and closing, the rear gate may open
or close automatically, moving little by
little. This movement is to prevent the
rear gate from quickly opening and
Models without power rear gate
closing and it will continue for approxi-
mately 15 seconds but it is not a
malfunction.
. While the power rear gate is tem-
porarily deactivated, if it is struck by
body parts or objects and sustains a
strong impact, the temporary deactiva-
tion may be canceled. The purpose of
this is to absorb the impact of the
collision and it is not a malfunction. In 1. Press and hold the rear gate opener
this case, the rear gate will not open or button. If the rear gate does not open,
close automatically. perform the procedure described in “Rear
gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened”
If the power rear gate senses a malfunc- F9-18.
Models with power rear gate tion, an electronic chirp will sound and 2. Gently close the rear gate by hand
automatic opening and closing will be until it reaches the half-shut position.
3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to deactivated. The rear gate will automati-
the right position using a flat-head screw- 3. Press and hold either of the power rear
cally open or close depending on the
driver or a similar tool. gate buttons.
degree it is open to at this time.
– CONTINUED –

9-20 In case of emergency/Power rear gate – if power rear gate does not operate properly
! When the rear gate is stuck at the

be careful not to be injured by
fully open position or does not fully
getting caught in or hit by the
close
rear gate.
1. Gently close the rear gate by hand . After closing the rear gate by the
until it reaches the half-shut position. If the following methods, we recom-
rear gate does not close, perform the mend that you have the vehicle
procedure described in “Rear gate – if the checked at a SUBARU dealer.
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-18.
2. Press and hold either of the power rear If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a
gate buttons. flat battery, etc., while the rear gate is
stopped midway, it can be closed by the
& When the rear gate cannot be following methods.
unlocked
2. After pushing the rear seat release
Perform the procedure described in “Rear
latch down once, remove the latch.
gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened”
F9-18.
& When the rear gate cannot be

closed
CAUTION
. On areas which are not flat, such
as hills, do not conduct any of
the following actions. The rear
gate may close suddenly and hit 1. Release the fitting on the left side rear
someone’s head, face or catch seat release latch.
fingers and body parts in it,
1) Unlock
resulting in injury. 2) Lock
. Even while conducting the fol-
lowing actions on a flat surface, 3. Using a flat-head screw driver, push
the lever inwards for temporary deactiva-

In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident 9-21
tion of the rear gate. If your vehicle is involved in Models with “keyless access with
an accident
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.
If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage.
Perform the following procedures to re-
start the engine after the system is
activated.
Models without “keyless access with
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
2. Restart the engine.

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

Appearance care
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Washing............................................................. 10-2 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3 Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4 panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4 Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6
10

10-2 Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care tangled around it, damaging the to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
wiper arm and other compo- with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
& Washing nents. Ask the automatic car- remaining water off with a chamois or soft
wash operator not to let the cloth.
CAUTION brushes touch the wiper arm or ! Washing the underbody
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
. When washing the vehicle, the window glass with adhesive tape Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
brakes may get wet. As a result, before operating the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
the brake stopping distance will rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
be longer. To dry the brakes, derbody components, such as the exhaust
drive the vehicle at a safe speed NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
while lightly depressing the When having your vehicle washed in cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
brake pedal to heat up the an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
brakes. beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
. Do not wash the engine compart-
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
ment and area adjacent to it. If
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
engine trouble or a malfunction contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
of electrical equipment. sion.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
. Do not use any organic solvents of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or
when washing the surface of the the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
bulb assembly cover. However, if sunlight. the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
a detergent with organic solvents sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
is used to wash the cover sur- Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
face, completely rinse off the sap, and bird droppings should be washed not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
detergent with water. Otherwise, off by using a light detergent, as required. caked mud.
the cover surface may be da- If you use a light detergent, make certain
maged. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. Since your vehicle is equipped
cleaning agents should be promptly
with a rear wiper, automatic car-
flushed from the surface and not allowed
wash brushes could become

Appearance care/Exterior care 10-3
CAUTION Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, solvents on the surface of the bulb
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of assembly cover. However, if a polish
. Be careful not to damage brake wax on a painted surface leads to loss of or wax with organic solvents is
hoses, sensor harnesses, and the original luster and also quickens the applied to the cover surface, com-
other parts when washing sus- deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
pension components. mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
parts. ished to the point where the luster or tone Be careful not to block the windshield
cannot be restored, lightly polish the washer nozzles with wax when waxing
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. the vehicle.
Never polish just the affected area, but
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
include the surrounding area as well.
or more between the washer nozzle and
Always polish in only one direction. A & Cleaning aluminum wheels
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
mended. Never use a coarse-grained clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
ously. compound. Coarse-grained compounds is left on too long, it may be difficult to
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean off.
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing
of the high temperature, high pressure . Do not use soap containing grit to
with a compound, coat with wax to restore clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with
resin parts such as moldings, or cause cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
a compound or an incorrect polishing with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When washing device.
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. num wheels) with water as soon as
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and possible when it has been splashed with
apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when driven on roads treated with salt or other
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic agents.

10-4 Appearance care/Corrosion protection
Corrosion protection vehicle remains for a long time, even of maintenance and treatment if you need
though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance.
dry.
Your SUBARU has been designed and Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
built to resist corrosion. Special materials 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them.
and protective finishes have been used on sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water
fine appearance, strength, and reliable tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
operation. because that could cause corrosion.
& To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to
& Most common causes of Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent make sure the area is dry.
corrosion corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
The most common causes of corrosion garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
are: promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces. be caused by dampness. If you wash the
1. The accumulation of moisture retain- vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, . roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter into the garage when wet or covered with
cavities, and other areas. snow, that can cause dampness.
2. Damage to paint and other protective . mud, sand, or gravel
coatings caused by gravel and stone . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
chips or minor accidents. and/or in areas where road salts and other
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, and hood latch should
when: very thorough washing. be inspected and lubricated periodically.
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the
control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such
areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, them are found to be rusted, they should
especially when temperatures range just be given an appropriate rust prevention
above freezing. treatment or should be replaced. Contact
3. Dampness in certain parts of the your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-5
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when
cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary.
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams. CAUTION
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove solvents, paint thinners, window
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cleaner or fuel must never be used
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If on leather or synthetic interior ma-
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long terials. Doing so could damage the
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended surface and cause the color to
that the seats and head restraints be deteriorate.
If the stain does not come out, try a covered, or the windows shaded, to
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use prevent fading or shrinkage.
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches & Climate control panel, audio
may be treated with a commercial leather panel, instrument panel,
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- spray lacquer. You will discover that each
tions. leather seat section will develop soft folds console panel, and switches
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
CAUTION genuine leather. control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
When cleaning the seat, do not use meter panel, and switches.
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
– CONTINUED –

10-6 Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
CAUTION & Monitor (if equipped)

To clean the navigation/multi function dis-
. Do not use organic solvents such play monitor, wipe it with a silicone cloth or
as paint thinners or fuel, or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is extremely
strong cleaning agents that con- dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened
tain those solvents. with neutral detergent then carefully wipe
. Do not use chemical solvents off any remaining detergent.
that contain silicone on the vehi-
cle audio system, electrical com- CAUTION
ponents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres . Do not spray neutral detergent
to these parts, it may cause directly onto the monitor. Doing
damage to electrical compo- so could damage the monitor’s
nents. components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.

Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Front differential gear oil (CVT models)......... 11-19
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-19
Before checking or servicing in the engine Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-19
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-19
When checking or servicing in the engine Brake fluid........................................................ 11-19
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-19
Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-5 Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-20
Removing and reinstalling clips .......................... 11-5 Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-20
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-7 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-20
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-8 Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-21
Non-turbo models .............................................. 11-8 Brake booster .................................................. 11-21
Turbo models ..................................................... 11-9 Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-22
Engine oil.......................................................... 11-10 Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-22
Engine oil consumption.................................... 11-10 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-22
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-10 Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-22
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-11 Checking the clutch function............................ 11-22
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-13 Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-23
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-13
Hill start assist system.................................... 11-23
Cooling system ................................................ 11-13 Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-23
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-14
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-24
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-14
Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-24 11
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-15
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-16
Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-25
Types of tires................................................... 11-25
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-17
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-17 equipped) ...................................................... 11-25
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-18 Tire inspection................................................. 11-26
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-18 Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-27
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-18 Wheel balance ................................................. 11-29
Continuously variable transmission fluid....... 11-18 Wear indicators ............................................... 11-29
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-30

Maintenance and service
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-30 Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-40

Tire replacement .............................................. 11-30 Headlights (models with HID headlights)........... 11-40
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-31 Headlights (models without HID headlights)...... 11-40
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-32 Front turn signal light, front side marker light
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-32 and parking light ........................................... 11-42
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-33 Parking light .................................................... 11-42
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-34 Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-42
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-34 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-43
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-35 License plate light ........................................... 11-44
Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-36 Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-44
Battery............................................................... 11-37 Battery replacement ........................................ 11-44
Fuses ................................................................ 11-38 Replacing access key battery........................... 11-45
Replacing transmitter battery ........................... 11-46
Installation of accessories............................... 11-40

Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule 11-3
Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.
The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re- . Always use the proper tools and
quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be make certain that they are well
are shown in the “Warranty and Main- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. maintained.
tenance Booklet”.
If you perform maintenance and service . Never get under the vehicle sup-
For details of your maintenance schedule, by yourself, you should familiarize yourself ported only by a jack. Always use
read the separate “Warranty and Main- with the information provided in this safety stands to support the
tenance Booklet”. section on general maintenance and vehicle.
service for your SUBARU. . Never keep the engine running in
NOTE a poorly ventilated area, such as
For models with a multi function dis- Incorrect or incomplete service could a garage or other closed areas.
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
play, you can set a reminder to be
tion. Any problems caused by improper . Do not smoke or allow open
displayed when a scheduled mainte- flames around the fuel or battery.
nance item is almost due. For details, maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage. This will cause a fire.
refer to “Maintenance settings” F3-66.
. Because the fuel system is under
WARNING pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
. Always select a safe area when by your SUBARU dealer.
performing maintenance on your . Wear adequate eye protection to
vehicle. guard against getting oil or fluids
. Always be very careful to avoid in your eyes. If something does
injury when working on the vehi- get in your eyes, thoroughly
cle. Remember that some of the wash them out with clean water.
materials in the vehicle may be . Do not tamper with the wiring of
hazardous if improperly used or the SRS airbag system or seat-
handled, for example, battery belt pretensioner system, or at-
acid. tempt to take its connectors
. Your vehicle should only be ser- apart, as that may activate the
viced by persons fully competent system or it can render it inop-
to do so. Serious personal injury
– CONTINUED –

11-4 Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
erative. NEVER use a circuit when the engine is running and

tester for this wiring. If your remain hot for some time after
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- the engine has stopped.
sioner needs service, consult . Do not spill engine oil, engine
your nearest SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
NOTE This may cause a fire.
SUBARU does not endorse the use of . Always remove the key from the
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- ignition switch. When the ignition
tems and strongly advises against switch is in the “ON” position,
performing these services on a the cooling fan may operate
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap- suddenly even when the engine
proved flushing systems use chemi- is stopped. If your body or
cals and/or solvents which have not clothes come into contact with a CAUTION
been tested or approved by SUBARU. rotating fan, that could result in
SUBARU warranties do not cover any serious injury. . Do not contact the drive belt
part of the vehicle which is damaged by . Before performing any servicing cover while checking the compo-
adding or applying chemicals and/or on a vehicle equipped with a nents in the engine compart-
solvents other than those approved or remote engine start system (a ment. Doing so may cause your
recommended by SUBARU. dealer option) temporarily place hand to slip off the cover and
that system in the service mode result in an unexpected injury.
& Before checking or servicing to prevent it from unexpectedly . Do not touch the oil filter until the
starting the engine. engine has cooled down comple-
in the engine compartment
tely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the
WARNING oil filter becomes very hot when
. Always stop the engine and set the engine is running and re-
the parking brake firmly to pre- mains hot for some time after
vent the vehicle from moving. the engine has stopped.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot

Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips 11-5
& When checking or servicing Maintenance tips 3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running ! Type B clips
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
WARNING elements or specific bulbs.
A running engine can be dangerous. & Removing and reinstalling
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, clips
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving ! Removing clips
engine parts. Removing rings, There are several types of clips used for
watches and ties is advisable. your vehicle.
! Type A clips
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
– CONTINUED –

11-6 Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
! Type C clips ! Reinstalling clips
Type C clips
Type A clips Insert the clip without the center portion
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
first and then push the center portion of
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
the clip into the hole.
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
Type B clips

Maintenance and service/Engine hood 11-7
Engine hood WARNING
To open the hood: Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
windshield, return them to their original
while the vehicle is moving and
position.
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
2. Pull the hood release knob under the mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
instrument panel. position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.

11-8 Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

Engine compartment overview (MT) (page 11-19)
& Non-turbo models 3) Battery (page 11-37)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-32)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-11)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-10)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview 11-9
& Turbo models 1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-19)

3) Battery (page 11-37)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-32)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-11)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-10)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)

11-10 Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Engine oil . When engine braking is employed pan before checking the level.
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds
CAUTION . When the engine is operated under
heavy loads
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right . When towing a trailer
and left, then pull it out. Other- . When the engine idles for long periods
wise, you may be injured acci- of time
dentally straining yourself. . When the vehicle is operated in stop
. Use only engine oil with the and go and/or heavy traffic situations
recommended grade and vis- . When the vehicle is used under severe
cosity. thermal conditions
. Be careful not to spill engine oil . When the vehicle accelerates and
when adding it. If oil touches the decelerates frequently 1) Oil level gauge
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad 2) Oil filler cap
Under these or similar conditions, you 3) Oil filter
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If should check your oil at least every 2nd
engine oil gets on the exhaust fuel fill-up and change your engine oil 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. more frequently. If your oil consumption and insert it again.
rate is greater than 1 quart every 1,200 3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
miles or 1 liter every 2,000 kilometers, inserted until it stops.
& Engine oil consumption contact your SUBARU dealer who may
Some engine oil will be consumed while perform a test under controlled conditions.
driving. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus & Checking the oil level
require refilling between maintenance
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
intervals:
stop.
. When the engine is new and within the
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
break-in period
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
. When the engine oil is of lower quality just after stopping the engine, wait a few
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

Maintenance and service/Engine oil 11-11
. Use only engine oil with the & Changing the oil and oil filter
recommended grade and vis-
cosity. CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the If you change your own oil, be sure
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad to drain all the oil from the filter
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If before disposal. Do not dispose of
engine oil gets on the exhaust used engine oil by placing it in the
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. trash, or by pouring it onto the
ground, into sewers, or into any
. If the level gauge is not pulled out body of water. Check with your local
easily, twist the level gauge right government office for the proper
and left, then pull it out. Other- disposal options available to you.
1) Full level wise, you may be injured acci-
2) Low level dentally straining yourself. Change the oil and oil filter according to
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 the maintenance schedule in the “War-
Imp qt) from low level to full level To add engine oil, remove the engine oil ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. The engine oil and oil filter must be
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of changed more frequently than listed in
into the engine, you must use the level
the level gauge. The engine oil level must the maintenance schedule when driving
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
be judged by the lowest of the two levels. on dusty roads, when short trips are
correct.
If the oil level is below the low level mark, frequently made, or when driving in
add oil so that the full level is reached. NOTE extremely cold weather.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do 1. Warm up the engine by letting the
not add any additional oil above the engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
CAUTION to ease draining the engine oil.
upper level when the engine is cold.
. Be careful not to touch the en- 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
gine oil filter when removing the stop the engine.
oil filler cap. Doing so may result 3. Remove the oil filler cap.
in a burn, a pinched finger, or
may cause some other injury.
– CONTINUED –

11-12 Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Oil filter color Part number Amount of

rotation
Black 15208AA160 1 rotation
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing 6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter If spilled oil is not promptly
the drain plug while the engine is still wrench. wiped up, the oil could cause a
warm. The used oil should be drained into 7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a fire.
an appropriate container and disposed of thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
properly. 8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of 10. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
the engine and install the oil filter by hand For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
WARNING turning. Be careful not to twist or damage “Engine oil” F12-4.
Be careful not to burn yourself with the seal. The oil quantity indicated above is only
hot engine oil. 9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount guideline.
indicated in the following table after the The necessary quantity of oil depends on
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain seal makes contact with the seating sur- the quantity of oil that has been drained.
plug with a clean cloth and tighten it face. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
securely with a new sealing washer after depending on the temperature of the oil
the oil has completely drained out. and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you
must use the level gauge to confirm that
the level is correct.
11. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

Maintenance and service/Cooling system 11-13
seal and drain plug. NOTE Cooling system

12. Run the engine until it reaches the Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
normal operating temperature. Then stop fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
the engine and wait a few minutes to allow provide better fuel economy. However, WARNING
the oil drain back. Check the oil level in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
again and if necessary, add more engine required to properly lubricate the en- Never attempt to remove the radia-
oil. gine. tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
& Synthetic oil completely. Since the coolant is
CAUTION under pressure, you may suffer
You should use synthetic engine oil that serious burns from a spray of boil-
Be careful not to spill engine oil meets the same requirements given for
when adding it. If oil touches the ing hot coolant when the cap is
conventional engine oil. When using removed.
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine CAUTION
& Recommended grade and oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
viscosity and filter changing intervals shown in the . Vehicles are filled at the factory
Warranty and Maintenance booklet. with SUBARU Super Coolant that
CAUTION does not require the first change
NOTE for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
Use only engine oil with the recom- Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity years/220,000 km). This coolant
mended grade and viscosity. noted in chapter 12 is the recom- should not be mixed with any
mended engine oil for optimum engine other brand or type of coolant
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4. performance. Conventional oil may be during this period. Mixing with a
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top up the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
– CONTINUED –

11-14 Maintenance and service/Cooling system
type, the maintenance interval is the cooling system and connections be

shortened to that of the mixing checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant & Engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol ! Checking the coolant level
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
& Cooling fan, hose and con- tor cap until the engine has been
nections shut off and has cooled down
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling completely. Since the coolant is
fan which is thermostatically controlled to under pressure, you may suffer 1) “FULL” level mark
operate when the engine coolant reaches serious burns from a spray of boil- 2) “LOW” level mark
a specific temperature. ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed. Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
even when the coolant temperature high of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED, 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
the cooling fan circuit may be defective. “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica- “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
light” F3-15. coolant up to just below the filler neck as
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. shown in the following illustration.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-38 and “Fuses and
circuits” F12-10.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element 11-15
CAUTION Air cleaner element

. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant WARNING
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Do not operate the engine with the
a fire. If engine coolant gets on air cleaner element removed. The air
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe cleaner element not only filters
it off. intake air but also stops flames if
. Do not splash the engine coolant the engine backfires. If the air
over painted parts. The alcohol cleaner element is not installed
contained in the engine coolant when the engine backfires, you
may damage the paint surface. could be burned.
1) Fill up to this level
! Changing the coolant CAUTION

It may be difficult to change the coolant. When replacing the air cleaner ele-
Have the coolant changed by your ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
SUBARU dealer if necessary. cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
The coolant should be changed according
negative effect to the engine.
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that cleaner element.
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
– CONTINUED –

11-16 Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
& Replacing the air cleaner

element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! Non-turbo models
2. Open the air cleaner case (rear). 5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the
air cleaner case (front).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
1) Clip
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (front).
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.

Maintenance and service/Spark plugs 11-17
! Turbo models the air cleaner element. Spark plugs

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and It may be difficult to replace the spark
install a new air cleaner element. plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
CAUTION
Make sure the cables are replaced in
1) Clip
the correct order.
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
4. To install the air cleaner case (rear), & Recommended spark plugs
insert the three projections on the air
For the recommended spark plugs, refer
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the
to “Electrical system” F12-9.
air cleaner case (front).
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Open the air cleaner case and remove

11-18 Maintenance and service/Drive belts
Drive belts Manual transmission oil Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is not necessary to check the transmis-
the drive belt periodically because your sion oil level. Check that there are no It is not necessary to check the transmis-
engine is equipped with an automatic belt cracks, damage or leakage. However, the sion fluid level. Check that there are no
tension adjuster. However, replacement of oil inspection should be performed ac- cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
the belt should be done according to the cording to the maintenance schedule in fluid inspection should be performed
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. according to the maintenance schedule
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
SUBARU dealer for replacement. let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, & Recommended grade and details.
contact your SUBARU dealer. viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.

Maintenance and service/Front differential gear oil (CVT models) 11-19
Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil Brake fluid
(CVT models)
It is not necessary to check the gear oil & Checking the fluid level
It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks,
level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil WARNING
damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the . Never let brake fluid contact your
inspection should be performed according eyes because brake fluid can be
to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
harmful to your eyes. If brake
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. ately flush them thoroughly with
& Recommended grade and clean water. For safety, when
& Recommended grade and viscosity performing this work, wearing
viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base eye protection is advisable.
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
oils and additives. Never use different brands together. For details, refer to from the air. Any absorbed moist-
brands together. For details, refer to “Manual transmission, front differential ure can cause a dangerous loss
“Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil” F12-7. of braking performance.
and rear differential gear oil” F12-7.
CAUTION . If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
Using a differential gear oil other you suspect a problem, have the
than the specified oil may cause vehicle checked at your SUBARU
occurrences of rattling noises while dealer.
idling and poor fuel consumption.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
– CONTINUED –

11-20 Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)
Alcohol contained in the brake check the fluid level for the brake system Clutch fluid (MT models)
fluid may damage them. at the front part of the reservoir (shaded
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid area in the illustration). If the fluid level is & Checking the fluid level
when adding it. If brake fluid below “MIN”, add the recommended brake
touches the exhaust pipe, it may fluid to “MAX”. WARNING
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Use only brake fluid from a sealed
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the container. Never let clutch fluid contact your
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it eyes because clutch fluid can be
off. & Recommended brake fluid harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8. gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Never use different brands of brake advisable.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
1) “MAX” level line refilling, there may be a leak. If
2) The brake fluid level must be checked in you suspect a problem, have the
this area. vehicle checked at your SUBARU
3) “MIN” level line dealer.
Check the fluid level monthly. . When clutch fluid is added, be
Check the fluid level on the outside of the careful not to allow any dirt into
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used the tank.
for both the brake and clutch systems and . Never splash the clutch fluid over
has chambers for each system, be sure to painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Maintenance and service/Brake booster 11-21
Alcohol contained in the clutch Check the fluid level monthly. Brake booster
fluid may damage them. Check the fluid level on the outside of the
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid reservoir. Because this reservoir is used If the brake booster does not operate as
when adding it. If clutch fluid for both the brake and clutch systems and described in the following, have it checked
touches the exhaust pipe, it may has chambers for each system, be sure to by your SUBARU dealer.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or check the fluid level for the clutch system
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the at the inboard side of the reservoir
pedal several times, applying the same
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it (shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid
pedal force each time. The distance the
off. level is below “MIN”, add the recom-
pedal travels should not vary.
mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
. The fluid level for the clutch 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
system must be checked at the Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
the engine. The pedal should move
inboard side of the reservoir. It container.
slightly down to the floor.
cannot be checked at the out- 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
board side of the reservoir. & Recommended clutch fluid
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8. for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
CAUTION 4. Start the engine again and run for
Never use different brands of clutch approximately one minute then turn it off.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing Depress the brake pedal several times to
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if check the brake booster. The brake
they are the same brand. booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
1) “MAX” level line

2) The clutch fluid level must be checked in
this area.
3) “MIN” level line

11-22 Maintenance and service/Brake pedal
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function
free play Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) 2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage.
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm) not operate smoothly, contact with your
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.

Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system 11-23
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad
free play and lining
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances.
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward for several seconds after
the brake pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with If the Hill start assist system does not The disc brakes have audible wear
your finger until you feel resistance, and operate as described above, contact your indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
check the free play. SUBARU dealer. pads wear close to their service limit, the
If the free play is not within proper wear indicator makes a very audible
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- scraping noise when the brake pedal is
er. applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
– CONTINUED –

11-24 Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke
brake pad wear indicator, it will parking brake stroke is out of the specified Parking brake stroke
result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:

& Breaking-in of new brake
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be WARNING
broken in as follows. A safe location and situation should
! Brake pad and lining be selected for break-in driving.
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake CAUTION
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more Check the parking brake stroke according
times. Pulling the parking brake lever too to the maintenance schedule in the
! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be When the parking brake is properly
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of certain to pull the lever up slowly
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). adjusted, braking power is fully applied
and gently. by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches
2. With the parking brake release button
gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
stroke is not within the specified range,
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
have the brake system checked and
15.3 kgf]).
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-25
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example,
Winter tires are best suited for driving on the following table shows the required tire
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However pressures that correspond to various out-
winter tires do not perform as well as side temperatures when the temperature
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. Example:
! All season tires Ti r e s i z e : P 2 0 5 / 5 5 R 1 6 8 9 V a n d
All season tires are designed to provide & Tire pressure monitoring P205/50R17 88V
an adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) Standard tire pressures:
and braking performance in year-round Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as by sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside Adjusted pressure
or on icy roads. temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the
All season tires are identified by “ALL Front Rear
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
the tire sidewall.
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
! Summer tires 38 37
caused by running over a sharp object). 108F (−128C) (260, 2.6) (255, 2.55)
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
−108F (−238C) 40 39 (270, 2.7)
tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in (275, 2.75)
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
Summer tires are inadequate for driving pressures may cause the low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light
on slippery roads such as on snow- warning light to illuminate. To avoid this illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
covered or icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures cold outside air after adjusting the tire
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on the tire pressures using the method described
use of winter (snow) tires. tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
When installing winter tires, be sure to extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for to at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and check to
replace all four tires. every difference of 108F (5.68C) between see that the low tire pressure warning light
the temperature in the garage and the turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
– CONTINUED –

11-26 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
pressure warning light does not turn off, steadily after blinking for approximately the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
the tire pressure monitoring system may one minute. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
not be functioning normally. In this event, as soon as possible.
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
system inspected as soon as possible. wheel rim is replaced without the
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres-
the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate
the low tire pressure warning light, any steadily after blinking for approxi-
increase in the tire pressures caused by WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
an increase in the outside air temperature the TPMS is unable to monitor all
or by an increase in the temperature in the If the low tire pressure warning light four road wheels. Contact your
tires can cause the low tire pressure does not illuminate briefly after the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
warning light to turn off. ignition switch is turned ON or the for tire and sensor replacement and/
light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light
System resetting is necessary when the ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking
wheels are changed (for example, a you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute,
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
valves are installed on the newly fitted SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected.
wheels. Have this work performed by a ble.
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- If this light illuminates while driving,
ment. never brake suddenly and keep & Tire inspection
It may not be possible to install TPMS driving straight ahead while gradu- Check on a daily basis that the tires are
valves on certain wheels that are on the ally reducing speed. Then slowly free from serious damage, nails, and
market. Therefore, if you change the pull off the road to a safe place. stones. At the same time, check the tires
wheels (for example, a switch to snow Otherwise an accident involving for abnormal wear.
tires), use wheels that have the same part serious vehicle damage and serious Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
number as the standard-equipment personal injury could occur. ately if you find any problem.
wheels. Without four operational TPMS If this light still illuminates while
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS driving after adjusting the tire pres- NOTE
will not fully function and the warning light sure, a tire may have significant . When the wheels and tires strike
on the combination meter will illuminate damage and a fast leak that causes curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a NOTE

rough surface, they can suffer damage . The air pressure in a tire increases
that cannot be seen with the naked eye. by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
This type of damage does not become kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
evident until time has passed. Try not . The tires are considered cold when
to drive over curbs, potholes or on the vehicle has been parked for at least
other rough surfaces. If doing so is three hours or has been driven less
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed than one mile (1.6 km).
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as WARNING
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you Do not let air out of warm tires to
park the vehicle. adjust pressure. Doing so will result
. If you feel unusual vibration while Tire placard in low tire pressure.
driving or find it difficult to steer the Check the tire pressures when the tires
vehicle in a straight line, one of the are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
tires and/or wheels may be damaged. the tire pressures to the values shown on trollability and ride comfort, and they
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized the tire placard. The tire placard is located cause the tires to wear abnormally.
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
inspected.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
& Tire pressures and wear Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
Maintaining the correct tire pressures outside temperature. It is best to check tire
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives pressure outdoors before driving the
and is essential for good running perfor- vehicle.
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
spare) at least once a month (for example, it expands, causing the tire pressure to
during a fuel stop) and before any long increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
journey. release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
– CONTINUED –

. Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
evenly) worn at shoulders) worn in center)
Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con- Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher. magnifies the effects of road-surface
fuel consumption is also lower. bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of NOTE WARNING

vehicle control could lead to an The suspension system is designed to
accident. hold each wheel at a certain alignment When a tire’s tread wear indicator
(relative to the other wheels and to the becomes visible, the tire is worn
road) for optimum straight-line stability beyond the acceptable limit and
& Wheel balance and cornering performance. must be replaced immediately. With
Each wheel was correctly balanced when a tire in this condition, driving at
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will & Wear indicators high speeds in wet weather can
become unbalanced as the tires become cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes The resulting loss of vehicle control
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at can lead to an accident.
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can NOTE
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
you suspect that the wheels are not and replace the tires before their tread
correctly balanced, have them checked wear indicators become visible.
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION 1) New tread

Loss of correct wheel alignment 2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running Each tire incorporates a tread wear
stability. Contact your SUBARU indicator, which becomes visible when
dealer if you notice abnormal tire the depth of the tread grooves decreases
wear. to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
– CONTINUED –

& Tire rotation direction mark & Tire rotation Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the illustration each time they are
rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tires at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
Example of tire rotation direction mark Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec- (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
1) Front tional tires and retighten any nut that has become
1) Front loose.
If the tire has the rotation direction
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
When you install a tire that has the tire integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
rotation direction mark, install the tire with they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
the direction mark facing forward. tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires speed symbol and load index matching
1) Front those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts (h) Degrees of wear & Wheel replacement
from controllability, ride comfort, braking For the items (a) to (d), you must When replacing wheels due, for example,
performance, speedometer accuracy and obey the specification that is to damage, make sure the replacement
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- printed on the tire placard. The wheels match the specifications of the
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- tire placard is located on the wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground bottom of driver’s door pillar. ment. Replacement wheels are available
clearance. from SUBARU dealers.
If all of four tires are not the same
All four tires must be the same in terms of for items (a) to (h), there is a
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- possibility that serious mechan- WARNING
struction, and size. You are advised to ical damage could occur to the
Use only those wheels that are
replace the tires with new ones that are drive train of your car, and affect specified for your vehicle. Wheels
identical to those fitted as standard equip- the following. not meeting specifications could
ment. — Ride interfere with brake caliper opera-
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU — Handling tion and may cause the tires to rub
recommends replacing all four tires at — Braking against the wheel well housing dur-
the same time. ing turns. The resulting loss of
— Speedometer/Odometer vehicle control could lead to an
WARNING calibration accident.
— Clearance between the body
. When you replacing or installing and tires
tire(s), all four tires must be the
It also may be dangerous and
NOTE
same for following items. When any of the wheels are removed
lead to loss of vehicle control,
(a) Size and it can lead to an accident. and replaced for tire rotation or to
(b) Circumference change a flat tire, always check the
. Use only radial tires. Do not use tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-
(c) Speed symbol radial tires together with belted ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).
(d) Load index bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
Doing so can dangerously re- specified torque.
(e) Construction duce controllability, resulting in
(f) Manufacturer an accident.
(g) Brand (tread pattern)

11-32 Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels Windshield washer fluid

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
CAUTION
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety. Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
. When any of the wheels are removed
damage.
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts, Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the add windshield washer fluid until it
wheel. reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank. If
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp windshield washer fluid is unavailable use
protrusions or curbs. clean water.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to In areas where water freezes in winter,
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
designed for aluminum wheels. fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
When there is only a small amount of
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
perature varies according to how much it
washer fluid warning light will illuminate.
is diluted, as indicated in the following
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as
table.
follows.

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-33
Washer Fluid Freezing CAUTION Replacement of wiper blades

Concentration Temperature
. Adjust the washer fluid concen- Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
30% 10.48F (−128C) tration appropriately for the out- the windshield or the wiper blade results in
50% −48F (−208C) side temperature. If the concen- jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
100% −498F (−458C)
tration is inappropriate, sprayed glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
washer fluid may freeze on the after operating the windshield washer or if
In order to prevent freezing of washer windshield and obstruct your the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in view, and the fluid may freeze in outer surface of the windshield (or rear
the table above when adjusting the fluid the reservoir tank. window) and the wiper blades using a
concentration to the outside temperature. . State or local regulations on sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with volatile organic compounds may detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
a different concentration from the one restrict the use of methanol, a cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
used previously, purge the old fluid from common windshield washer anti- blades with clean water. The windshield is
the piping between the reservoir tank and freeze additive. Washer fluids clean if beads do not form when you rinse
washer nozzles by operating the washer containing non-methanol anti- the windshield with water.
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if freeze agents should be used
the concentration of the fluid remaining in only if they provide cold weather CAUTION
the piping is too low for the outside protection without damaging
temperature, it may freeze and block the your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades . Do not clean the wiper blades
nozzles. or washer system. with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
– CONTINUED –

11-34 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
carefully return the wiper arms & Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub-
on the windshield by hand. You sembly ber
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
per arms may be deformed and/
or the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
1) Support
1) Open the cover 1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
2) Pull down the wiper blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by stoppers on the rubber are free of the
opening the cover and pulling it down in support.
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-35
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade & Rear window wiper blade
rubber assembly into the support until it assembly
locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal 1) Claw
spines from the old blade rubber and 2) Stopper
install them in the new blade rubber. 2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
4. Be sure to position the claws at the terclockwise.
end of the support between the stoppers
on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is
not retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
3. Align the claws of the support with the

– CONTINUED –

11-36 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the 1) Metal spines
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. assembly to unlock it from the plastic 3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly support. with two metal spines, remove the metal
lower it in position. spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.

Maintenance and service/Battery 11-37
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery

the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
. Before beginning work on or near
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
any battery, be sure to extinguish
lower it in position.
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
4. Align the claws of the plastic support does occur, wear eye protection
with the grooves in the blade rubber or shield your eyes when work-
assembly, then slide the blade rubber ing near any battery. Never lean
assembly into place. over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
Securely retain both ends of the rubber mediately.
with the stoppers on the plastic support . To lessen the risk of sparks,
– CONTINUED –

11-38 Maintenance and service/Fuses
remove rings, metal watchbands, Fuses

and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any- CAUTION
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact Never replace a fuse with one hav-
with any other metallic portion of ing a higher rating or with material
the vehicle because a short cir- other than a fuse because serious
cuit will result. damage or a fire could result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery. The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
. Charge the battery in a well-
harness and electrical equipment. The
ventilated area. 1) Cap fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
. Battery posts, terminals and re- 2) Upper level
lated accessories contain lead 3) Lower level
and lead compounds, chemicals
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
known to the State of California
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
to cause cancer and reproductive
distilled water.
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the However, if the battery fluid level is below
State of California to cause can- the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
cer. Wash hands after handling. upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

Maintenance and service/Fuses 11-39
box in the engine compartment.
1) Spare fuses 4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
1) Good 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
2) Blown replace it with a spare fuse of the same
in the engine compartment. Also, the
spare fuses are stored in the fuse box If any lights, accessories or other electrical rating.
cover. controls do not operate, inspect the 6. If the same fuse blows again, this
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, indicates that its system has a problem.
replace it. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

11-40 Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories
Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs & Headlights (models with HID

headlights)
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
WARNING WARNING
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic Bulbs may become very hot while High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
system to malfunction if they are incor- illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, are used for the low beams of the
rectly installed or if they are not suited for turn off the lights and wait until the headlights. These HID bulbs use an
the vehicle. bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is extremely high voltage. To avoid the
a risk of sustaining a burn injury. risk of an electric shock that could
result in serious injury, observe the
following precautions.
CAUTION . Do not replace any headlight
Replace any bulb only with a new bulbs (both low beam and high
bulb of the specified wattage. Using beam) by yourself.
a bulb of different wattage could . Do not remove/restore the head-
result in a fire. For the specified light assemblies by yourself.
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb . Do not remove any headlight-
chart” F12-14. assembly components by your-
Do not touch the glass portion of the self.
light bulb with bare hands. When For replacement, contact your
holding the glass portion is una- SUBARU dealer.
voidable, hold it using a clean dry
cloth to avoid getting moisture and
oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is & Headlights (models without
scratched or dropped, it may blow HID headlights)
out or crack.
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-41
greasy gloves, fingerprints or

grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the High beam headlight High beam headlight
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your 1. Disconnect the electrical connector 2. Remove the bulb from the headlight
SUBARU dealer if necessary. from the bulb. assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
Perform the following steps to replace the 3. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
bulbs. time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
4. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
Low beam headlight
Low beam headlight
– CONTINUED –

11-42 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
& Front turn signal light, front

side marker light and parking
light
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Parking light Parking light

1. Remove the electrical connector from 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
the clip. pull it out.
3. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
& Parking light

Front turn signal light and front side It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
marker light Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Front fog light (if equipped)

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
1) Front turn signal light
2) Front side marker light

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-43
& Rear combination lights sembly rearward and remove it from the
vehicle.
1) Guide pins
2) Clip
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove 1) Stop/tail light (This light is also used as
the upper and lower screws that secure the rear side marker light.) 6. Put the rear combination light assem-
the rear combination light assembly. 2) Backup light bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
3) Rear turn signal light pins and a catch with the guide holes and
4) Tail light a clip on the vehicle.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
2. Slide the rear combination light as-
– CONTINUED –

11-44 Maintenance and service/Battery replacement
7. Tighten the upper and lower screws. Battery replacement

& License plate light The access key / transmitter battery may
be discharged under the following condi-
tions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis-
tance
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise Replace the battery with a new one.
and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. CAUTION
1. To remove the right-hand side license 4. Install a new bulb.
plate light cover, insert a finger into the 5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
right side of the cover, and then press license plate light cover. or in the access key/transmitter
once to the left and pull it out. To remove when replacing battery.
the left-hand side license plate light cover, & Other bulbs . Be careful not to damage the
insert a finger into the left side of the printed circuit board in the ac-
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. cess key/transmitter when repla-
cover, and then press once to the right
Have the bulbs replaced by your cing the battery.
and pull it out.
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the

Maintenance and service/Battery replacement 11-45
same or equivalent type of the & Replacing access key battery

battery. Battery: Button battery CR1632
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct 3. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with
orientation to prevent fluid leakage. insulating tape, and insert it between the
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It battery and the board. Then pry it out from
1. Pull out the mechanical key.
may result in a malfunction. the board.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key/transmitter func-
tions properly.
2. Insert the key into the gap and turn it

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
clockwise to remove the cover.
side facing upward as shown in the
– CONTINUED –

11-46 Maintenance and service/Battery replacement
illustration. Attach the cover firmly. 2. Remove the transmitter case from the 4. Replace the old battery with a new
key head. battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
& Replacing transmitter battery ing sure to install the new battery with the
negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
1. Open the key head using a flat-head the hooks.
screwdriver.
1) Negative (−) side facing up

Specifications
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Tires.................................................................. 12-9

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2 Temporary spare tires ........................................ 12-9
Engine ............................................................... 12-3 Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4 compartment ................................................. 12-10
Manual transmission, front differential and rear Fuse panel located in the engine
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-7 compartment ................................................. 12-12
Fluids ................................................................ 12-8 Bulb chart......................................................... 12-14
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-8 Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-17
Electrical system................................................ 12-9
12

12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item Non-turbo models Turbo models
Overall length 180.9 (4,595)
Overall width 70.7 (1,795)
Overall height 68.3 (1,735)*2
66.3 (1,685)*3
Wheel base 103.9 (2,640)
Tread Front 60.8 (1,545)
Rear 61.0 (1,550)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty

*2: Models with roof rails
*3: Models without roof rails

Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model FB25 FA20
(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo) (2.0 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke petrol engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152.4 (2,498) 121.9 (1,998)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.39 6 3.39 (86.0 6 86.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 10.6 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
Model Fuel Fuel tank capacity
Non-turbo models Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher is required
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
Turbo models Unleaded gasoline with 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher is recommended
For more details, refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
– CONTINUED –

& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-10.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil

We recommend that you always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
! Non-turbo models
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
– Adding the oil from low level to
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil full level:
for optimum engine performance and 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. – Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Insti- ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can

tute) classification SM or SN with be identified with the ILSAC
the words certification mark (Starburst
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or mark)
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
– CONTINUED –

! Turbo models
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Oil capacity

– Adding the oil from L to F level:
5W-30 synthetic oil is required for 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
optimum engine performance and pro-
tection. Conventional oil may be used if – Changing the oil and oil filter:
synthetic oil is unavailable. 5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)
*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 5W-30 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Insti- ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can

tute) classification SM or SN with be identified with the ILSAC
the words certification mark (Starburst
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or mark)
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”

& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (CVT models) Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade . SUBARU Extra MT*3 API classification GL-5

. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*4
. 75W/90*
. 90
SAE viscosity No. and —

*: 75W/90 oil is the recommended oil. If 75W/90 oil is not available, 90 oil may be used if
replenishment is needed. However, if 90 oil is used, the function or performance may be
reduced in comparison to using 75W/90 oil.
Non-turbo models 1.43 US qt (1.35 liters, 1.19 Imp qt)
Oil capacity*1 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Turbo models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)
“Manual transmission oil” F11- “Front differential gear oil (CVT models)” F11-19 “Rear differential gear oil” F11-
Remarks*2 18 19
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of manual transmission oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
– CONTINUED –

& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Non-turbo models: 12.9 US qt
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer. (12.2 liters, 10.7 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
fluid (CVT models) Turbo models: 13.1 US qt (12.4 mission fluid” F11-18
liters, 10.9 Imp qt)
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 – “Brake fluid” F11-19
brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 – “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
brake fluid 20
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
MT models 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)
Non-turbo models
CVT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt) SUBARU Super Coolant
Turbo models CVT models 9.4 US qt (8.9 liters, 7.8 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-13.

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) 55D23L (12V-48AH)
Alternator 12V-130A
Non-turbo models SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
Spark plugs
Turbo models ILKAR8H6 (NGK)
& Tires
Vehicle model Non-turbo models Turbo models
Tire size P225/60R17 98H P225/55R18 97H P225/55R18 97H
Wheel size 17 6 7J 18 6 7J 18 6 7J
Pressure Front 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening
procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.
& Temporary spare tires

Temporary spare tire size T145/80D17 185/65R17
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure) 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

12-10 Specifications/Fuses and circuits
Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
1 20A . Trailer hitch connector
2 Empty
3 15A . Door locking
4 10A . Front wiper deicer relay
5 10A . Combination meter
6 7.5A . Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
7 15A . Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 15A . Stop light
9 15A . Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A . Turn signal unit
12 15A . Transmission control
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
13 20A . Accessory power outlet
(center console)
14 15A . Parking light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light

Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-11
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Circuit Circuit
panel rating panel rating
15 10A . Luggage light 31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit
. Keyless unit . Integrated unit
16 7.5A . Illumination 32 7.5A . Clutch switch
. Steering lock control
17 15A . Seat heaters unit
18 10A . Backup light 33 7.5A . Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
19 7.5A . Daytime running lights
20 10A . Accessory power outlet
(instrument panel)
21 7.5A . Starter relay
22 10A . Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 Empty
24 10A . Audio unit
. Navigation system (if
equipped)
25 15A . SRS airbag system
26 7.5A . Power window relay
. Radiator main fan relay
27 15A . Blower fan
28 15A . Blower fan
29 15A . Fog light
30 Empty
– CONTINUED –

12-12 Specifications/Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
1 30A . ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A . Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A . Sub fan (cooling fan)
4 Empty
5 25A . Audio
6 30A . Headlight (low beam)
7 15A . Headlight (high beam)
8 20A . Back-up
9 15A . Horn
10 25A . Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 20A . Fuel pump
12 20A . Continuously variable
transmission control unit
13 7.5A . Engine control unit
14 15A . Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A . Tail and illumination re-
A) Main fuse lay
16 7.5A . Alternator

Specifications/Fuses and circuits 12-13
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
17 Empty
18 Empty
19 15A . Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
20 15A . Headlight (low beam –
left hand)

12-14 Specifications/Bulb chart
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A, B and C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Specifications/Bulb chart 12-15
Wattage Bulb No. WARNING

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3 . Bulbs may become very hot while
2) Parking light (models with halogen light) 12V-5W W5W illuminated. Before replacing
3) Low beam headlight bulbs, turn off the lights and wait
until the bulbs cool down. Other-
Models with HID light 12V-35W D4R
wise, there is a risk of sustaining
Models with halogen light 12V-55W H11 a burn injury.
4) Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W . For models with HID low beam
5) Map light 12V-8W – headlights, observe the following
6) Dome light 12V-8W –
precautions. Not doing so carries
the risk of an electric shock that
7) Front fog light 12V-19W H16 could result in serious injury
8) Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W because the HID bulbs use an
9) Door step light 12V-5W W5W extremely high voltage.
10) Cargo area light 12V-5W W5W – Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and
11) Stop light/Tail light (This light is also used as the rear side
marker light) 12V-21/5W W21/5W high beam) by yourself.
12) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W – Do not remove/restore the
headlight assemblies by your-
13) Tail light 12V-5W W21/5W* self.
14) Backup light 12V-16W W16W – Do not remove any headlight-
15) License plate light 12V-5W W5W assembly components by
A) Parking light (models with HID light) – – yourself.
B) Side turn signal light (if equipped) – – For replacement, contact your
–
SUBARU dealer.
C) High-mounted stop light –
*: Only 5W illuminates
– CONTINUED –

12-16 Specifications/Bulb chart
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.

Specifications/Vehicle identification 12-17
Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

Tire information .................................................. 13-2 load capacities .............................................. 13-13
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-14
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-14
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-15
practices........................................................ 13-10 Treadwear ....................................................... 13-15
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10 Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-16
13

13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
For U.S.A. Tire information Example:
The following information has been & Tire labeling

compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These markings ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with (4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating De-
selecting the proper tire for your scriptions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break- tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements. designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-3
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated
(3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible infla-
load. tion pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –

13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is affixed to the
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER” driver’s side B-pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-15.
WARNING
& Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire infla-
vehicle. Putting a load rated tion pressure
tire on any vehicle does not For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated refer to “Tires” F12-9.
load. The vehicle placard shows original
! Vehicle placard tire size, recommended cold tire
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
Applicable construction of this tire. maximum loaded vehicle weight,
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL seating capacity and loading infor-
BELTED RADIAL” mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
! Construction of under-inflation
The generic name of each cord Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
pressure to achieve proper in- power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a the rim. . Cracking
short distance warms up the tires . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
and increases the tire pressures. A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
Also, the tire pressures are affected components in the bead. extending to cord material.
by the outside temperature. It is . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
best to check tire pressure out- A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
doors before driving the vehicle. cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
When a tire becomes warm, the air laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
inside it expands, causing the tire less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air
pressure to increase. Be careful not line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
to mistakenly release air from a . Carcass optional engine.
warm tire to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –

. Extra load tire ing on a vehicle. . Measuring rim

A tire designed to operate at higher . Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for
loads and higher inflation pressure A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements.
than the corresponding standard turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight
tire. on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
. Groove pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second
The space between two adjacent . Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended
tread ribs. The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section.
. Innerliner rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution
The layer(s) forming the inside sur- pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
face of a tubeless tire that contains . Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column
the inflating medium within the tire. The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the
. Innerliner separation sure to which a tire may be inflated. end of this section.
The parting of the innerliner from . Maximum load rating . Open splice
cord material in the carcass. The load rating for a tire at the Any parting at any junction of tread,
. Intended outboard sidewall maximum permissible inflation sidewall, or innerliner that extends
(1) The sidewall that contains a pressure for that tire. to cord material.
whitewall, bears white lettering . Maximum loaded vehicle weight . Outer diameter
or bears manufacturer, brand, The sum of: The overall diameter of an inflated
and/or model name molding that (a) Curb weight new tire.
is higher or deeper than the (b) Accessory weight . Overall width
same molding on the other side- (c) Vehicle capacity weight The linear distance between the
wall of the tire, or (d) Production options weight exteriors of the sidewalls of an
(2) The outward facing sidewall . Maximum permissible inflation
inflated tire, including elevations
of an asymmetrical tire that has pressure
due to labeling, decorations, or
a particular side that must al- The maximum cold inflation pres- protective bands or ribs.
ways face outward when mount- sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a trim. . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges.
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the
cords. the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound sure due to labeling, decoration, or
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands.
. Pneumatic tire mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- . Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead.
other materials, that, when loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com-
provides the traction and contains dard tire. pound from the cord material in
the gas or fluid that sustains the . Rim the sidewall.
load. A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim
. Production options weight and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for
The combined weight of those tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed
installed regular production options . Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire.
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread
excess of those standard items . Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes
which they replace, not previously Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road.
considered in curb weight or acces-
– CONTINUED –

. Tread rib accessory weight, and normal oc-

A tread section running circumfer- cupant weight (distributed in accor-
entially around a tire. dance with Table 1 that is ap-
. Tread separation pended to the end of this section)
Pulling away of the tread from the and dividing by 2.
tire carcass. . Wheel-holding fixture
. Treadwear indicators (TWI) The fixture used to hold the wheel
The projections within the principal and tire assembly securely during
grooves designed to give a visual testing.
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
– CONTINUED –

& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- can be calculated by the following
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the method.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening
check the tires for abnormal wear. Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer weight of occupants + total weight
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-5.
and replace the tires before their of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
tread wear indicators become visi- & Vehicle load limit – how to
ble. When a tire’s tread wear determine For information about vehicle load-
indicator becomes visible, the tire The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
is worn beyond the acceptable limit determined by weight, not by avail- F8-12.
and must be replaced immediately. able cargo space. The load limit of
With a tire in this condition, driving For information about towing capa-
your vehicle is shown on the city and weight limits, refer to
at even low speeds in wet weather vehicle placard attached to the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- “Trailer towing” F8-18.
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
plane. Possible resulting loss of statement “The combined weight
vehicle control can lead to an of occupants and cargo should
accident. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
. To maximize the life of each tire on your vehicle’s placard.
and ensure that the tires wear The vehicle placard also shows
uniformly, it is best to rotate the seating capacity of your vehicle.
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). The total load capacity includes the
For information about the tire rota- total weight of driver and all pas-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” sengers and their belongings, any
F11-30. Replace any damaged or cargo, any optional equipment such
unevenly worn tires at the time of as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

! Calculating total and load ca- occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
figurations kg).
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg). For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
is indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 900 lbs or
408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
– CONTINUED –

2. Calculate the available load ca- with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity. weight of occupants and cargo pacity.
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The total weight now exceeds 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
kg), so the cargo weight must be be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
10% of the trailer weight is applied
Example 2A to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard

Example 2B & Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
For example, if a person weighing fulfill those conditions.
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 2. Calculate the available load ca- The maximum loaded vehicle
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same pacity. weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
vehicle (bringing the number of Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
occupants to three), and a child axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
child to use, the calculations are as axle’s GAWR are shown on the
follows. vehicle certification label affixed to
1. Calculate the total weight. 3. The total weight now exceeds the driver’s door.
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 The GVWR and front and rear
kg), so the cargo weight must be GAWRs are determined by not only
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
– CONTINUED –

parts of the body. . Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo
Therefore, this means that the and luggage load capacity calcu-
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
vehicle cannot necessarily be rect Load Limit
loaded up to the tire’s maximum 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
load rating on the tire sidewall. 1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult
& Adverse safety conse- cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this
quences of overloading on kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and
handling and stopping and placard. luggage load capacity of your ve-
on tires 2. Determine the combined weight hicle.
Overloading could affect vehicle of the driver and passengers that
handling, stopping distance, and will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle and tire performance in the 3. Subtract the combined weight of
following ways. This could lead to the driver and passengers from
an accident and possibly result in XXX kg or XXX lbs.
severe personal injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate. available amount of cargo and
. Heavy and/or high-mounted luggage load capacity. For exam-
loads could increase the risk of ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
rollover. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
. Stopping distance will increase. lb passengers in your vehicle, the
. Brakes could overheat and fail. amount of available cargo and
. Suspension, bearings, axles and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
other body parts could break or (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)
experience accelerated wear that 5. Determine the combined weight
will shorten vehicle life. of luggage and cargo being loaded
. Tires could fail. on the vehicle. That weight may not
. Tread separation could occur.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-15
Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of
standards ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear mance.
tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to
tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight-
in making an informed choice in the government test course. ahead braking traction tests,
purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan-
applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac-
tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics.
mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C
perature A
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the
The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the
pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of
ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
apply to deep tread, winter type when tested under controlled con-
snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
All passenger car tires must con-
– CONTINUED –

13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
grade C corresponds to a level of Reporting safety defects New Jersey Avenue, SE, West
performance which all passenger (U.S.A.) Building, Washington, DC 20590.
car tires must meet under the You can also obtain other informa-
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- If you believe that your vehicle has tion about motor vehicle safety
dards No. 109. Grades B and A a defect which could cause a from http://www.safercar.gov.
represent higher levels of perfor- crash or could cause injury or
mance on the laboratory test wheel death, you should immediately in-
than the minimum required by law. form the National Highway Traffic
WARNING Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
The temperature grade for this America, Inc.
tire is established for a tire If NHTSA receives similar com-
that is properly inflated and plaints, it may open an investiga-
not overloaded. Excessive tion, and if it finds that a safety
speed, underinflation, or ex- defect exists in a group of vehi-
cessive loading, either sepa- cles, it may order a recall and
rately or in combination, can remedy campaign. However,
cause heat buildup and possi- NHTSA cannot become involved
ble tire failure. in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

Index
14

14-2 Index
A iPod® operations .................................................... 5-28

Abbreviation ................................................................... 2 Power and audio controls ........................................ 5-10
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-33 Satellite radio operations ......................................... 5-19
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18 Set ........................................................................ 5-4
Access key ................................................................. 2-8 USB storage device operations ................................ 5-28
Warning light ......................................................... 3-23 Auto-dimming mirror/compass .............................. 3-97, 3-99
Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-40 Automatic climate control.............................................. 4-7
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9 Automatic headlight beam leveler ................................. 3-92
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15 Warning light.......................................................... 3-30
Air conditioner Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-14
Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-7 Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-26
Manual climate control .............................................. 4-8
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-13 B
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-8 Battery .................................................................... 11-37
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-20 Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-6
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-21 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-32 Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-45
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3 Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-19
Antenna system........................................................... 5-3 Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-46
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-33 Bluetooth® audio ........................................................ 5-36
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-21 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-32
Armrest....................................................................... 1-8 Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-8
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-11 Brake
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-17 Assist.................................................................... 7-33
Audio Booster ....................................................... 7-32, 11-21
Antenna system....................................................... 5-3 Fluid ........................................................... 11-19, 12-8
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-26 Pad and lining...................................................... 11-24
Bluetooth® audio.................................................... 5-36 Parking ....................................................... 7-43, 11-24
CD player operation ............................................... 5-20 Pedal .................................................................. 11-22
Control button........................................................ 5-34 System.................................................................. 7-32
FM/AM radio operation ........................................... 5-13

Index 14-3
Brake pedal Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-23
Free play ............................................................. 11-22 Coolant level........................................................ 11-14
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-22 Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-19
Brake system ............................................................ 7-32 Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-20
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19 Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-32
Braking ..................................................................... 7-32 Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-10
Tips...................................................................... 7-32 Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-25
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-24 Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-32
Bulb Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-28
Chart .................................................................. 12-14 Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-33
Replacing............................................................. 11-40 Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-36
Child safety ................................................................... 4
C Locks.................................................................... 2-27
Cargo area Chime
Cover ................................................................... 6-13 Key........................................................................ 3-4
Light....................................................................... 6-2 Light ..................................................................... 3-88
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-16 Seatbelt................................................................. 3-11
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cigarette lighter.......................................................... 6-10
Center Cleaning
Console .................................................................. 6-6 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Changing Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Coolant................................................................ 11-15 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-12
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-5 Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-11 Automatic ............................................................... 4-7
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-16 Manual................................................................... 4-8
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Clock ................................................................ 3-35, 3-36
light....................................................................... 3-14 Clutch
Checking Fluid ........................................................... 11-20, 12-8
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-22 Pedal .................................................................. 11-22
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-22 Compass........................................................... 3-97, 3-99
Clutch function...................................................... 11-22 Console ..................................................................... 6-6

14-4 Index
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-23 Driving

Fluid............................................................ 11-18, 12-8 All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-21
Coolant............................................................ 11-14, 12-8 AWD models........................................................... 8-5
Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-15 Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 6
Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-15 Drinking..................................................................... 5
Cooling system ......................................................... 11-13 Drugs........................................................................ 6
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4 Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-48 Pets.......................................................................... 7
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10
Set indicator light ................................................... 3-30 Tips ................................................. 7-23, 7-29, 8-2, 8-5
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-7 Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 6
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-7 Winter .................................................................... 8-8
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-8
E
D ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-10
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-91 Electrical system ........................................................ 12-9
Defogger................................................................. 3-106 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system........... 7-34
Defrosting ................................................................. 4-11 Warning ................................................................ 3-19
Deicer .................................................................... 3-106 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-14
Differential gear oil Engine
Front ........................................................... 11-19, 12-7 Compartment overview............................................ 11-8
Rear............................................................ 11-19, 12-7 Coolant ....................................................... 11-14, 12-8
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 5, 8-2
Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-24 Hood .................................................................... 11-7
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-33 Low oil level warning light........................................ 3-16
Dome light .................................................................. 6-2 Oil .............................................................. 11-10, 12-4
Door Overheating ........................................................... 9-12
Locks ..................................................................... 2-4 Starting & stopping ........................................... 7-9, 7-11
Open warning light ................................................. 3-20 Event data recorder ........................................................ 8
Double trip meter ......................................................... 3-9 Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
Drive belts................................................................ 11-18

Index 14-5
F Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5 Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-5
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-12 Gauge................................................................... 3-10
Fluid level Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Brake .................................................................. 11-19 Fuses ..................................................................... 11-38
Clutch.................................................................. 11-20 Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-18
Fog light ................................................................... 3-93 G
Bulb .......................................................... 11-42, 12-14 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-14
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Glove box................................................................... 6-6
Switch .................................................................. 3-93 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-14
Folding mirror switch ................................................ 3-105
Front H
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-19, 12-7 Hands-free system...................................................... 5-39
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-21 Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-7, 9-2
Side marker light................................................... 11-42 Head restraint adjustment
Turn signal/Parking and front side marker light ......... 11-42 Front seat............................................................... 1-5
Front fog light ................................................... 3-93, 11-42 Rear seat ............................................................... 1-9
Bulb .......................................................... 11-42, 12-14 Headlight
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-92
Switch .................................................................. 3-93 Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-40
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2 Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-14
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-4 Control switch ........................................................ 3-88
Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5 Flasher.................................................................. 3-90
Power seat.............................................................. 1-5 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Reclining................................................................. 1-4 HID headlights ......................................................... 11-40
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ......................... 1-4 High beam indicator light ............................................. 3-30
Front side marker...................................................... 11-42 High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-90
Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker ............. 11-42 Hill descent control ..................................................... 7-39
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Consumption indicator .................................... 3-31, 3-40 Hill start assist ................................................. 7-46, 11-23

14-6 Index
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-20 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-30

To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-46 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-23
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-22
HomeLink® ................................................................ 3-99 X-mode ................................................................. 3-30
Hook Information display...................................................... 3-31
Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-16 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-97
Convenient............................................................ 6-13 Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-12 iPod® operations ........................................................ 5-28
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13
Horn....................................................................... 3-108 J
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-14 Jack and jack handle ................................................... 9-4
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-5
I Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3
Light....................................................................... 3-5 K
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-92 Key............................................................................ 2-2
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-2 Number .................................................................. 2-2
Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-28 Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-4
Indicator light Replacement........................................................... 2-3
Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-15 Keyless access entry function ...................................... 2-11
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-30 Keyless access with push-button start system................. 2-8
Cruise control set................................................... 3-30 Disabling keyless access functions ........................... 2-15
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-30 Locking and unlocking doors.................................... 2-11
Headlight .............................................................. 3-30 Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-13
High beam ............................................................ 3-30 Warning chimes and warning light ............................ 3-23
Hill descent control................................................. 3-30 When access key does not operate properly.............. 9-17
Hill start assist OFF................................................ 3-20 Keyless entry system .................................................. 2-17
Immobilizer............................................................ 3-28
Security ................................................................ 3-28 L
Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-29 Lap belt pretensioner .................................................. 1-23
SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-29 Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5

Index 14-7
License plate light ..................................................... 11-44 Manual
Light Climate control ........................................................ 4-7
Backup ................................................................ 11-43 Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-25
Cargo area.............................................................. 6-2 Seat....................................................................... 1-4
Control switch........................................................ 3-88 Transmission ......................................................... 7-21
Daytime running..................................................... 3-91 Transmission oil ........................................... 11-18, 12-7
Dome ..................................................................... 6-2 Map light .................................................................... 6-3
Front fog...................................................... 3-93, 11-42 Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-19
Front side marker........................................ 11-42, 12-14 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-7
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5 Mirror defogger ........................................................ 3-106
License plate ........................................................ 11-44 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-97
Map ....................................................................... 6-3 Moonroof................................................................... 2-39
Parking ................................................................ 11-42 Multi function display................................................... 3-36
Rear combination.................................................. 11-43
Stop .................................................................... 11-43 N
Tail...................................................................... 11-43 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
Turn signal ......................................... 3-91, 11-42, 11-43
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12 O
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-20 Odometer ................................................................... 3-8
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-17 Oil filter ................................................................... 11-11
Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-33 Oil level
Engine ................................................................ 11-10
M Front differential gear ............................................ 11-19
Maintenance Manual transmission ............................................. 11-18
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3 Rear differential gear ............................................ 11-19
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3 Warning light.......................................................... 3-16
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-21 Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-16
Tips...................................................................... 11-5 On-road and off-road driving ...................................... 7, 8-6
Tools ...................................................................... 9-3 Outside
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-14 Mirror defogger .................................................... 3-106
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-104

14-8 Index
Temperature indicator ..................................... 3-31, 3-40 Turn signal light.................................................... 11-43

Overhead console ........................................................ 6-7 Rear seat ................................................................... 1-8
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-12 Folding down ......................................................... 1-10
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-9
P Reclining ............................................................... 1-12
Parking Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-17
Brake ................................................................... 7-43 Rear window
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-24 Defogger ............................................................. 3-106
Light.................................................................... 11-42 Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-96
Tips...................................................................... 7-43 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-35
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Recommended
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3 Brake fluid ............................................................. 12-8
Power Clutch fluid .................................................. 11-20, 12-8
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-7 Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-8
Outlets.................................................................... 6-9 Engine oil .............................................................. 12-4
Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-104 Front differential gear oil.......................................... 12-7
Rear gate...................................................... 2-32, 9-19 Manual transmission oil ........................................... 12-7
Seat ....................................................................... 1-5 Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-7
Steering ................................................................ 7-31 Spark plugs ........................................................... 12-9
Steering warning light ............................................. 3-21 Refueling.................................................................... 7-5
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-25, 1-66 Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-14
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8 Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-17
Push-button Replacement
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5 Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-23
Starting and stopping engine ................................... 7-11 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-33
Replacing
R Access key battery ............................................... 11-45
Rear Air cleaner element............................................... 11-16
Combination lights................................................. 11-43 Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-20
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-19, 12-7 Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-46
Gate............................................................. 2-31, 9-18 Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-40, 12-14

Index 14-9
Backup light ......................................................... 11-43 Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-11
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-42 Security
Headlight ............................................................. 11-40 Alarm system ......................................................... 2-20
License plate light ................................................. 11-44 Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-2
Parking light ......................................................... 11-42 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-28
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-43 Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-26
Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-43 Select lever
Stop light ............................................................. 11-43 Position indicator .................................................... 3-29
Tail light ............................................................... 11-43 Shift lock function ................................................... 7-28
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-12 Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-26
Roof molding and crossbar ......................................... 8-15 Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-12
Roof rails .................................................................. 8-14 Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-21
SI-DRIVE .................................................................. 7-29
S Indicator light ......................................................... 3-29
Safety Snow tires ....................................................... 8-11, 11-25
Precautions when driving ............................................. 3 Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10
Symbol ...................................................................... 2 Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-19
Warnings ................................................................... 2 Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-17, 12-9
Satellite radio ............................................................ 5-19 Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Seat Speedometer .............................................................. 3-8
Fabric................................................................... 10-5 SRS
Front ...................................................................... 1-2 Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-56
Heater .................................................................... 1-7 Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-46
Height adjustment .................................................... 1-4 Side airbag ............................................................ 1-56
Power..................................................................... 1-5 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 3, 1-37
Rear....................................................................... 1-8 SRS airbag system
Seatbelt ................................................................. 3, 1-13 Monitors ................................................................ 1-64
Fastening.............................................................. 1-15 Servicing ............................................................... 1-65
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-21 Warning light.......................................................... 3-13
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-21 Starting & stopping engine..................................... 7-9, 7-11
Safety tips............................................................. 1-13 State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7

14-10 Index
Steering wheel Towing ...................................................................... 9-13

Power................................................................... 7-31 All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-16
Tilt/telescopic....................................................... 3-108 Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-15
Stop light ................................................................. 11-43 Hooks ................................................................... 9-13
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-5 Weight .................................................................. 8-19
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-40 Trailer
Sun visors................................................................... 6-4 Connecting ............................................................ 8-17
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-37 Hitch ............................................................. 8-16, 8-21
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5 Towing .................................................................. 8-18
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-23
T Trip meter................................................................... 3-9
Tachometer ................................................................. 3-9 Turn signal
Temperature warning light Indicator lights........................................................ 3-30
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-17 Lever .................................................................... 3-91
Coolant................................................................. 3-15
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2 U
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-33, 1-36 Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-16
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-13 USB storage device operations .................................... 5-28
Tire
Chains.................................................................. 8-11 V
Inspection ............................................................ 11-26 Valet mode ................................................................ 2-25
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-27 Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-5
Replacement ........................................................ 11-30 Vehicle
Rotation ............................................................... 11-30 Capacity weight...................................................... 8-13
Size and pressure .................................................. 12-9 Identification ........................................................ 12-17
Types .................................................................. 11-25 Symbols .................................................................... 3
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....... 7-41, 9-8, 11-25 Vehicle Dynamics Control
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-23
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-25 OFF switch ............................................................ 7-37
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3 Operation indicator light........................................... 3-22
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-33, 1-36 System.................................................................. 7-36

Index 14-11
Warning light ......................................................... 3-22 Warranties and maintenance........................................ 8-18
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2 Washing .................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3
W Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-29
Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-11 Wheel
Warning chimes Aluminum ............................................................ 11-32
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-23 Balance............................................................... 11-29
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-11 Nut tightening torque............................................... 12-9
Warning light Replacement........................................................ 11-31
ABS ..................................................................... 3-18 Windows ................................................................... 2-27
Access key ........................................................... 3-23 Windshield
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-21 Washer fluid......................................................... 11-32
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-17 Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-95
Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-30 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-34
Brake system ........................................................ 3-19 Wiper deicer ........................................................ 3-106
Charge ................................................................. 3-16 Winter
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-14 Driving ................................................................... 8-8
Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-15 Tires ........................................................... 8-11, 11-25
Door open............................................................. 3-20 Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-93
Engine low oil level ................................................ 3-16 Wiper deicer ............................................................ 3-106
Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-20
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-23 X
Low fuel................................................................ 3-20 X-mode ..................................................................... 7-39
Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-17 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-16
Power steering ...................................................... 3-21
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-11
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-13
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-22
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-16
Warranties ..................................................................... 1

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

GAS STATION REFERENCE
& Fuel: & Engine oil:
! Non-turbo models Use only the following oils.
. API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
(90 RON) or higher. . or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the
! Turbo models ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) fuel is not readily available, F12-4.
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or
higher may be used with no detriment to engine durability or & Engine oil capacity:
driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in
maximum engine performance while using 91 AKI (95 RON) Non-turbo models: 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
fuel. If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 Turbo models: 5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)
RON) is not available, refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3. The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
& Fuel octane rating: filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-10.
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-3.
& Cold tire pressure:
& Fuel capacity: Refer to “Tires” F12-9.
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

MSA5M1503A
A8200BE-A
Issued December 2013
Printed in USA 12/13
2015A
Vehicles shown on the cover of this booklet

may not be available in all markets. Please
Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza, FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. see your Subaru dealer for a Product Brochure
P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 TOKYO, JAPAN detailing all currently available models.

2015 Subaru Forester PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Subaru Forester PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

*C Copyright 2013 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warranties How to use this Owner’s Chapter 4: Climate control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION & Abbreviation list

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

& Instrument panel 1) Outside mirror switch (page 3-104)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

& Steering wheel 1) Audio control buttons (page 5-34)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

& Combination meter 1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! U.S.-spec. models (type B) 1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Except U.S.-spec. models 1) Tachometer (page 3-9)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mark Name Page

Windshield washer 3-16

Sport (S) mode indi- 3-29

Intelligent (I) mode in-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

System servicing ............................................... 1-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Front seats If the front seatbacks are not

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

restraint device or in a seatbelt,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Seat heater (if equipped) desired, depending on the temperature.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rear seats & Armrest (if equipped)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When the rear-center seating position is seatback slightly to confirm that

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine